JP6116023B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has an outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a main body frame pivotally supported on one side of the front surface of the outer frame, and a game frame in which game balls can flow down. And a game board having. Then, when the game ball is driven toward the game area, the game ball driven into the game area flows down along the game board. The game area is provided with a number of obstacle nails having a predetermined gauge arrangement, a windmill, an electrical decoration member, a starting port, an effect display device, and the like arranged at appropriate positions in the vertical direction of the game area.

JP 2005-168619 A JP 2005-334389 A JP 2006-247107 A JP 2005-245750 A

  In such a gaming machine, it is desired to secure a wide production space.

An object of the present invention is to secure a wide production space .

The gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a game board section and the recreation plate portion of the game effects units realm can be placed an effect member at the back side are at least provided with a play area, the game machine is installed A tank part capable of storing game balls supplied from the game island, and formed so as to extend from the tank part to the rear side so that the game ball is guided to a position behind the tank part. a rear extension, the rear extended part or al of the game balls in even the rear-side position than the tank part lateral passage to flow down to the downstream side, and the position of the rear side of the tank portion A ball path having a height direction path connected to the lateral path and allowing the game ball from the horizontal path to flow down to the downstream side, and provided in the ball path, A payout device for paying out and the front side in which the game board is accommodated A frame having at least a portion, and the frame further includes a rear side wall behind the front side wall so that the height direction passage is arranged behind the front side wall. And a first drawer connector provided on the rear side of the game board so that the game board can be electrically connected to the game board when the game board is housed in the front side wall. A second drawer connector that can be fitted, and the ball passage includes a depth direction passage that rolls the game ball from the height direction passage to a storage tray on the front side of the frame body. Further, the second drawer connector is disposed on the right side as viewed from the front with respect to the depth direction passage, and the lateral passage and the height direction are disposed behind the frame body. Along each member constituting the passage Opening is provided in the Chi, located in the opening, and is characterized in further comprising a cover means which is arranged so as to cover the back side of the game effects unit.

According to the present invention, a wide production space can be ensured .

It is a perspective view which shows the state which obstruct | occluded the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. BB sectional view (A) in FIG. 8, CC sectional view (B) in FIG. 10 (A), DD sectional view (C) in FIG. 10 (A), E-in FIG. It is E sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a side view of the main body frame before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached the main body frame and the main body frame components. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a ball dispensing device, and a ball supply passage. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a ball dispensing device, and a ball supply passage. It is front sectional drawing of a ball path unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the ball dispensing apparatus. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a perspective view which shows the flow of the game ball in a ball supply path. It is a top view for demonstrating the effect | action of a full tank rocking | fluctuation plate. It is a front enlarged view centering on the junction part of a main part frame and a game production unit, (A) is a figure showing the injection mode of a game ball in a ball guide passage, and (B) is a figure of a game ball in a ball guide passage. It is a figure which shows a backflow aspect. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main drawer connector and the sub drawer connector. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the 1st surrounding wall and 2nd surrounding wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding frame for the door frame and the sliding frame for the body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding frame for door frames, and the sliding frame for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. It is a front view of a door frame at the time of removing the member irradiated to LED among the members which constitute a speaker cover and a decoration member. It is a front view of the dish unit provided in the front of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the plate unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the plate unit. It is a front view of a game production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the game production unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a game production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back surface of the game production unit. It is a front perspective enlarged view of a game production unit excluding a center character and a back unit. It is a back perspective enlarged view of a game production unit except a center character and a back unit. It is a side cross-sectional enlarged view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. FIG. 52 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 as viewed from the front. FIG. 52 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 as viewed from the back. It is a plane sectional view of a pachinko machine. It is a top sectional view of a pachinko machine, and is a figure where a main part frame opened to an outer frame, and a door frame opened to a main part frame. It is side surface sectional drawing of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of a main control board and a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern for every fluctuation pattern table set in a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a high disappointment fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern for every variation pattern table set in a high anticipation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a low expectation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern for every variation pattern table set in a low expectation | forecast variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of specific condition satisfaction. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a switchgear apparatus operation process. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in an external normal game state (External normal game state A or external normal game state B). It is a figure which shows the image which shows the one aspect | mode of the production | presentation aspect which appears on an effect display apparatus when it exists in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in time limit mode. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus when it rushes into promotion mode after the long open jackpot game based on the 1st long open jackpot ends. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus when it rushes into promotion mode after the short open big hit game based on the 1st short open big hit ends. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on an effect display apparatus in "retraction mode." It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode derived | led-out by the effect display apparatus, when a specific condition is satisfied in an external normal game state, or when winning a short opening big hit or the like. It is a figure which shows the effect display mode derived | led-out by the effect display apparatus, when a specific condition is satisfied in an external normal game state, or when winning a short opening big hit or the like. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation display aspect in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device in an external advantageous game state. It is a timing chart which shows the said control mode when the production | presentation control concerning "extended extension | expansion and deviation deviation twice" is performed. It is a front view of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed. It is a front view of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed. (A) is a figure which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol in an external normal game state, (b) is a figure which shows the display mode of the decoration symbol in an external advantageous game state. It is a figure which shows the table (reach symbol determination table) used for reach symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the table (re-lottery symbol determination table) used for the process concerning a re-lottery effect. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external normal game state. It is an effect image which shows a series of effect contents which appear on an effect display device in an external advantageous game state. It is a circuit diagram which shows a hot wire failure prevention circuit.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a perspective view seen from the front of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine.

  1 and 2, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a game frame 409 that includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3 on which the unit 4 can be mounted and a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable are provided. The locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 are both performed by the locking device 60. The outer frame 2 according to this embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape having a lateral width of approximately 52 cm, a height of approximately 81 cm, and a depth width of approximately 7 cm.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is formed with a game area 20 in which a game ball driven from a launching device 57 (see FIG. 4) described later can flow down, and the door frame 5 Includes a glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit that allows a player to visually recognize the game area 20, and a dish unit 300 disposed below the glass unit 190. The dish unit 300 is configured to be able to store game balls to be supplied to the launching device 57, and game balls (so-called prize balls) as prizes that can be given to the player as a result of the game are also stored in the dish unit. To be paid out. Hereinafter, in this specification, the side on which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 (the left side in FIG. 13) is referred to as a pivotal support side, and the opposite side of the pivotal support side (to the outer frame 2). On the other hand, the side on which the main body frame 3 is opened and the right side in FIG.

  A lower decorative plate 6 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 6a is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Although the details will be described later, the outer frame 2 is a connection for connecting upper and lower wooden upper and lower frame plates and left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with members. The upper support bracket 7 provided on the upper side of the outer frame 2 and the lower support bracket 8 provided on one side upper surface of the lower decorative plate 6 are respectively connected to an upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower By engaging the shaft support bracket 48, the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  As described above, the game effect unit 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 4, a prize ball tank 50 for delivering a prize ball to the back surface thereof, a tank rail A member (tank rail) 51, a ball passage unit 52, and a ball dispensing device (ball dispensing unit) 53 are attached, and a substrate unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface thereof. The board unit 54 includes various control boards and power supply boards 395 for controlling electrical components provided on the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the launch device 57 and the game effect unit 4 (see FIG. 58). Etc. are provided together. Further, a rear opening 70 (see FIG. 13) is formed in the main body frame 3, and a back cover 58 that covers the rear opening 70 is detachably provided. The “prize ball tank 50” corresponds to the “storage tank” of the present invention, the “ball passage unit 52” corresponds to the “payout passage device” of the present invention, and the “ball discharge device 53” corresponds to the “reservation tank device” of the present invention. It corresponds to a “dispensing device”.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) is provided with a guide rail 482 that partitions the game area 20 and guides the game ball into the game area 20 at the left edge of the game area 20. ing. The guide rail 482 includes an outer rail unit 472 and an inner rail unit 462. Further, the upper end portion of the inner rail unit 462 has a backflow preventing member 463 that prevents a hit ball once launched and taken into the game area 20 from flowing back to the outer rail unit 472 again. On the other hand, when the hit ball that slid on the outer rail unit 472 vigorously collides with the upper right edge of the game area 20 in front view, an impact portion 476 that repels the hit ball inside the game area 20 is provided. Have. In addition, the stopper part 476 is comprised with the elastic body of rubber | gum or a synthetic resin.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle unit 318 in the above-described dish unit 300. Here, the number of the dish units 300 provided in the door frame 5 is one, and the handle unit 318 conventionally provided in the main body frame 3 is provided in the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. Moreover, since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

[Outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. FIG. 8 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the outer frame. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 8A, a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A, a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 10A, and FIG. It is EE sectional drawing (D) of).

  6 and 7, the outer frame 2 connects the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 with connecting members 14 for connecting the respective end portions. By this, it is assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape. The “side frame plates 12 and 13” correspond to the “vertical frame (vertical plate)” of the present invention.

  Specifically, the connecting member 14 is formed in a podium shape having a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center portion is formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The engagement notches 10B and 11B are fitted. Then, the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 that are lowered one step, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are disposed on one side of the left and right portions that are lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact. In this state, the insertion holes 10C and 11C formed on both sides of the engagement notch 10B of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 11B of the lower frame plate 11, respectively, A plurality (two in the case of illustration) of connecting holes 16 (shown in the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side in FIG. Is also present in the other connecting members 14), and is fixed by a plurality (two in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 16 </ b> B from above or below.

  Further, a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 12B and 13B drilled in the upper and lower end portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a plurality formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions lowered by one step. (In the illustrated case, three) connecting holes 15 (shown on the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the open side frame plate 13 in FIG. 7 but also on the other connecting members 14) Are fixed by a plurality (three in the illustrated case) of connecting screws 15B from the outside of the side, and the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected to each other. Are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 15B, one connecting screw 15B does not connect the side frame plates 12, 13 and the connecting member 14, but the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the connecting member 14. Are directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the short side upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as the conventional one, and the long side frame The plates 12 and 13 are made of an extruded plate of a light metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. That is, the outer frame 2 is composed of two wooden short plates and two light metal long plates. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is to make nails easier when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island. More specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island, it is necessary to perform an operation for fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are nailed to the island. Therefore, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as the conventional one so that nails can be easily nailed to the island.

  On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. When the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 is reduced, the left and right widths in the front view of the peripheral walls 290 to 293 (see FIG. 13) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 (that is, the pivot support side). Left and right peripheral walls 290 to 293 and the open side peripheral walls 290 to 293 can be widened, and as a result, a large game effect unit 4 in the left and right direction can be mounted on the main body frame 3. It becomes. As a result, the game area 20 can be formed larger as a result, and the effect display device 115 can be enlarged while securing the area where the game ball flows down.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side (the side frame plate 13 on the open side is the side frame plate) in order to reduce the thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the wooden. 12 is a left and right side), and a space portion 12G (the space portion 13G of the side frame plate 13 on the open side is shown in FIG. 9) opened rearward by a rib is formed, and the thickness h2 of the rear portion is It is pultruded to be thick. Of course, the thickness h2 is the same as or slightly thinner than the conventional wooden thickness (that is, it is preferably 19 mm or less in relation to the later-described game effect unit installation recess 30). Further, by forming the space portion 12G in this way, the thickness h2 of the rear portion can be reduced compared to the case where the rib is simply bent from the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13. it can. Note that such pultrusion molding cannot be performed with wood. Therefore, only by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 made of a metal that can be drawn and molded, the strength can be maintained as compared with the conventional wood while reducing the wall thickness. Further, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light metal such as an aluminum alloy, the weight of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 10D, one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 14 that are lowered by one step is fitted in front of the space portion 12G of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side. A groove 12F (the groove 13F of the open side frame 13 is shown in FIG. 6) is formed. From the groove portion 12F to the front end portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side, as shown in FIGS. Although it is in the form of a flat plate that comes into contact, a shallow concave portion for material reduction is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 12F is formed, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 10B, a concave portion 12H (open side) into which the hanging piece portion 7E of the upper support fitting 7 is inserted. A recess 13H of the side frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece of the upper support fitting 7 on the upper portion in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 14. A mounting hole 12 </ b> C for fixing the portion 7 </ b> E to the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side with a mounting screw 17 is formed. Further, a mounting hole 12D is formed in the lower part of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side so as to be fixed with the mounting screw 18 so as to coincide with the mounting hole 8C formed in the side bent portion of the lower support fitting 8. Has been. Further, an attachment for fixing the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side and the lower decorative plate 6 to the front portion of the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side at the lower portion of the mounting hole 12D with the fastening screw 6E. A hole 12E is formed.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 14, the open side frame plate 13 is provided with a mounting hole 13 </ b> C for attaching the closing projection 22 with an attaching screw 22 </ b> B. Further, an attachment hole 13C for attaching the closing projection 23 with the attachment screw 23B is formed in the lower portion of the side frame portion 13C. Further, a mounting hole 13D for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower decorative plate 6 with the fixing screws 6E is formed at the lowermost part of the side frame plate 13 on the open side. The closing protrusions 22 and 23 are hook portions (details will be described later) of the locking device 60 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To engage. Then, as will be described later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 868 of the locking device 60 and turning it to one side, the hook portion of the locking device 60 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are disengaged, and the main body frame 3 is removed. The outer frame 2 can be opened.

  The lower decorative plate 6 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the lower decorative plate 6 are covered with a decorative cover plate 6a, but a fastening protrusion 6C (see FIG. 9) in which an elastic claw is formed at the rear end of the decorative cover plate 6a projects. Has been established. And this decoration protrusion board 6a is attached to the lower decoration board 6 by making this fixation protrusion 6C penetrate the fixation hole 6D which penetrates the lower decoration board 6. FIG. A guide plate 6F for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 6a.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, an upper support fitting 7 that also functions to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side, and an upper surface on one side of the lower decorative plate 6. A lower support fitting 8 attached along the main body frame 3 is provided.

  The upper support fitting 7 is formed with a support hole 19A formed by bending the support protrusion piece 19 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 19 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin (see FIG. 13) of the upper shaft support 47 of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange hole 19A.

  Further, the lower support fitting 8 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support projection 21 is projected upward from the protruding portion, and the lower shaft support bracket of the main body frame 3 is projected on the support projection 21. A support hole formed in 48 (see FIG. 13) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, the support protrusion 21 of the lower support bracket 8 is engaged with the support hole formed in the lower shaft support bracket 48 of the main body frame 3, and then the main body frame 3. The shaft can be supported in a freely openable / closable manner by hooking the shaft support pin of the upper shaft support metal 47 into the support hole 19A.

[About the body frame]
Next, the launching device 57, the ball dispensing device 53, the locking device 60, the substrate unit 54, and the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. 4 and 5 are as described above, and FIG. 11 is a front view of a front component member and a main body frame of a game effect unit described later. FIG. 12 is a side view of the main body frame before the parts are attached. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a main body frame to which components are attached as viewed from the front. FIG. 14 is a rear view of the main body frame to which components are attached. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the main body frame to which the main body frame and the main body frame components are attached.

  First, the structure of the main body frame 3 to which the game effect unit 4 is attached will be described. The main body frame 3 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. An upper shaft support bracket 47 and a lower shaft support bracket 48 are attached to the outer frame 2 to support the opening and closing shaft. By engaging the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 with the upper support bracket 7 and the lower support bracket 8 attached to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be pivotally supported. As described above, the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. However, when the main body frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 is also opened and closed along with the main body frame 3. .

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 13, the main body frame 3 according to this embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape. It has thin-walled (for example, 1 to 3.5 mm thick) peripheral walls (2 mm in this embodiment) 290 to 293 extending so as to stand upright. Moreover, it has the game production | presentation unit installation recessed part (large accommodation part, large accommodation space) 30 which is the space area | region formed by being enclosed by these surrounding surface walls 290-293. As will be described later, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 according to this embodiment are positioned 13 cm or more behind the front surface of the outer frame 2 beyond the rear surface (positions spaced 6 cm or more from the rear surface of the outer frame 2). 1st main body frame side wall provided to cover the game effect unit installation recess 30 from the side frame plate 13 side, and the game effect unit installation recess 30. And a second main body frame side wall provided so as to cover from the side frame plate 12 side, and a main body frame upper wall provided so as to cover the game effect unit installation recess 30 from above. .

Here, as shown in FIG. 13, various parameters for determining the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 are as follows.
The maximum width of the front receiving opening 30a of the game production unit installation recess 30 (the distance between the front end portion (peripheral wall 290) of the first main body frame side wall and the front end portion (peripheral wall 290) of the second main body frame side wall) ) L1 is approximately 49cm.
The depth width (depth width on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293) L2 of the game rendering unit installation recess 30 is approximately 14 cm.
-From the inner wall of the part (the last end of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 13 side) of the first body frame side wall part, the part of the second body frame side wall part (the last end) The distance (maximum lateral width on the back side) L3 to the inner wall of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 12 side is approximately 44 cm.
The height (front height) L4 of the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 on the side frame plate 13 side is approximately 54 cm (equivalent to the inner wall side height of the peripheral wall 290 on the side frame plate 12 side).
The height (rear side height) L5 of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 13 side is approximately 46 cm (smaller than the height on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 293 on the side frame plate 12 side).

According to such a configuration, even if the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is estimated to be small,
Volume = “maximum width L1 of the front receiving port 30a” × “front side height L4” × “depth width of the peripheral wall 290” + “maximum side width L3” × “rear side height L5” × “around” Depth width of face walls 291-293 "
Based on such a calculation formula, “31259” cubic centimeters can be calculated. Of the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral wall 290 to 293, the depth width of the peripheral wall 290 is approximately 4.2 cm, and the depth width of the peripheral walls 291 to 293 is approximately 9.3 cm.

  That is, conventionally, the main body frame 3 is provided with a payout device for paying out game balls and a payout passage for guiding the game balls to the payout device, but the game board is designed so as not to interfere with the payout device and the payout passage. It was common to do this, and this limited the space behind the game board. In this respect, according to such a configuration, the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a is approximately 49 cm, the depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the peripheral walls 290 to 293 is approximately 14 cm, and further, “31259” cubic centimeters are extremely large. Since the space (the game effect unit installation recess 30) is secured in advance, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom with respect to how the game area, the effect area, and the control area are designed. Further, since such a game effect unit installation recess 30 is formed so as to be covered with the peripheral wall 290 to 293, members (game area, effect area, and control area) accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 are formed. It is possible to suitably suppress fraudulent acts on (part).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a large game board member in which a game area 20 (see FIG. 1) is mainly formed with a maximum lateral width of about 49 cm, and mainly over the entire back surface side of the large game board member. A game effect control unit 99 configured to have a large-scale back member in which an effect area and a control area are formed is designed as a member accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. That is, as will be described later, in this game effect control unit 99, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 49,
A frame-shaped front component member (game region partition frame member) 680 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the game region 20 (see FIG. 1).
A transparent plate-like gaming panel 409 arranged to close the gaming area 20 (see FIG. 1) on the rear side of the front component 680.
A fitting step (holding step) 540a that covers the outer periphery of the gaming panel 409 and holds the gaming panel 409 detachably from the front side, and is formed inside the fitting step 540a and the gaming area 20 (FIG. A frame-shaped panel holder 540 that has a through-hole 540b that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a size that roughly corresponds to 1), and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 680.
For large game board members composed of parts such as
A back box 514 attached to the rear side of the panel holder 540 and having a predetermined depth with the front side open and having an opening on the rear wall, and a game on the outer periphery of the opening in the back box 514 A back unit 510 having at least a light-like decorative body 520 disposed including a portion overlapping with the game area 20 (see FIG. 1) when viewed from the person side.
An effect display device 115 arranged so as to close the opening of the back unit 510 from the rear side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image.
An inner peripheral board that is attached to the back of the effect display device 115 and controls the effect display device 115, and an outer periphery that is attached to the back of the light decorative body 520 and controls the light decorative body 520 A control device (not shown) in which a plurality of control boards including the side boards are arranged in the depth direction.
A large-scale back member composed of parts and the like is attached with a depth width of approximately 8 to 13 cm over substantially the entire back side of the large game board member, and both the large game board member and the large-scale back member The game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 can be accommodated only from the front accommodation opening 30a.

  In such a game effect control unit 99, as will be described later, a transparent plate-like game panel 409, a back unit 510 and the like are provided, so that a new effect different from the conventional effect can be performed. become. However, when the transparent panel-like game panel 409 and the back unit 510 are provided in this way, the game area and the effect area are completely separated in the depth direction. Moreover, in this embodiment, an effect display device 115 arranged to close the opening of the back unit 510 from the rear side, and a light-like decorative body 520 arranged on the outer periphery of the opening of the back unit 510 are provided. Therefore, a control device associated therewith is further provided over substantially the entire back surface of the back unit 510. For this reason, the game effect control unit 99 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape having a depth width of approximately 12 cm on the entire surface, but according to the game effect unit installation recess 30 described above, Even such a game effect control unit 99 can be stored, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  A plate portion 32 is formed below the game effect unit installation recess 30. Also, on the front side surrounding the game effect unit installation recess 30, door hook holes 352 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the front right side that is the open side. The door hook hole 352 is provided to penetrate the door frame hook portion 973 provided in the locking device 60 (details will be described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 so as to protrude forward. . Further, a unit positioning protrusion 37 for engaging with a positioning recess 466 formed in the game panel 409 is provided on the inner side surface of the left side portion of the front surface that is the shaft support side.

  By the way, conventionally, it was fundamentally impossible to form the game production unit installation recess 30 having the volume as described above. That is, in a general pachinko machine, the maximum width of the outer frame 2 is set to approximately 520 mm in consideration of the island facilities installed in the hall. However, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the thickness of the outer frame is set to approximately 20 mm, the thickness of the vertical frame provided on the left and right (about 40 mm in total), and further, the body frame relative to the outer frame Considering the arrangement space such as a sliding rod that can be slid in the vertical direction so as to restrict the opening, it is impossible even to make the width of the member in which the game area into which the game ball is to be formed be 480 mm or more. It was. With such a background, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the minimum lateral strength of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 is ensured, and the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a is approximately 49 cm. An extremely large accommodation space (game production unit installation recess 30) such as approximately 14 cm as a depth width L2 on the inner wall side of the face walls 290 to 293 and further “31259” cubic centimeters is secured in advance.

  Hereinafter, various new configurations capable of securing such a large accommodation space (game production unit installation recess 30) will be described in order.

  First, the board part 32 provided below the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. The plate portion 32 is configured on the front side of the main body frame 3.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the firing rail 38 is screwed to the plate portion 32 from the center portion of the front surface toward the end portion on the open side. A rail connection member 44 projects from the front surface of the plate portion 32 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 38 (so-called M-shaped rail) on the shaft support side. When the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the rail connection member 44 is adjacent to the connection passage portion 477 that is the downstream end of the outer rail unit 472. An elliptical game effect for fixing the lower portion of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the game panel 409) to the side position on the shaft support side of the rail connection member 44 (position opposite to the launch rail 38). A unit fixture 46 is rotatably attached. The game effect unit fixing tool 46 rotates clockwise with the game effect unit 4 placed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, and presses the game effect unit fixing tool 46 against the front surface of the game panel 409. Thus, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 is fixed to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when removing the game effect unit 4, the lower part of the game panel 409 can be easily released by turning the game effect unit fixture 46 counterclockwise.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only one dish unit 300 is provided without providing a so-called lower dish as in the prior art. The reason why the lower plate is not provided is to increase the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 in order to enlarge the game area 20. In addition, a firing mechanism including a handle unit 318, a launch rail 38, a rail connection member 44, and the like is disposed in the plate portion 32. The plate portion 32 is located on the front side and below the game effect unit installation recess 30. Therefore, the game area 20 can be expanded in the vertical direction (the height direction seen from the player). Since there is no conventional lower plate, the plate portion 32 and thus the firing mechanism are located generally below the conventional gaming machine.

  By the way, in the position where the rail connection member 44 protrudes, a so-called foul port is formed in the conventional pachinko machine. This foul mouth played a role of accepting a game ball (so-called foul ball) that flowed back without being driven into the game area 20 even though it was launched, and to return the foul ball to the lower plate. The foul port was provided at this position because when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame, the rail provided on the game effect unit and the launch rail provided on the main body frame come into contact with each other. This is because there is a risk of damage. Therefore, by providing a gap between the game effect unit side rail and the main body frame side launch rail, the game effect unit side rail and main body frame side fire that may occur when the game effect unit is mounted on the main body frame It prevented contact with the rail.

  However, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not provided with a lower plate. Therefore, the foul port 489 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the front structural member 680 (more specifically, on the upstream side (shaft support side) of the connection passage portion 477 and the connection passage portion 477 and the guide rail 482 (outer rail). It is possible to return the foul ball to the storage part 361 of the dish unit 300 by forming it between the unit 472). Since the storage unit 361 is below the placement surface (the surface of the main body frame 3 on which the game effect unit 4 is placed) on which the game effect unit 4 is placed, the foul port 489 (see FIG. 23) is used as the game effect. By forming the unit 4 on the front component member 680 side, the foul sphere can be returned to the storage portion 361.

  With the above configuration, the foul ball can be returned to the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300 while increasing the vertical length of the game effect unit 4 without providing a lower dish, and the main body frame 3 can be It is possible to prevent contact between the connection passage portion 477 on the game panel 409 side and the firing rail 38 on the main body frame 3 side that may occur when the production unit 4 is mounted.

  Further, a prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided on the side of the game effect unit fixing tool 46 on the side of the shaft support. The prize ball payout stopper mechanism 39 is provided in the middle of the prize ball path for paying out the prize balls from the ball payout device 53 (see FIG. 13) to the dish unit 300 on the door frame 5 side. When the door is opened, the prize ball passage is automatically closed to prevent the balls from spilling out of the prize ball passage, while when the door frame 5 is closed, the prize ball passage automatically communicates with the ball. The prize balls paid out from the payout device 53 are paid out to the dish unit 300. A fastening hole 41 for fastening with a fastening part (not shown) and a fastening part 469 formed in the game effect unit 4 is formed in the plate part 32 above the launch position of the launch rail 38.

  In addition, a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 40 is formed on the lower portion of the open side of the plate portion 32 so as to bulge out toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). 57 is fixed to the launcher mounting portion 40 from the back surface of the main body frame 3. A handle connection window 40 a is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 40. A slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 (see FIG. 1) of the slide unit 230 attached to the rear surface side of the door frame 5 is inserted into the handle connection window 40a. When the door frame 5 is closed, a slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 described later is inserted into the handle connection window 40a, and the handle unit 318 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device 57 are linked. In addition, the launching device 57 can adjust the resilience of the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the handle unit 318, so that it is at the firing position of the launch rail 38. The game ball can be ejected and launched at a desired position in the game area 20.

  The front structure of the main body frame 3 is generally as described above. Next, the back side structure of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 and 14. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 14, a prize ball tank 50 for storing a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball or a rental ball is detachably attached to the upper back of the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the upper wall of the main body frame). It is attached to. A tank rail member 51 that guides the balls from the prize ball tank 50 in a laterally inclined manner is disposed below the prize ball tank 50, and further, a ball path from the lower end of the tank rail member 51 toward the lower side. A unit 52 and a ball dispensing device 53 are provided.

  That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the main body frame upper wall portion of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is inward from the rear end portion (peripheral wall 293) (in FIG. A rear wall portion (second rear wall portion) extending in the direction), and the second main body frame side wall portion of the peripheral wall surfaces 290 to 293 is a rear end portion (peripheral wall surface 293). And a rear wall portion (third rear wall portion) extending inward (leftward in FIG. 4). Of these, the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear wall portion of the main body frame upper wall portion, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are attached to the rear wall portion of the second main body frame side wall portion. In this way, the rear end portion of the peripheral wall 293 is purposely bent to provide the rear wall portion, thereby pressing the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 in which the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated. The tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 can be attached to the rear wall without any problem.

  Here, the tank rail member 51 attached to the outer surface of the rear wall portion of the main body frame upper wall portion allows game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 to be placed on the side of the first main body frame side wall portion (FIG. 4). A structure is adopted in which it is received from the middle and the left side and flows down to the side of the second main body frame side wall (right side in FIG. 4). Further, the tank rail member 51 has two passages (not shown) through which game balls flow down in two rows. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure a large number of game balls on the tank rail member 51 itself, and the payout of game balls to the player becomes smooth. The prize ball tank 50 and the tank rail member 51 may be integrally formed. However, considering that the degree of freedom in designing these members is increased, it is practically desirable to provide them as separate members.

  On the other hand, the ball passage unit 52 attached to the outer surface of the rear wall portion of the second main body frame side wall portion is separated from the tank rail member 51 in order to secure a depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30. The game balls are provided with a single passage (not shown) through which the game balls flow down. However, in this case, the game balls that have flowed down in two rows in the tank rail member 51 collide with each other when they reach the ball path unit 52 and become one row, and the payout of the game balls may be delayed. There is a concern that game balls may be clogged.

  Therefore, the tank rail member 51 according to this embodiment includes an order supply device 51 a that alternately supplies the game balls that have flowed down in two rows through the two passages to the ball passage unit 52. . Accordingly, it is possible to ensure the depth width as the game effect unit installation recess 30 while preferably avoiding the slow payout of the game ball and the occurrence of clogging of the game ball.

  In addition, as such an order supply device 51a, for example, a gear device provided with two gears that rotate while stocking one game ball between each tooth projecting on the rotating body is adopted. Can do. That is, in such a gear device, the two gears are respectively arranged separately from the two passages in a state where the positions of the teeth of each other are shifted by about the radius of the game ball. Yes. A game ball that has passed through one of the two gears is supplied to a single passage of the ball passage unit 521. In such a configuration, the game balls flowing down in two rows by the two passages of the tank rail member 51 are sequentially supplied to the one passage one by one by the order supply device 51a. Become.

  Then, the game ball guided to the ball passage unit 52 from the order supply device 51 a falls down the one passage and is further guided to the ball payout device 53. The game balls guided to the ball payout device 53 are a predetermined number of prize balls according to a payout control program executed by a payout control board 720 (see FIG. 58) housed in a payout control board box 55 described later. Or, as a rental ball, it is paid out to the dish unit 300 provided on the front side of the door frame 5. As will be described later, the ball payout device 53 is provided with a payout motor and a rotary payout member that is rotationally driven by the payout motor and pays out the balls one by one.

  Further, a board unit 54 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 (a surface bent inward from a later-described fourth peripheral wall 293) so as to be positioned below the lower end of the game effect unit 4. ing. The substrate unit 54 is a unit in which a plurality of substrate boxes for storing various control substrates are integrated as a unit. The plurality of board boxes include a payout control board box 55, a terminal board box 56, a power board box 62, and the like. These various board boxes are stacked by disposing a payout control board box 55 and a terminal board box 56 behind the power supply board box 62. Note that the payout control board box 55, the terminal board box 56, the power board box 62, and the like do not need to be replaced when the game effect unit 4 is replaced. Therefore, these control board boxes are integrated as a board unit 54 separated from the game effect unit 4 and arranged on the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, since the space in the depth direction of the game effect unit 4 is not obstructed by the plurality of board boxes, the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged in the depth direction. In addition to this, the game effect unit 4 and the board unit 54 can be efficiently arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the appearance is organized. If the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually troublesome, even if an unauthorized board such as a hanging board is attached, it becomes difficult for hall personnel to notice it. In this respect, if the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually arranged, it is easy to detect even if there is an illegal act as described above, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the illegal act.

  In addition, as will be described later, when the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the main control board provided on the game effect unit 4 side and the board provided on the board unit 54, the main control board. Electrical connection with a substrate that needs to be connected to the substrate is automatically performed by a drawer connector described later. Thereby, after the game effect unit 4 is stored and installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30, it is not necessary to perform an electrical connection work from behind the pachinko machine 1, and work efficiency is improved.

  A unitized launching device 57 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 40 (see FIG. 11) located below the substrate unit 54 described above. Further, a back cover 58 is provided at the rear opening 70 formed along the rear end of the aforementioned peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. The back cover (transparent cover body) 58 covers the game effect control unit 99 housed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 so as to be visible from the rear. The back cover 58 is attached to close the rear opening 70. In this state, as shown in FIG. 5, the vertical surface is substantially the same as the rear end portion of the tank rail member 51 that protrudes most rearward of the pachinko machine 1.

  That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the first main body frame side wall portion of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is inward from the rear end portion (circumferential wall 293) (in FIG. 4). And a rear wall (first rear wall) extending in the right direction. And the back cover support cylinder part 280 for pivotally supporting the said back cover 58 so that opening and closing is possible is provided in the outer surface of the rear wall part of the 1st main body frame side wall part. In this way, the rear end portion of the peripheral wall 293 is purposely bent to provide the rear wall portion, thereby compressing the depth width of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in which the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated. Without this, the back cover 58 can be attached to the rear wall.

  A locking device 60 is fixed to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3. The locking device 60 is a so-called W lock that locks both the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of door frame hooks 973 and cylinder locks 868 (both see FIG. 1) are provided so as to protrude from the locking device 60 toward the front of the main body frame 3. The details will be described later. The “cylinder lock 868” corresponds to the “operation unit” of the present invention.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 15, the main body frame 3 of this embodiment has the following assembly structure as a whole. That is, a tank mounting groove 202 is formed on the back surface side of the main body frame 3 on a vertical surface connecting the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291, and the prize ball tank 50 is played by the tank mounting groove 202. It is attached above the production unit installation recess 30. A rail locking groove 203 is formed along the opening edge of the rear opening 70, and the tank rail member 51 is attached along the upper rear wall 295 by the rail locking groove 203. In addition, the ball passage unit 52 is attached to the lower side of the tank rail member 51 by a passage unit attachment boss 204 formed on the back side of the shaft support side rear wall 296. In addition, in a ball dispenser installation area 205 formed below the tank rail member 51, a ball dispenser 53 is installed adjacent to the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the ball supply passage 59 is attached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to the ball supply passage installation portion 206 corresponding to the pivot support side bottom wall of the game effect unit installation recess 30.

  Further, the launching device 57 is attached to the inside of the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 40 by the launching device mounting boss 208 projecting rearward at the lower part of the rear side of the open side of the main body frame 3. Further, the board unit 54 in which the payout control board box 55, the terminal board box 56, the power board box 62, the board tray 64, and the like are unitized as one unit is attached to the mounting holes 207 provided on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 160. And fastened from the back side. A back cover support cylinder 280 is formed on the back side of the open side rear wall 294, and the back cover 58 is pivotally supported by the back cover support cylinder 280 so that the rear opening 70 can be closed. .

  As shown in the figure, in the main body frame 3 having such a structure, the game effect unit installation recess 30 is formed as a large capacity space, and the bottom wall portion of the game effect unit installation recess 30 is substantially flush. Therefore, it is easy to install the game effect unit 4 having a box-like appearance with a large depth in the game effect unit installation recess 30 as will be described later. Furthermore, since the game effect unit 4 having a box-like appearance substantially the same as the space shape of the game effect unit installation recess 30 can be closely installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 with no gap, Wobble and fraud are appropriately prevented. Below, the various members assembled | attached to the main body frame 3 are demonstrated further in detail separately.

<Tank rail material>
The tank rail member 51 disposed below the prize ball tank 50 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank, tank rail member, ball path unit, ball payout device, and ball supply path as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine showing the relationship among the prize ball tank, tank rail member, ball path unit, ball payout device, and ball supply path.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the tank rail member 51 is formed in the shape of an inclined bowl having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 1404 of the prize ball tank 50, and the lower surface of the downstream end is detailed later. It faces the ball passage unit 52 to be described. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 51 is a two-way passage 1412 through which game balls flow down in two rows by a partition wall. The bottom surface of the passage 1412 is cut out of a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll together with the game ball fall downward from the narrow groove.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 1413 having a weight on the middle downstream side of the middle part of the tank rail member 51 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 1413 hangs down into the two passages 1412 of the tank rail member 51, and when the game balls flowing down the passages 1412 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction, the ball leveling member 1413 The rectification is as follows. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 51 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 1413 is covered with a ball pressing plate 1414. The ball presser plate 1414 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that a game ball that has not become one step by the ball leveling member 1413 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 1416 (corresponding to the above-described order supply device 51a) are rotatably supported by shaft pins 1417 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 51 so as to face the respective passages 1412. The alignment gear 1416 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 1417 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 1416 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the respective passages 1412 of the tank rail member 51 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 1416, the game balls of the two rows of passages 1412 are alternately sent one by one. Will be. The alignment gear 1416 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 1415 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball path unit 52 for guiding the game balls dropped from the tank rail member 51 in a line to the ball payout device 53 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a front sectional view of the ball passage unit.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the ball passage unit 52 is provided along the vertical direction (height direction) so as to bypass the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 formed in the main body frame 3 on the back surface. In this spherical passage unit 52, a spherical drop passage (height direction passage) 1422 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 1421 bent on the back surface of the substantially rectangular plate material (the surface seen from the back surface is called the front surface). The ball drop passage 1422 has a front / rear bent passage portion 1422a bent upstream in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back), and a left / right direction (left / right direction seen from the rear) connected to the front / rear bent passage portion 1422a. The left and right bent passage portions 1422b are bent into the right and left bent passage portions 1422b, and the right and left bent passage portions 1422b are substantially vertical. Further, a cutout portion 1423 is formed in one bent passage wall 1421 constituting the vertical passage portion 1422c, and a ball breakage detection piece 1424 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 1425 is swingably attached to the cutout portion 1423. ing. A ball break switch 1426 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 1424, and an actuator 1427 of the ball break switch 1426 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 1424.

  Thus, when a game ball is present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, the ball break detection piece 1424 is pressed by the game ball present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, and the actuator 1427 is pushed to turn on the ball break switch 1426. On the other hand, if there is no game ball in the vertical passage portion 1422c due to clogging or lack of balls, the ball break detection piece 1424 swings into the vertical passage portion 1422c, and the actuator 1427 turns off the ball break switch 1426. To do. When the ball cut switch 1426 is turned OFF, the rotation of a payout motor of a ball payout device 53, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the winning ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 1428 is formed at the lower end of the notch portion 1423 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detecting piece 1424 to the opposite side of the passage portion. A ball clogging insertion groove 1429 is formed in the vertical passage portion 1422c corresponding to the cut detection piece 1424. The ball clogging insertion groove 1429 is inserted into a pin from the rear surface side of the ball dispensing device 53 when the ball breakage detecting piece 1424 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 1421 facing the broken piece detection piece 1424 is formed in a slightly bulging shape toward the broken piece detection piece 1424 side. This is because when the sphere is present in the vertical passage portion 1422c, the sphere break detection piece 1424 is surely pressed and the sphere break switch 1426 is turned ON.

<Ball dispenser>
Next, the ball dispensing device 53 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball passage unit 52 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the ball dispensing device. FIG. 20 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as the payout member.

  The ball dispensing device 53 includes a unit base body 1451 in which a bent passage 1453 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 1452, a unit sub plate 1475 that covers the rear surface of the unit base body 1451, and an upper surface of the unit sub plate 1475 ( A relay board 1480 attached to the rear surface side, and gear groups 1493, 1494, 1497 and a gear cover 1510 covering the detection disk 1500 provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface side region) of the unit sub-plate 1475. . Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 1451 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub-plate 1475 side. A bent passage 1453 is formed by the wall 1452. The bent passage wall 1452 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 1451 to approximately the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both sides of the unit base body 1451 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 1452 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a sorting space 1455 in which a sprocket 1457 serving as a sorting member is disposed. A passage partition wall 1459 is formed so as to project from the lower portion of the distribution space 1455 to the left and right ends of the unit base body 1451 so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 1452 divided into left and right. That is, the right and left bent passage wall 1452 and the passage partition wall 1459 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 1455, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 1460, The other passage forms a ball passage 1461. The passage partition wall 1459 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 1464 for storing the payout motor 1465 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 1459.

  Further, in the distribution space 1455, a sprocket 1457 as a payout member in which a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits is formed is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 1456 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotating shaft 1458 to which the 1457 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 1455. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 1459 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 1455 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 1457, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 1460 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 1462 is detachably mounted. The payout ball detection sensor 1462 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes at the tip, and an attachment portion that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by the bent passage wall 1452. Thus, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 1462 is connected to a relay board 1480 described later.

  A circular motor storage space 1464 for storing the payout motor 1465 is formed below the unit base body 1451 and between the prize ball passage 1460 and the ball removal passage 1461. The motor storage space 1464 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 1465 is accommodated inside. In the state where the payout motor 1465 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 1491 of the unit sub-plate 1475, the motor shaft 1468 of the payout motor 1465 passes through the shaft insertion hole formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 1491 and passes through the first gear. 1493 is fixed. Further, the unit base body 1451 is provided with a guide protrusion 1469 for guiding the game ball, which has been extracted at the lowermost end of the ball extraction passage 1461, to the back side of the ball dispensing device 53, and is guided to the guide protrusion 1469. The spheres thus guided are guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 415, which will be described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform).

  Further, the unit sub-plate 1475 has a payout motor 1465 attached to a synthetic resin plate covering the bent passage 1453 portion, the distribution space 1455 portion, and the prize ball passage 1460 portion of the unit base body 1451 and the ball passage 1461. It is comprised by attaching the aluminum heat sink 1491 which covers a downstream part. A relay board region 1476 for attaching the relay board 1480 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 1475, and a plurality of gears 1493, 1494, 1497 and detection are provided below the relay board area 1476. A gear region 1490 to which the disk 1500 is attached is formed.

  Further, the relay board 1480 relays the wiring from the payout ball detection sensor 1462, the payout motor 1465, and the sensor 1505 described later, and the wiring from the payout control board 720 (see FIG. 58) described later. Therefore, the relay board 1480 is provided with a plurality of connectors 1481 and is covered with the board cover 1485.

  In addition, the substrate cover 1485 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and a button opening 1488 and a connection opening 1489 are formed in the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 1485. In the state where the substrate cover 1485 is covered, the head of the detachable button 1472 slightly faces the outside from the button opening 1488. In addition, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 1480 is drawn out from the connection opening 1489 to the outside.

  Next, gears 1493, 1494, 1497 provided in the gear region 1490 and the detection disk 1500 will be described. As described above, the first gear 1493 is fixed to the tip of the motor shaft 1468 of the dispensing motor 1465. Above the first gear 1493, a second gear 1494 that meshes with the first gear 1493 is rotatably provided on the shaft 1495. Above the second gear 1494, a third gear 1497 that meshes with the second gear 1494 is rotatably provided on the shaft 1498. Further, above the third gear 1497, a detection disk 1500 having a gear portion 1502 that meshes with the third gear 1497 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 1458 that supports the sprocket 1457. The sprocket 1457 and the detection disk 1500 are configured to rotate integrally around the rotation shaft 1458. Therefore, when the payout motor 1465 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 1457 via the first gear 1493, the second gear 1494, the third gear 1497, and the gear portion 1502 of the detection disk 1500.

  The outer circumference of the detection disk 1500 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 1502, and the outer circumferential portion protruding outward from the gear portion 1502 has the same number as the concave portions of the sprocket 1457 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 1501 are formed. This detection notch 1501 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 1505 provided on a sensor substrate 1504 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 1507 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 1475. The sensor 1505 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 1457 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 1501 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 1505 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 1457), the sprocket 1457 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). It is. Note that the number of game balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 1462 provided in the prize ball passage 1460 and used for counting.

  Although the configuration of the ball payout device 53 has been described above, in the state where the unit base body 1451, the unit sub-plate 1475, the relay board 1480, the board cover 1485, and the gear cover 1510 are assembled, a game ball to be paid out is guided. A cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 1465 is positioned below the bent passage 1453 so as to be accommodated. In addition, the payout motor 1465 and the sprocket 1457 are connected so as to be rotationally driven by a plurality of gears 1493, 1494, 1497, 1500 (1502) provided in the gear region 1490 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 1475. . Therefore, unlike the conventional one in which the depth width dimension from the upper side to the lower side of the ball payout device 53 is made substantially constant and the payout motor protrudes to the front side, the rear surface side or the side side of the ball payout device as in the prior art. It can be set as the structure where any part of 53 does not protrude toward back further.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a seal 53 a is attached to the back surface of the payout device 53 so as to conceal the screw fixing portion of the screw used for assembling the payout device 53. In recent years, a gaming machine has a complicated back surface structure due to an increase in the size of a liquid crystal display or the like, and it is necessary to consider the maintainability of workers such as hall personnel. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, maintainability is improved by arranging a series of payout passages on the back of the gaming machine. However, when the maintainability is improved, troubles such as disassembling precision parts unintentionally by the operator are likely to occur. For this reason, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such troubles in the dispensing device 53, the screw used for assembling the dispensing device 53 is concealed by the seal 53a, and the dispensing device 53 is disassembled unless the seal 53a is peeled off. I can't do that. That is, by providing the seal 53a, the operator's intention to work is clearly confirmed, and unintentional removal and disassembly are preferably prevented. Further, by printing the characters “disassembly prohibited” on the seal 53a, the operator's attention can be urged and the intention of the operation can be confirmed more clearly. In addition, as long as it confirms the work intention, it is possible to provide not only the seal 53a but also a cover member that covers the screw. It is also effective to color the seal 53a with yellow and black, which are generally known as colors that call attention.

<Sphere supply passage>
The sphere supply passage (depth direction passage) 59 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball dispensing device 53 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing a flow of game balls in the ball supply passage. FIG. 22 is a plan view for explaining the operation of the full tank rocking plate.

  The ball supply passage 59 is composed of a box main body 1521 formed in a box shape having an upper surface opened and extending in a substantially horizontal direction with a thickness of one game ball, and a lid body 1541 covering the upper surface of the box main body 1521. The overall shape is flat. The ball supply passage 59 is provided along the bottom surface of the game effect unit 4 when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The box main body 1521 is configured such that a game ball flowing in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 1460 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the ball outlet 1536. For this reason, a side guide passage 1522 for guiding the game ball flowing in from the prize ball entrance 1542 formed in the lid 1541 to the side from one end to the other end is formed by the partition wall 1526 at the upstream portion. . A side guide receiving portion 1523 formed in a concave arc shape is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 1522 immediately below the prize ball entrance 1542 so as to guide the game ball toward the side. A buffer member 1524 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the passage 1522 to receive the impact of the game ball flowing through the side guide passage 1522 and guide it to the downstream side.

  In addition, the game ball that collides with the buffer member 1524 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 1522 is changed in direction to the downstream side, and then the side wall of the side guide passage 1522 is formed by the inclined side wall 1527 formed on the downstream side. It is induced to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere. That is, the reverse side guide passage 1525 is formed by the partition wall 1526 and the inclined side wall 1527. The game ball that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 1525 is then guided to the front guide passage 1535 that is formed forward, and the above-described dish unit 300 is introduced from the ball outlet 1536 that is formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 1535. To the storage section 361.

  Incidentally, a switch housing space 1528 is formed at one end portion of the reverse side guide passage 1525 on the downstream side of the buffer member 1524 so as to protrude outward. A full swing plate 1531 through which a support shaft 1529 is inserted is swingably provided at a lower front position of the switch storage space 1528. The full tank swinging plate 1531 is formed in a plate shape so as to form one end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 1525, a shaft hole is formed in the lower end of the plate shape, and a detection piece 1532 is integrally formed on the back surface thereof. Is formed. The detection piece 1532 is formed by vertically projecting a rear end portion of a fan-like connection plate connected to the back surface of the full tank swinging plate 1531. The projected detection piece 1532 is a projection that will be described in detail later. The ON / OFF state of the full tank switch 730 is detected by shielding or conducting between the light projector and the light receiver of the light receiving type full tank switch 730. The lid 1541 is provided with a switch mounting portion 1543 for mounting a full light switch 730 of a light projecting / receiving type at a position corresponding to the switch storage space 528.

  A shaft spring 1530 is also inserted into the support pin 1529, one end of the shaft spring 1530 is locked to the back surface of the full tank swing plate 1531, and the other end is erected rearward of the support pin 1529. By being locked by the spring locking pin 1549, the upper end portion of the full rocking plate 1531 is always urged toward the reverse side guide passage 1525. However, two stopper pieces 1534 are formed in the upper part of the switch storage space 1528 at the downstream extension position of the other end side wall of the side guide passage 1522 and the rear position thereof. Therefore, the upper end portion of the full tank swing plate 1531 only swings around the support shaft pin 1529 between the two stopper pieces 1534. Note that a wiring drawing recess 1547 for drawing the wiring from the full switch 730 to the outside is formed in the rear portion of the upper side wall of the switch storage space 1528.

  Further, a foul ball passage 1537 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 1525. The foul ball passage 1537 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 1538 on the upstream side communicates with a communication port 473 (foul ball guide passage 473a) described later, and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 1535. Has been. For this reason, the foul sphere taken into the foul port 489 (see FIG. 23) and dropped into the communication port 473 is guided from the foul ball inlet 1538 to the front guide passage 1535 through the bent foul ball passage 1537 and further to the ball outlet. 1536 is returned to the reservoir 361 of the dish unit 300.

  In the ball supply passage 59 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 21, the game balls paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball dispensing device 53 are upstream of the side guide passage 1522 from the prize ball entrance 1542. Enters the side, is guided toward the side different from the direction of the ball outlet 1536 by the side guide receiving portion 1523, and collides with the buffer member 1524. The game ball that has collided with the buffer member 1524 hits the inclined side wall 1527 as it is toward the downstream side with its momentum weakened, and is guided in the reverse side guide passage 1525 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 1522. It is guided to the front guide passage 1535 and is guided from the ball outlet 1536 of the front guide passage 1535 to the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul sphere entrance 1538 is also weakened by the bent foul sphere passage 1537 and merged with the front guide passage 1535, and from the sphere outlet 1536 of the front guide passage 1535, the storage portion 361 of the dish unit 300. Led to.

  As described above, when the game ball naturally flows in the ball supply passage 59, when the game ball moves from the side guide passage 1522 to the reverse side guide passage 1525 as shown in FIG. In addition, the ball hits the buffer member 1524 and is reflected toward the substantially central position of the inclined side wall 1527, so that the game ball hardly hits the full tank swing plate 1531. For this reason, since the upper end of the full rocking plate 1531 is in contact with the front stopper piece 1534 by the urging force of the shaft spring 1530, the detection piece 1532 is connected to the projector of the full fill switch 730 of the light emitting / receiving type. It is in a state (OFF) where the switch does not conduct due to entering the light receiver. On the other hand, when prize balls are stored in the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 and the game balls are filled in the ball supply passage 59, as shown in FIG. Due to the pressure of the game ball stored in the direction guide passage 1525, the full swinging plate 1531 swings in the clockwise direction against the urging force of the shaft spring 1530 and comes into contact with the subsequent stopper piece 1534. Become. In this state, the detection piece 1532 comes off between the light projector and the light receiver of the full tank switch 730 of the light projecting / receiving method, and the switch is in a conductive state (ON). When the full tank switch 730 is turned ON, the rotational drive of the payout motor 1465 of the ball payout device 53 stops (if the ON signal is derived while paying out a predetermined number of prize balls, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after it has been paid out). Even when game balls are stored in the front guide passage 1535 and the reverse side guide passage 1525, the bottom of the foul ball passage 1537 is extremely inclined, so that the stored game balls are stored in the foul ball passage 1537. , And does not flow backward from the foul bulb inlet 1538.

  As described above, since the sphere supply passage 59 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the sphere supply passage installation portion 206 of the main body frame 3, the sphere supply passage is formed in the main body frame as in the past. It is not necessary to form a ball supply passage in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the payout passage.

  Further, since the ball payout device 53 is provided in the immediate vicinity of the ball supply passage 59, it is sent to the ball supply passage 59, and the game ball can be paid out at an appropriate payout speed by the flat ball supply passage 59. Further, by providing the ball payout device 53 immediately upstream of the ball supply passage 59, the supply of the game ball to the ball supply passage 59 can be realized in a form that weakens the momentum of the game ball as much as possible.

  In addition, since the ball supply passage 59 is formed in a box shape that extends in a substantially horizontal direction, the game balls sent to the ball supply passage 59 are scattered in the ball supply passage 59 and paid out to the storage unit 361. Can do. In other words, the conventional gaming machine has paid out a large number of game balls in a straight line, but in the present embodiment, the ball supply passage 59 weakens the force of the balls so as to make a slow payout speed. At the same time, the game balls are paid out so as to be scattered including the collision of the game balls in the ball supply passage 59. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a feeling of a ball or a feeling of paying out according to such a payout mode, thereby giving a sense of bliss when winning a winning ball at the time of a big hit. In addition, the game ball paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53 is guided toward a side different from the direction of the ball outlet 1536 by the side guide receiving portion 1523 and once to the buffer member 1524. Since the collision is made, the speed of the game ball after the collision with the buffer member 1524 can be controlled to a substantially constant speed by the natural drop force. Further, by making the inside of the ball supply passage 59 into a zigzag-shaped passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the game ball paid out from the prize ball passage 1460 of the ball payout device 53. The awarded ball does not jump out of the storage unit 361.

In addition, since the full rocking plate 1531 for operating the full tank switch 730 is provided at a position below the flow lower end of the side guide passage 1522 that is not affected by the flow of the normal game ball, The award ball payout is not stopped due to a full tank, and the award ball payout can be reliably stopped only when the tank is full.
Furthermore, the ball supply passage 59 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the foul ball passage 1537 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 1535 for delivering the prize ball, reducing the momentum of the ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Mechanism for foul ball discharge>
Here, the mechanism relating to foul ball discharge in the main body frame 3 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is an enlarged front view centering on the joint portion of the main body frame and the game effect unit, in which (A) is a view showing an injection mode of a game ball in the ball guide passage, and (B) is a ball guide passage. It is a figure which shows the backflow aspect of the game ball in.

  First, as a premise, a mode in which a game ball ejected by the launching device 57 is guided toward the game area 20 by the launch guide path 29 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, the game effect unit 4 includes a launch guide path which is a flow path of a game ball communicating with the game area 20 in the gap between the inner rail unit 462 and the outer rail unit 472 constituting the guide rail 482. 29 is formed. In addition, the upper end of the launch guide path 29 is provided in the upper part of the game area 20 (where the backflow prevention member 463 is installed), and functions as a ball insertion port 28 for throwing a game ball into the game area 20.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 23, the game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 38 in accordance with the operation of the handle unit 318 by the player is caused by the reciprocating motion of the hitting basket 57 a of the launch device 57. It is injected towards. When the game ball is guided by the launch guide path 29 and reaches the game area 20, the game ball is inserted from the ball insertion port 28 and flows down the game area 20.

  First, as shown in FIG. 23A, the game ball ejected by the launching device 57 slides on the launch rail 38 by its urging force, and radiates into the launch guide path 29 from the upper end of the launch rail 38. Is done. Here, the launch rail 38 is slightly curved upward so that the inclination gradually increases from the opening side of the pachinko machine 1 toward the shaft support side. Further, the pachinko machine is configured such that the launch rail 38 and the connection passage portion 477 are connected by the rail connection member 44 to the upper surface portion 44 a of the rail connection member 44 that closes the gap between the launch rail 38 and the connection passage portion 477. 1 is provided with a gradually rising gradient from the open side to the shaft support side. A portion of the rail connection member 44 connected to the firing rail 38 is lower than the upper end portion of the firing rail 38.

  With such a structure, the game ball released from the upper end of the launch rail 38 does not contact the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477, and the inner side surface (rail surface 472a) of the outer rail unit 472 in the launch guide path 29. ) Directly reachable. The game ball that has reached the outer rail unit 472 flows so as to rise in the launch guide path 29 while being further guided by the rail surface 472a of the outer rail unit 472. On the other hand, since the urging force with respect to the game ball is small, the game ball may fall before reaching the outer rail unit 472 and the game ball may fall on the connection passage portion 477. In this case, the rail connection member 44 prevents the game ball from spilling downward from the gap between the connection passage portion 477 and the launch rail 38, and the game ball is returned to the launch position of the launch rail 38 as described later. It is.

  In the game effect unit 4, the gap between the outer rail unit 472 and the connection passage portion 477 functions as an opening (a foul port 489) through which the game ball can enter by communicating with the communication port 473. Then, the foul ball that has been discharged from the upper end of the firing rail 38 and flows backward into the foul port 489 enters the communication port 473 and is discharged to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 as will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 23B, the game ball ejected by the launching device 57 stalls before reaching the game area 20 and flows backward in the launch guide path 29 (ie, flows downward). ) At this time, the game ball flowing backward in the launch guide path 29 flows downward while being guided by the rail surface 472a of the outer rail unit 472, and falls to the foul port 489 when reaching the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail unit 472. (Rejected). Then, the game ball dropped into the foul port 489 enters toward the communication port 473 or is continuously provided from the upper end of the connection passage portion 477 to the inside of the foul port 489 (ie, below). It contacts the stop wall 477b and is guided to the communication port 473.

  Here, the communication port 473 is formed with a foul ball guiding path 473a that is a flow path of the game ball formed so as to penetrate the game effect unit 4 in the front-rear direction along the lower edge of the communication port 473. Yes. The foul ball guiding path 473a is inclined downward from the front to the rear of the game effect unit 4, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 1538 of the above-described ball supply passage 59 on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball. ing. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the communication port 473 rolls on the foul ball guiding path 473a and is guided to the back side of the game effect unit 4, and further rolls in the ball supply passage 59 to store the dish unit 300. It is discharged to the part 361.

  On the other hand, when the momentum of the game ball flowing backward through the launch guide path 29 is large, the game ball may jump over the foul port 489 and reach the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477. At this time, the game ball rolls further toward the opening side while being guided by the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477 inclined downward toward the opening side. Then, after rolling while decelerating on the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connecting member 44 having a gentle inclination, the firing rail 38 is caused to flow backward and return to the firing position.

  In the state where the game effect unit 4 is installed in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the player opens the communication port 473 through the game window 101. Is visible. Therefore, the player can visually observe the manner in which the game ball flowing backward in the launch guide path 29 enters the communication port 473.

  By the way, conventionally, the foul mouth is provided in the main body frame below the game board, and almost all of the foul balls are collected from the foul mouth. In other words, even a foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail is recovered from the foul mouth. Therefore, the foul ball that reaches the outer rail and is not visually recognized by the player does not know what is happening from the player side, and there is a possibility that launch adjustment may be difficult. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul ball on the upper surface 477a of the connection passage portion 477 is returned to the firing rail 38 side. In other words, the foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail unit 472 is returned to the firing position. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  Further, since the foul port 489 is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the front component member 680 described later), the game balls that run backward on the outer rail unit 472 can be quickly collected. In addition, the foul ball flowing down from the lower end portion 472 b of the outer rail unit 472 is dropped into the foul port 489 by the stop wall portion 477 b of the connection passage portion 477. Thereby, the game balls that run backward on the outer rail unit 472 can be reliably collected.

  A communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is provided for discharging the foul ball dropped into the foul port 489 to the back side of the game effect unit 4 (specifically, a front constituent member 680 described later). As described above, the communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, the front constituent member 680 described later), so that the foul ball is discharged at a relatively high position. For example, it becomes easy to return the foul ball to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 on the front side.

  Conventionally, in a configuration having two upper and lower storage dishes on the front side, the game balls collected from the foul mouth are returned to the lower storage dish (lower dish). In this case, it is necessary for the player himself to return the foul ball of the lower plate to the upper storage plate (upper plate), and the number of foul balls increases particularly at the time of launch adjustment, which may cause a decrease in interest. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the foul balls discharged from the foul ball guiding path 473a are joined to a ball supply passage 59 that is a flow path of a prize ball to be paid out from the payout device 53. That is, the foul ball is returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 from which the game ball at the time of winning a prize is paid out. This eliminates the need for the player himself to return the foul ball to the upper plate, and can reduce the decrease in interest caused by the foul ball during launch adjustment.

  In particular, since the communication port 473 (foul ball guiding path 473a) is formed above the ball supply passage 59 provided in the lower part of the main body frame 3, the game effect unit 4 (details will be described in the front component described later) 680), the foul balls discharged to the back side are guided to the ball supply passage 59 without any delay. As a result, the time required for the foul ball to return to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 becomes relatively short.

  Further, the inner rail unit 462 is arranged in parallel with the outer rail unit 472, and a launch guide path 29 reaching the ball insertion port 28 is formed. As a result, the foul sphere that does not reach the ball insertion port 28 flows downward along the launch guide path 29, so that the trajectory of the foul sphere flowing down from the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail unit 472 can be stabilized, and the connection path The foul ball can be almost surely dropped into the foul port 489 by the stop wall portion 477b of the portion 477.

  Here, in the present embodiment, almost the entire area of the launch guide path 29 is visible from the front side through the game window 101 (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the behavior of the foul ball that does not reach the ball insertion port 28 is known, and launch adjustment is further facilitated. Here, conventionally, in the configuration in which the main body frame is provided with the foul port, the foul ball that does not reach the ball insertion port is received and collected by the foul port. Therefore, if the number of foul balls increases at the time of launch adjustment, the number of game balls returned to the storage tray increases, and there is a problem that launch adjustment is difficult. In this regard, in this embodiment, the foul sphere that has passed the foul port 489 to the launch guide path 29 is received by the foul port 489, while the foul sphere that has not passed the foul port 489 and has not reached the launch guide path 29 is , Returned to the launch position. That is, only the visually recognized foul sphere is received and collected by the foul mouth 489, and the foul sphere not visually recognized is returned to the firing position. In this way, even if the number of foul balls increases during launch adjustment, the number of game balls returned to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 can be relatively small. In addition, a foul ball that is not visually recognized can be re-shot from the launch position, so that launch adjustment is relatively easy.

  By the way, a foul port 489 is provided in the game effect unit 4 (specifically, a front constituent member 680 described later) adjacent to the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail unit 472. On the other hand, the firing rail 38 is provided in the main body frame 3. Therefore, if the launch rail 38 is made long enough to reach the game effect unit 4, the game effect unit 4 housed in the main body frame 3 (the front component member 680 that is a part of the game effect unit 4) may be interfered.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, an “alignment portion” composed of the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477 is provided. This “alignment portion” is interposed between the foul port 489 and the firing rail 38 to form a series of parts from the outer rail unit 472 to the firing rail 38. By interposing such a “matching portion” (the rail connection member 44 and the connection passage portion 477), it is not necessary to lengthen the launch rail 38, and the launch rail 38 and the game effect unit 4 (the front component member 680) The problem of interference can be solved. Thereby, even if it is the structure which provides the foul mouth 489 in the game production | presentation unit 4 (front structural member 680), attachment of the firing rail 38 becomes easy.

  And the upper surface part of the above-mentioned "alignment part" is comprised by the inclined surface which inclines to the firing rail 38 side, and the foul ball | bowl of the said inclined surface is returned to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion of the “alignment portion”. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  Here, in the configuration in which the foul ball of the “alignment portion” is returned to the firing rail 38 side, the upper surface of the end portion on the firing rail 38 side of the “alignment portion” is flush with the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. Arrangement is also possible. However, the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” may be higher than the end rail surface of the firing rail 38 due to, for example, an attachment error of the firing rail 38. If the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” becomes slightly high, the launched game ball comes into contact with the “alignment portion”. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the upper end surface of the upper surface portion of the “alignment portion” that is close to the firing rail 38 side is disposed below the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. Even if there is a mounting error, the upper surface of the end portion of the “alignment portion” does not become higher than the end rail surface of the firing rail 38. That is, the launched game ball is prevented from coming into contact with the rail connection member 44.

  In addition, since the above-mentioned “matching portion” includes the connection passage portion 477 (corresponding to the guide portion) of the game effect unit 4 and the rail connection member 44 (corresponding to the step portion) of the main body frame 3, the game effect unit 4 is In the configuration accommodated in the main body frame 3, it is only necessary to consider the alignment between the connection passage portion 477 and the rail connection member 44, and interference between the rail portions (the launch rail 38 and the outer rail unit 472) can be avoided. In particular, since the rail connection member 44 is integrally formed on the front surface portion of the main body frame 3, unlike the structure in which the rail connection member 44 is mounted separately, no mounting error of the rail connection member 44 itself occurs. Yes. Further, the firing rail 38 is attached to the main body frame 3 so as to maintain a predetermined positional relationship with the rail connection member 44. Since the rail connection member 44 is integrally formed on the front surface portion of the main body frame 3 as described above, the firing rail 38 can be appropriately attached to the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the configuration in which the foul ball of the above-mentioned “matching portion” is returned to the rail connection member 44 side, the upper end surface of the connection passage portion 477 on the rail connection member 44 side is flush with the upper end surface of the rail connection member 44. It is also possible to arrange it above. However, the upper surface of the end of the rail connection member 44 may be higher than the upper surface of the end of the connection passage portion 477 due to, for example, an accommodation error of the game effect unit 4. And if the end part upper surface of the rail connection member 44 becomes high, it will become difficult to return a foul ball | bowl from the connection channel | path part 477 to the firing rail 38 side. In this regard, in this embodiment, in a state where the game effect unit 4 is housed in the main body frame 3, the upper end surface of the upper surface portion of the rail connection member 44 that is close to the connection passage portion 477 side is the connection passage portion 477. It is arrange | positioned below the edge part upper surface of the upper surface part. Thereby, for example, even if there is an accommodation error of the game effect unit 4, the upper end surface of the rail connection member 44 does not become higher than the upper end surface of the connection passage portion 477. The foul ball quickly returns to the firing position via the rail connection member 44.

  By the way, in recent years, game areas tend to be expanded with the increase in size of liquid crystal displays and the like. Accordingly, the guide path of the game ball from the launcher to the ball slot in the game area is also long. This guide path is constituted by a rail member. However, if the rail member becomes longer, the frictional force received from the rail member becomes larger, and the disturbance factor becomes larger. There is.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, a connection passage portion 477 that forms a foul port 489 is provided between the lower end portion 472b of the outer rail unit 472.
Furthermore, a rail connection member 44 interposed between the connection passage portion 477 and the firing rail 38 is provided in the main body frame 3. Then, the game ball launched from the launch position and guided to the launch rail 38 directly reaches the outer rail unit 472 through the connection passage portion 477 and the rail connection member 44. That is, it is guided to the ball insertion port 28 only by the launch rail 38 and the outer rail unit 472. By providing such a rail connection member 44, the launch rail 38 can be further shortened, the frictional force generated in the game ball can be further suppressed, and the disturbance factor is also relatively small, so that the ball Flying can be stabilized.

  And the upper surface part 44a of the rail connection member 44 is also comprised by the inclined surface inclined to the firing rail 38 side, and the foul ball | bowl of the said inclined surface is returned to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion 44a of the rail connection member 44. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  By the way, the foul port 489 is formed not in the main body frame 3 side but in the game effect unit 4, so that the main body frame 3 can be prevented from being damaged or broken due to the discharge of the foul ball. Even if the game effect unit 4 is damaged or broken due to the discharge of the foul ball, the foul ball can be appropriately discharged if only the game effect unit 4 is replaced. There is an advantage that recycling and maintenance of the production unit 4 is easy.

  Further, as described above, both the foul ball and the prize ball are discharged to the storage unit 361 of the common dish unit 300 through the ball supply passage 59 which is one path. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a return path for foul balls and a payout path for prize balls as in the prior art, and the structure of the main body frame 3 is simplified. And since the discharge path of the foul ball and prize ball provided in the main body frame 3 is made common, it is possible to secure the game effect unit installation recess 30 as a large accommodation space without narrowing the game effect unit installation recess 30. Is possible.

<Game production unit installation recess>
Next, the structure of the game effect unit installation recessed part 30 is further demonstrated with reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the game effect unit installation recess 30 has a front-facing saddle face portion that does not accommodate the game effect unit 4 in a part on the upper side and the open side. Nothing is formed on the surface portion, but the door hook holes 352 through which the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 penetrates are opened in the upper, middle and lower three portions on the open side surface portion. Yes. That is, the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the open side flange portion (see FIG. 4).

  Thus, as described above, the game effect unit installation recess 30 includes the first peripheral wall 290, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293, so that the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 It is formed in a concave shape in which the rear part of the side and the upper side is surrounded. Here, the first circumferential surface wall 290 surrounds the game effect unit installation concave portion 30 from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the upper side surface portion, the open side surface portion and the lower side surface toward the rear side. It is arranged so that. The second peripheral wall 291 extends rearward from the first peripheral wall 290, the third peripheral wall 292 extends rearward from the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is the first peripheral wall 293. Extending rearward from the three peripheral walls 292. Thus, the main body frame 3 is integrally formed in a square cylinder shape. However, only the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are extended from the inner surface of the lower side portion, and the substrate unit 54 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear of the second peripheral wall 291. .

  The first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed to extend straight from the upper side (main body frame upper wall part) and the side on the pivotal support side (second main body frame side wall part) to the rear with a step. On the other hand, the side on the open side (first body frame side wall) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 5) that inclines inwardly from the first peripheral wall 290 toward the fourth peripheral wall 293. Has been. In addition, the inwardly inclined shape from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 can be smoothly opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It is to make it. That is, when the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side are formed to extend straight rearward, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In order to avoid this, there is a possibility that the rearmost end portion of the frame abuts against the inner surface of the side frame plate of the outer frame 2 and cannot be smoothly opened. The locking device 60 is attached along the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side. The locking device 60 is attached using a lock mounting hole (not shown) provided in the rear end side of the first circumferential wall 290. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole (not shown), it is preferable to form the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side in an inclined step shape. Furthermore, since the inner peripheral surface of the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer peripheral surface of the game effect unit 4 need to be brought into contact with each other, the step between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 is formed with a somewhat large step. However, the dimension of the steps of the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 is very small.

  However, if the first main body frame side wall is unnecessarily large and inclined toward the fourth peripheral wall 293 from the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side, the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30 described above In particular, it is difficult to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the maximum lateral width L3 on the back side. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the part on which the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the front side of the outer frame 2 is an opening / closing axis O, the first main body frame side wall portion has the opening / closing axis O. It was decided to be provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along an imaginary circle arc C drawn on a horizontal plane with the axis point as the center. That is, in this case, the first main body frame side wall is inclined inwardly by a minimum width so as not to adversely affect the opening operation of the main body frame 3 by colliding with the outer frame 2. As a result, it is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width L 3 on the back side.

  In addition, since the first main body frame side wall portion is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise, the strength of the main body frame 3 as a constituent component is simpler than the case where the first main body frame side wall portion is simply formed linearly in the inner direction. Can be suitably secured. Moreover, each of the second main body frame side wall and the main body frame upper wall formed integrally with the first main body frame side wall also has its own meat each time the first main body frame side wall is bent. Since it is provided to extend backward while being bent inward by the thickness, the strength as the thin peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be efficiently secured. Further, since the second main body frame side wall portion and the main body frame upper wall portion are bent inward only by their substantially wall thickness, the game effect unit installation concave portion 30 becomes uselessly small. There is no end to it.

  In this embodiment, the first main body frame side wall is approximately 0.98 times the distance L11 (see FIG. 56) from the axis of the opening / closing axis O to the front surface of the side frame plate 13. It is provided so as to extend rearward while being bent stepwise along a virtual circular arc having a radial distance. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, a thickness portion 13b having a thickness of approximately 19 mm is formed at the rear end portion of the side frame plate 13. For this reason, when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the first main body frame side wall portion particularly has a rear end portion (thickness portion 13 b) more than the front end portion of the outer frame 2. Colliding with each other can adversely affect its opening action. Therefore, in this embodiment, for the first main body frame side wall, the radial distance is approximately 0.99 times the distance L12 (see FIG. 56) from the axis of the opening / closing axis O to the thickness portion 13b. It is provided so as to extend backward while being bent stepwise along the arc of the virtual circle. As described above, the first main body extends along the arc of the virtual circle having a radial distance sufficient to increase the magnification with respect to the distance from the axial point of the opening / closing axis O to the rear end portion of the side frame plate 13. By providing the frame side wall portion, it is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the volume of the game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the maximum lateral width L 3 on the back side, compared to the case where the radial distance is adjusted to the conventional front end portion. It becomes like this. That is, in other words, the gaming effect unit installation recess 30 is provided by providing the thick portion 13b having a thickness of approximately 19 mm not at the front end portion of the side frame plate 13 but at the rear end portion thereof. It is possible to secure a distance of approximately 44 cm as the maximum lateral width L3 on the inner side, particularly the rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral walls 290 to 293 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first peripheral wall 290 corresponds to a thickness that can cover the side of the game panel 409, and is formed by the remaining second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293. The rearward protruding portions of various game devices as the game effect unit 4 are accommodated in the space to be played. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as described below, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed up to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409. The size of the space is secured. Thereby, for example, even when an effect display device 115 or the like occupying most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. The rearward projecting portion (see FIG. 48) can be easily stored. In addition, the peripheral wall 290-293 concerning this embodiment is formed so that it may extend from the rear surface of the said outer frame 2 to about 63 mm back.

  Further, from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293, specifically, from the open side, the upper side, and the side of the shaft support side, the open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft support side rear wall 296 are respectively provided. It extends toward the inside. The “open side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and / or the pivot support side rear wall 296” corresponds to the “rear wall portion” of the present invention.

  The shaft support side rear wall 296 has a flat front surface, and the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53 are detachably attached to the rear surface along the shaft support side rear wall 296. ing. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the shaft support side rear wall 296 to have a width for attaching the ball passage unit 52 and the ball dispensing device 53.

  The upper rear wall 295 has a flat front surface, and the tank rail member 51 is attached to the rear surface. The tank rail member 51 is inclined so that a game ball can flow down, and the lower end side of the upper rear wall 295 is formed in an inclined shape along the tank rail member 51. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 295 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 51 attached in an inclined manner.

  Further, the open-side rear wall 294 has a flat front surface, and a rear cover support cylinder portion (attachment member) 280 that pivotally supports the rear cover 58 is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the open-side rear wall 294 to have a width dimension that forms the back cover support cylinder 280.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the shaft-supporting rear wall 296 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth peripheral wall 293 are formed in a flat plate shape. . In addition, as described above, the size of the space formed by the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is secured up to a position corresponding to the outer periphery of the game panel 409. Therefore, for example, even when the effect display device 115 or the like that occupies most of the game panel 409 as a game board is attached, the display device control board box 119 ( The rear projecting portion according to FIG. 48) can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 294, the upper rear wall 295, and the pivot support-side rear wall 296 constitute a rear opening 70, and the rear opening 70 is closed by a back cover 58 (see FIG. 4) so as to be opened and closed. It has become so.

<Board unit>
Next, the board | substrate unit 54 attached to the back surface lower part of the main body frame 3 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.24 and FIG.25. FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the back side. FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the substrate unit 54 is attached to a plurality of attachment holes 207 (see FIG. 15) formed in the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and is a synthetic resin molded substrate tray 64. In addition, various types of boards such as a door relay board 68, a power board board 62, a terminal board box 56, a payout control board box 55, a main drawer relay board 648, and a sub drawer relay board 649 are attached. Among the above boards, the door relay board 68, the power board box 62, the terminal board box 56 and the payout control board box 55 are attached to the rear side of the board tray 64 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board 648 and The sub drawer relay board 649 is attached to the front side of the board tray 64. A shield plate is attached to the rear surface of the payout control board box 55 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 are attached to the board cover 641. Covered and attached.

  First, the substrate tray 64 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, a wiring opening 642 is formed on one side of the rear surface side, and a relay substrate for attaching the door relay substrate 68 inside the wiring opening 642 is formed. A recess is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the substrate tray 64, mounting pieces 643 for mounting the substrate unit 54 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the mounting pieces 643 are attached to the mounting holes 207 (see FIG. 15), the board unit 54 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. A wiring latching piece 644 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side of the substrate tray 64.

  Further, an out-sphere passage 645 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the substrate tray 64. The out ball passage 645 is formed broadly so as to correspond to the above-described out port 471, the downstream side of the ball removal connection passage 415, and the drop port (not shown), and the downstream side discharges the game balls in a row. It is formed so as to be narrow. Therefore, when the substrate unit 54 is attached to the main body frame 3, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 645 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion (not shown) that supports the lower surface of the out port 471. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball-out ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 645 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  Next, the main drawer relay board 648 and the sub drawer relay board 649 attached to the front side of the board tray 64 will be described.

  Here, the main drawer relay board 648 is provided with a frame side main drawer connector 2000b and a payout control board connector 2010 on the top and bottom. Among these, the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is connected to the unit side main drawer connector 2000a (see FIG. 48) attached to the back side of the game effect control unit 99, whereby the main control device (main control board 710). , See FIG. 58). That is, the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 58) according to this embodiment is supplied with power via the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 58) on the main body frame 3 side. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b is electrically connected to the payout control board connector 2010 by an in-board wiring (not shown) of the main drawer relay board 648. Then, the payout control board connector 2010 is connected to an internal connection terminal (not shown) of the payout control board (payout control board 720, see FIG. 58) by a wire harness (not shown). The power supply line for the control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 58) is formed. In this embodiment, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the payout control board connector 2010 include the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 58) and the payout control device (payout control board 720, FIG. 58) and the information exchange line.

  On the other hand, the sub-drawer relay board 649 is provided with a frame-side sub-drawer connector 2002b and a door frame connector 2012 on the top and bottom. Among these, the frame side auxiliary drawer connector 2002b is connected to the unit side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a attached to the back side of the game effect control unit 99, so that the effect control device (peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 59)). This is a part for forming an information transmission / reception line for a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 described later. In other words, the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b is electrically connected to the door frame connector 2012 by the in-board wiring (not shown) of the sub drawer relay board 649, and the door frame connector 2012 is connected to the door frame connector 2012. By connecting the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 with a wire harness (not shown), an information transfer line for the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 described later of the effect control device (peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 59)) is provided. Will be formed. As a result, the production control device can control the driving of the speakers 144a and 144b, the operation buttons 327, the frame decoration lamp 842, and the like through the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 54 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, among various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the board unit 54 is replaced with a change in the game effect unit 4. House relay board 68 which is a board other than the game control board and display device control board, power board 395 housed in power board box 62, external terminal board 753 housed in terminal board box 56, housed in payout control board box 55 The dispense control board 720 thus assembled is previously assembled to the board tray 64 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 54 is simply separately attached to the lower part of the back side of the main body frame 3 in the past. The work efficiency can be improved as compared with various board attachment work that has been attached to the back side of the substrate. Further, in this case, since the wiring between the boards unitized in the board unit 54 can be accommodated in the board tray 64, the wiring connecting the boards is not messed up and disturbed and laid in order. Can do.

In the present embodiment, the main drawer relay board 648 having the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b and the sub-drawer relay board 649 having the frame-side sub drawer connector 2002b are provided on the front surface of the board unit 54. Then, when the game effect control unit 99 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side, the unit-side main drawer of the panel relay terminal plate 750 provided on the back side of the game effect control unit 99 game effect unit 4 The connector 2000a and the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a are connected to the corresponding frame side main drawer connector 2000b and the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b, respectively. Therefore, the mounting of the game effect control unit 99 and the connection between the boards can be performed at the same time, and the replacement work of the game effect control unit 99 can be performed efficiently.
Therefore, the mounting of the game effect unit 4 and the connection between the substrates can be performed at the same time, and the replacement work of the game effect unit 4 can be performed efficiently.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 13, the game panel 409 includes one game including a main control device (game control device). As the effect control unit 99, the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 is accommodated from the front receiving port 30a. In this respect, in this pachinko machine 1, in this embodiment, first, the box-shaped substrate holder (peripheral control substrate box 24, main control substrate box 25, display device control substrate box 119, etc.) is used. When the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, at least one inner wall of the pair of main body frame side wall portions and the main body frame upper wall portion (inner wall of the peripheral wall 290 to 293) To be in contact with a part of

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48, a flange portion FG is formed on the periphery of the substrate holder, and a screw hole (not shown) provided at the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is formed. The board holder is attached to the large game board member provided with the game panel 409 by screwing the flange portion FG in between. Furthermore, when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the power line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 58) is connected to the game on the main body frame 3 side. The main drawer connector (unit side) shared with the information transfer line with the payout control device via the payout control device (the payout control board 720, see FIG. 58) attached below the effect unit installation recess 30. The main control device (game control device) and the payout control device are electrically connected by the main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b). Further, of the main drawer connectors, the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided on the game effect control unit 99 side is fixed so as to face rearward at a position where the flange portion FG on the lower periphery of the substrate holder is provided. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b provided on the main body frame 3 side of the main drawer connector is fixedly arranged so as to face the front at the lowermost part of the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes.

  In such a configuration, due to the contact between the substrate holder and the inner wall of the main body frame 3, the game effect control unit 99 is properly accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30 while being guided to its accommodation location. It becomes like this. Then, the power supply line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 58) is connected to the main body frame 3 via the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 58). When securing the main side drawer connector 2000a (unit side main drawer connector 2000a and frame side main drawer connector 2000b) shared with the information exchange line with the apparatus, the lower peripheral edge of the substrate holder The frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged so as to face the front at the lowermost part of the game effect unit installation recess 30 at the place where the flange portion FG is provided. It was. Accordingly, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are automatically connected only by housing the game effect control unit 99 in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. Thus, after the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30, the power line for the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 58) is connected by an appropriate connector, etc. It becomes possible to omit manual work.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, the flange portion FG to be screwed between a screw hole (not shown) provided on the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is formed on the periphery of the box-shaped substrate holder, The unit side main drawer connector 2000a is provided at a place where the flange portion FG is formed. That is, as described above, a structure in which a light-emitting effect is produced from the rear side by attaching a box-shaped back unit 510 having a predetermined depth to a large-sized game board member (game board part) having a transparent board-like game panel 409. The adopted game effect control unit 99 requires a space in which various control boards are arranged in the depth direction. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is provided in the flange portion FG of the substrate holder, the connector 2000a can be disposed in a compact manner, and the various control boards are disposed. Even if a design change occurs in the space in the depth direction, it is not necessary to change the position of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided in the flange portion FG, and consequently the position of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b. Is also suitably maintained.

  For convenience of explanation, although not shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, a wire harness (not shown) provided so that the unit side main drawer connector 2000a enters the board holder from the flange part FG. And a drawer connector (not shown) in the holder that is connected to the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 58) as a free end on the opposite side of the wire harness. Therefore, even if the arrangement and design of the main control device are changed, the position of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a provided in the flange portion FG can be suitably maintained. Still further, the main control device (main control board 710, see FIG. 58) and the payout control are connected to a wire harness provided so as to enter the board holder from the flange portion FG. As shown in FIG. 48, the signal line (wire harness) used for exchanging information with the apparatus (payout control board 720, see FIG. 58) is connected to the board holder (peripheral control board box 24, main control). In the board box 25), it is possible to suitably protect against fraud.

  In this embodiment, the outer peripheral edge of the rear surface of the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of screw holes more than necessary for attaching the substrate holder. Thereby, even if a change occurs in the design on the board holder side, the configuration of the large game board member (game board part) can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, on the main body frame 3 side, as shown in FIG. 25 together with FIG. 13, only the upper portion where the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged is A main drawer relay board 648 provided so as to protrude from the lower part of the back surface (the lower part of the main body frame 3) to the game effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30 is provided. The position where the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged is the position where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a is positioned when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. Yes. The frame-side main drawer connector 2000b and the in-board wiring (not shown) are provided on the lower side of the main drawer relay board 648 on the same surface as the plane on which the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b is fixedly arranged. Since the electrically connected payout control board connector (in-frame main drawer connector) connector 2010 is fixedly arranged, the arrangement and design of the payout control device (payout control board 720, see FIG. 58) have changed. However, the position of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b can be suitably maintained. Furthermore, since the payout control board connector 2010 is fixedly disposed between the main drawer relay board 648 and the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main control device and the payout control device are connected to each other. A signal line (wire harness) used for information exchange between the main drawer relay board 648 and the lower part of the main body frame 3 can be suitably protected from fraudulent acts. become.

Incidentally, the structure and the mounting position of such a unit side main drawer connector 2000a can be said to be the same in the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a.
That is, the unit-side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a is also fixedly disposed so as to face rearward at a location where the flange portion FG is provided on the lower periphery of the substrate holder, and enters the substrate holder from the flange portion FG. Is connected to a wire harness (not shown). In addition, on the opposite side of this wire harness, a drawer connector (not shown) in the holder that is a free end and is connected to the effect control device is formed.

  Similarly, in the sub-drawer relay board 649, only the upper part of the sub-drawer relay board 649 where the frame-side sub drawer connector 2002b is fixedly arranged is the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame 3 (the lower side of the main body frame 3). The game effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30 protrudes from the portion). The position where the frame side auxiliary drawer connector 2002b is fixedly arranged is the position where the unit side auxiliary drawer connector 2002a is located when the game effect control unit 99 is accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. ing.

<Drawer connector>
Next, a drawer connector used for electrical connection between the main body frame 3 and the game effect control unit 99 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a main drawer connector and a sub drawer connector.

  As described above, unit-side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a are provided on the game effect control unit 99 side, and frame-side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b are provided on the main body frame 3 side. A pair of drawer connectors composed of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are the main drawer connector 2000. A pair of drawer connectors constituted by the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a and the frame side sub drawer connector 2002b is the sub drawer connector 2002.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the game effect control unit 99 side is electrically connected by inserting the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a into the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b on the main body frame 3 side. can do. The drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a on the unit side include terminals 2001a and 2003a as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26C, the frame-side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b include contacts 2001b and 2003b. When the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a are inserted into the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b, as shown in FIG. 26C, the terminals 2001a and 2003a push down the contacts 2001b and 2003b, and the contacts 2001b and 2003b are displaced. To do. The repulsive force of the contacts 2001b and 2003b generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 2001a and 2003a.

  As a result, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002 are formed with control signal lines for transmitting various control signals between the various control boards (for example, by the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720). Further, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002 are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 395. As described above, by attaching the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3 detachably, the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a and the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b (that is, the main drawer connector 2000 and the sub drawer connector 2002). The control signal line and the voltage supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 2001a and 2003a and the contacts 2001b and 2003b are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a possibility that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Moreover, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 2001a and 2003a and the contacts 2001b and 2003b. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment / detachment of the game production unit 4 is ensured.

  Here, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch turned on, the contact between the terminal 2001a and the contact 2001b, specifically, various voltage supply lines Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact, welding occurs. If the game effect unit 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 to be attached in this welded state, the contact 2001b is bent and broken, or when the game effect unit 4 is removed from the main body frame 3, the contact 2001b The drawer connector 2000a cannot be used because it is peeled off and damaged from the drawer connector 2000a.

  Further, when the terminal 2001a and the contact 2001b are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit (hot line failure prevention circuit 2100) for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 710, which will be described later, but the details will be described later.

<Locking device>
Next, the locking device 60 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device and the main body frame. FIG. 28 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a structure for latching the main body frame of the locking device. FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine. FIG. 30 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a detailed relationship between the locking device and the first peripheral wall and the second peripheral wall of the main body frame. FIG. 31 is a side view (A) of the locking device and a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side. FIG. 32 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, and a perspective view of a sliding frame for a door frame and a sliding rod for a body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. (B), (C). FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device. FIG. 34 is a front view for explaining the action of the door frame sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod. FIG. 35 is a front view for explaining the operation of the fraud prevention member. The “door frame sliding rod 971 and / or the body frame sliding rod 984” corresponds to the “sliding rod” of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the locking device 60 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first peripheral wall 290 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and has a U-shaped base 685. . The U-shaped base 685 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) locks formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the outer peripheral side of the main body frame 3 and the rising portion of the first peripheral wall 290. A locking hole 351, a lock mounting hole 350 formed by being cut out in the upper part and middle of the vertical surface of the first peripheral wall 290, and a lock mounting hole 353 formed in the vicinity of the upper part of the cylinder lock through hole 354 , Supported and fixed by. Hereinafter, the structure of the locking device 60 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the locking device 60 includes a U-shaped base 685 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 685. The sliding frame 971 for sliding, the sliding frame 984 for the body frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding frame 984 for the body frame cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 882 and 890 attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 685.

  The U-shaped base 685 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section and providing a sliding slide 971 for a door frame and a sliding rod 984 for a body frame in the interior thereof. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device integrated on an L-shaped base. This is to increase the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 by greatly increasing the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction. That is, in order to greatly increase the size of the game effect unit 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction, it is necessary to extremely reduce the dimension between the first peripheral wall 290 and the outer periphery of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the mounting structure is such that the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment can be formed to have a small width so that the locking device 60 can be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross-section of the U-shaped base 685 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 685 is completely covered except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014. That is, since the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed in the U-shaped base 685, even if the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame The sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 cannot be directly touched. This makes it possible to provide a highly secure pachinko machine.

  The U-shaped base 685 is provided with a rectangular hook through opening 860 through which the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are penetrated on the upper and lower sides opposite to the open side. Further, a screw fixing portion 861 is projected in the horizontal direction on the upper side and the middle of the side surface 685b (see FIG. 33) which is in the opposite side to the open side and is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290. Further, locking protrusions 862 are formed to project from the upper and middle portions of the side surface 685a (see FIG. 33) that do not adhere to the first circumferential wall 290 on the open side and the lower ends of the both side surfaces 685a and 685b on the open side. ing. Screw fixing portions 861 and locking protrusions 862 are for attaching the locking device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. When the locking protrusion 862 is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward (see FIG. 28), the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350 match in this state, and therefore the matching hole The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown). Note that the locking device 60 is attached not only by the upper and middle screw fixing portions 861 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing holes 898 formed in the lock mounting pieces 866 described later and the cylinder lock through holes 354 above. The lock attachment hole 353 is made to correspond to and fixed with a screw (not shown) so that the lower part of the lock device 60 is also attached.

  That is, in this embodiment, a predetermined portion of the first main body frame side wall portion that is opposed to the inner wall of the outer wall portion 12a (see FIG. 10) described later (the first peripheral wall 290) includes the above-described portion. An insertion hole 290a (see FIG. 27) into which a screw stopper 861 as a member for attaching the locking device 60 provided between the outer wall 12a and the inner wall is inserted. Of the thin wall exposed by forming the insertion hole 290a in the first peripheral wall 290, the portion screwed with a screw (screw) (not shown) is thicker than 3 mm. The lock attachment hole 350 is previously formed in the front-rear direction in the thick portion. Accordingly, in the state where the screw fixing portion 861 is inserted into the insertion hole 290a of the first peripheral wall 290, a screw is screwed from the screw fixing portion 861 to the lock mounting hole 350. In this embodiment, the locking device 60 is attached to the first peripheral wall 290 with screws having a diameter of approximately 3 mm including the peak and a length of approximately 12 mm.

  Further, at the time of the mounting, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the locking holes 351 to be positioned and locked. Thereafter, screw fixing portions 861 formed at two positions on the upper side opposite to the opening side (rear portion) of the U-shaped substrate 685 and screw fixing formed on the opening side (front portion) of the U-shaped substrate 685. The hole 898 is fixed to the lock mounting hole 350 with screws. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking projection 862 and the lock locking hole 351, the rear portion of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 861 and the lock mounting hole 350, and the locking device 60 Is fixed by the screw fixing hole 898 and the lock mounting hole 353, so that the locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 60 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 685 having a very small width, the locking device 60 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 60. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 862 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

  In addition, insertion holes 863 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685. Then, a rivet 864 is inserted into the insertion hole 863 and crimped in a state where the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed in the U-shaped substrate 685, whereby the inside of the U-shaped substrate 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be slidably attached. In other words, one rivet slot 974 is formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the door frame sliding rod 971, and one is formed on each of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the body frame sliding rod 984. By passing the rivet 864 through the rivet slots 989 and 996, the door frame sliding rod 971 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be moved downward. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the rivet 864 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slots 989, 996 of the body frame sliding rod 984, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 864 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 974 of the sliding rod 971.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 865 is formed in the lower part of the U-shaped base 685 on the side opposite to the open side. Further, a lock attaching piece 866 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 is provided projecting toward the side at the front end portion of the side face 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the main body frame 3 on the open side. Further, an insertion vertical opening 878, a spring locking piece 879, and a relief lateral hole 880 are formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 865 is configured such that a stopper piece 885 of a first fraud prevention member 882 described later moves forward and backward, which will be described later. In addition, the lock attachment piece 866 is provided on the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game effect unit installation recess 30 in a state where the lock device 60 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It protrudes from the front end toward the side. The lock attachment piece 866 has a lock insertion hole 867 through which the cylinder lock 868 passes, and two attachment holes 871 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 with screws 870. Screw fixing holes 898 for attaching the lower part of the device 60 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed. The insertion vertical opening 878 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 874 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 fixed to the cylinder lock 868 enter when the cylinder lock 868 rotates. The spring locking piece 879 is for locking the spring 894 provided on the tamper-proof members 882 and 890, and the clearance lateral hole 880 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 893. It is. This point will be described later.

  Next, the cylinder lock 868 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 866 will be described. In the cylinder lock 868, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock mounting substrate 869, and a lock shaft 872 of the cylinder lock body protrudes from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 869. The engagement cam 873 is fixed by screws 876. The cylinder lock 868 can be locked and unlocked from the front side of the door frame 5 by the cylindrical portion passing through the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 2, 3, 11, etc.). Further, the cylinder lock 868 is disposed on the lower end side of the game effect unit 4 (more specifically, below the dish unit 300).

  The engagement cam 873 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 874 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 997 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engagement protrusion 875 that engages with the rising engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 when rotating. The cylinder lock 868 configured as described above has a mounting hole (not indicated) and a lock formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 869 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 867. The U-shaped base 685 can be fixed by aligning the mounting hole 871 of the mounting piece 866 with the screw 870 and screwing it.

  Next, fraud prevention members 882 and 890 attached to the U-shaped base 685 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 882 and 890 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 984 from being lowered illegally with, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 868 with an official key. . Accordingly, the tamper-proof members 882 and 890 have a structure in which the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 are connected by the connecting pin 893. The first tamper-proof member 882 is formed in a vertically long plate shape configured to be swingable around a swing shaft hole 883 at the upper end. The first tamper-proof member 882 has a swing shaft hole 883 at the lowermost of the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984. It is fixed by being attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 685 described above by the insertion hole 863 and the rivet 864.

  The first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 884 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 878 on the plate-like surface, and a second engaging protruding piece 875 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 884. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 875 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 878, the upward engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside the U-shaped base 685 The second engaging protrusion 875 is engaged. In addition, an outer line obliquely above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 884 of the first fraud prevention member 882 is an inclined portion 882a. The inclined portion 882a is in contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 874 when the engaging cam 873 is rotated, and the first engaging protrusion 874 and the inclined portion 882a are rotated when the engaging cam 873 is rotated. , The first fraud prevention member 882 swings about the swing shaft hole 883 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 34B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 882 is provided with a stopper piece 885 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 884, and a restricting protruding piece 889 is provided below the stopper piece 885, A pin hole 887 and a connecting hole 888 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 889. The stopper piece 885 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017 of the body frame sliding rod 984 when the body frame sliding rod 984 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, the restricting protrusion 889 is connected to the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 by a spring 894. When the restriction protrusion 889 is connected by the spring 894, the biasing direction of the second fraud prevention member 890 is The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 887 is for fixing the guide pin 886. With the guide pin 886 fixed to the pin hole 887 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 882, the guide pin 886 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 878. The first fraud prevention member 882 is guided along the side surface 685b of the U-shaped base 685 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped base. Further, the connection hole 888 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 882 and the second tamper-proof member 890 with a connection pin 893.

  The second tamper-proof member 890 connected to the first tamper-proof member 882 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 892 is formed at one upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 896 is formed, and a contact portion 897 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 892 is for matching with the connection hole 888 of the first fraud prevention member 882 and connecting with the connection pin 893, and the spring locking hole 896 is a spring locking piece having a U-shaped base 685 at one end. The other end of the spring 894 locked to 879 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 897 abuts on the closing protrusion 23 that is fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 will be described later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 685 will be described. The door frame sliding rod 971 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 973 are integrally projected toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Has been. The door frame hook portion 973 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base 685, and when the locking device 60 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3. It protrudes forward from a door hook hole 352 (see FIG. 11) formed on the door, and engages with an engagement opening 175 (see FIG. 36) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 973 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 971. Can be released.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 974 through which the rivet 864 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 971, and the uppermost rivet slot among the rivet slots 974 is formed. A guide protrusion 976 is provided below the elongated hole 974 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 971. The rivet long hole 974 is a hole through which the rivet 864 inserted through the insertion hole 863 of the U-shaped base 685 passes, and the rivet 864 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 971. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 864 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 974. Further, the guide protrusion 976 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 991, 999 formed in the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding bar 984, and the door frame sliding bar 986 The sliding movements of 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are guided.

  A spring hook portion 980 is formed at the upper end of the door frame sliding rod 971. One end of the spring 982 is locked to the spring hook portion 980, and the other end of the spring 982 is the main frame sliding rod. The spring hook portion 993 formed on the upper hook member 985 of 984 is locked. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 971 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 984 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 971, a contact elastic piece 981 is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 981 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding bar 971 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 685 so that the door frame is internally used. This prevents the sliding rod 971 from rattling. Further, a vertically long play hole 978 and a rising engagement hole 979 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the free hole 978 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 979 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 971 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. In addition, an escape notch 983 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 865 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 971. The escape notch 983 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 885 of the first tamper-proof member 882 in order to reliably engage the tamper-proof notch 865 and the engagement notch 1017.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 984 includes an upper hook member 985 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 986 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 987 connecting the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986, and It is composed of In other words, the main body frame sliding rod 984 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 985 having the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the lower hook member 986 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 987. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 685.

  By the way, the upper hook member 985 has a hook portion 988 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 989 and a projecting piece moving hole 991 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 993 and a connection hole 994 are formed at the lower end portion of the vertical side, and contact portions 1015 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 988 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 above the U-shaped base 685 and engages with the closing protrusion 22 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 989 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 989, The rivet 864 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 989. Thereby, the upper hook member 985 can move downward. In the protruding piece moving hole 991, the guide protruding piece 976 above the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted as described above, and the door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 993 is for locking the other end of the spring 982 as described above. The connecting hole 994 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1015 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, the abutting portion 1015 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding operation of the upper hook member 985 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 986 is provided with a hook portion 1014 projecting rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper side to the lower side of the plate surface portion with a long rivet hole 996, a lowering engagement hole 997, and a play hole 998. One moving hole 999 is sequentially formed. Further, a connecting hole 995 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1017 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and contact portions 1016 are formed at the upper and lower sides. The hook portion 1014 penetrates the hook penetration opening 860 below the U-shaped base 685 and engages with a closing projection 23 provided at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 996 corresponds to the rivet slot 974 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 971. In a normal state where the rivet 864 is penetrated through the rivet slot 996, The rivet 864 is in a state of passing through the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 996. Thereby, the lower hook member 986 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 997 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 998 has a distal end portion of the second engagement protrusion 875 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 976 below the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 999, so that the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are connected to each other. It is designed to guide the movement. The connecting hole 995 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 987. Further, when the abutting portion 1016 is housed in the U-shaped base 685, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 685, and the sliding operation of the lower hook member 986 is smoothly performed without rattling. It is for doing so.

  By adopting such a structure as the locking device 60 and the above-described mounting structure for the first peripheral wall 290 and the like, the outer wall of the first body frame side wall (first peripheral wall 290), and the above The locking device 60 can be disposed in a space having a distance of approximately 18 mm between the inner wall of the side frame plate 13 and thereby the volume of the above-described game effect unit installation recess 30, particularly the above-mentioned. 49 cm can be secured as the maximum lateral width L1 of the front receiving port 30a.

  As mentioned above, although each member which comprises the locking device 60 was demonstrated, the method of assembling this locking device 60 is as follows. First, the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 are connected by a connecting wire rod 987. In this state, the guide projection 976 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is inserted into the projection moving holes 991, 999 of the upper hook member 985 and the lower hook member 986, and the rivet long hole 974 and the rivet The long holes 989 and 996 are aligned and overlapped. Then, in the overlapped state, the door frame sliding rod 971 is passed through the hook portion 988 of the upper hook member 985 and the hook portion 1014 of the lower hook member 986 through the hook penetration opening 860 of the U-shaped base 685. The body frame sliding rod 984 is inserted into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 685. Thereafter, the rivet 864 is inserted from the insertion hole 863. At this time, the rivet 864 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 989, 996, 974. However, when the lowermost rivet 864 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 864 also into the swing shaft hole 883 of the first fraud prevention member 882 and attach the first fraud prevention member 882 to the U-shaped base 685 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 882 to the U-shaped base 685, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 are connected by the connection pin 893, and the guide pin 886 is illustrated in the pin hole 887. The guide pin 886 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 878.

  With the rivet 864, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 685, and the spring 982 is spanned between the spring hook portions 980 and 993, and is used for the door frame. The sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are biased in opposite directions. Furthermore, the spring 894 is stretched over the spring locking pieces 879 and 594 so that the second tamper-proof member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 868 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 867 of the lock attachment piece 866, and the cylinder lock 868 is fixed to the attachment hole 871 with the screw 870. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 882a and into the insertion vertical opening 878, and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 is inserted. The cylinder lock 868 is attached to the lock attachment piece 866 so that the distal end portion thereof is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 884 and the insertion vertical opening 877 of the first fraud prevention member 882.

  In order to attach the locking device 60 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is formed on the main body frame 3 as described above. While being inserted into the hook hole 352, the locking protrusion 862 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 351 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. Then, the screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that protrude in the horizontal direction in that state are aligned with the lock mounting hole 350, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the aligned hole, as shown in FIG. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 862 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to project from the side surface 685a that does not adhere to the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685, while the rear portion The screw fixing portion 861 and the screw fixing hole 898 that constitute the fixing structure are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 685b that is in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 of the U-shaped base 685. Therefore, the locking device 60 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290.

  By the way, the effect | action of the locking device 60 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG.

  First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hooks 988 and 1014 of the body frame sliding rod 984 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 and the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 are locked. ing. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and the first engagement protrusion 874 of the engagement cam 873 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement protrusion 874 engages with the lower engagement hole 997 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 to push down the lower hook member 986 against the urging force of the spring 982. Further, the connecting wire rod 987 and the upper hook member 985 connected thereto are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, the locking state between the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 is released, and the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. Can be opened to the outer frame 2. When closing the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2. At this time, the hook portions 988 and 1014 are in a state of being lifted by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 34A), but the upper sides of the hook portions 988 and 1014 are directed outward. And tilted down. Therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 come into contact with the lower end portions of the closing projections 22 and 23, and the main body frame sliding rod 984. Descends downward. Finally, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 are locked again, and the main body frame sliding rod 984 rises to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 868 and the second engagement protrusion 875 of the engagement cam 873 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 878, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the second engagement protrusion 875 engages with the ascending engagement hole 979 of the door frame sliding rod 971 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 971 upward against the biasing force of the spring 982. . For this reason, since the engagement state of the engagement opening 175 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 973 of the door frame sliding rod 971 is released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. Can be opened to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3. At this time, the door frame hook portion 973 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 982 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 34A), but the lower side of the door frame hook portion 973 is outside. Inclining up towards Therefore, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 973 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the engagement opening 175, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is Ascend upward. Finally, the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 973 and the engagement opening 175 are locked again, and the door frame sliding rod 971 is lowered to return to the locked state.

  The door frame sliding rod 971 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base 685, and the U-shaped base 685 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. It is attached over the entire length. In addition, since the door frame hook portion 973 that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 971, the door frame 5 and the main body Locking of the entire length of the frame 3 in the longitudinal direction is ensured. Therefore, there is also an advantage that it is not possible to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there.

  As described above, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 868 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 988 and 1014 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 without lowering the key without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 868 may be performed. Cannot perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism including a first fraud prevention member 882 and a second fraud prevention member 890, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 685. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. When the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 35A, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 897 of the second fraud prevention member 890 are in contact. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 882 rotates counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 894, the stopper piece 885 enters the fraud prevention notch 865, and the stopper piece 885 becomes the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1017 formed on the lower hook member 986 of the main body frame sliding rod 984 at a position corresponding to 865. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 984 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 885 and the engagement notch portion 1017 are engaged. It is not possible to perform an illegal act of pulling down and opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 868, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 873 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 874 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 878. When the first engagement protrusion 874 rotates, the inclined portion 882a of the first fraud prevention member 882 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 874 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 885 also starts to rotate away from the tamper-proof cutout 865, starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around the 883. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 885 and the engagement notch 1017 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in a position where the spring 894 is extended and the contact portion 897 is retracted. When the engagement cam 873 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 874 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 874 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 997 of the lower hook member 986. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 984 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 988 and 1014 and the closing projections 22 and 23 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 890 is in contact with the restricting protrusion 889, so the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 890 is almost the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 23 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 897 of the second fraud prevention member 890 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. . For this reason, the 1st fraud prevention member 882 and the 2nd fraud prevention member 890 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 882 and the second fraud prevention member 890 prevent only the downward movement of the main body frame sliding rod 984 from being illegally performed. This is because if the body frame sliding rod 984 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 971 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. This is because it is extremely difficult to do. Thus, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 984.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 882 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, even if the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in this embodiment, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside is provided. The main body frame sliding rod 984 is housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 685 except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014, and is completely covered. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the main body frame sliding rod 984 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 685 is to be pulled down, both side surfaces 685a and 685b of the U-shaped base 685 can Since entry into the enclosed space is prevented, cheating cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the locking device 60 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 685 which is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base. A sliding rod 971 and a body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably provided, and the cylinder lock 868 for operating the locking device 60 is attached to the U-shaped base 685 at the lower end side of the game effect unit 4. It was set as the position which becomes lower than. Thereby, the storage space of the game effect unit 4 (particularly the game panel 409) is not obstructed by the cylinder lock 868, and the size of the game effect unit 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction can be extremely increased. Therefore, even if the space surrounded by the peripheral walls 290 to 293 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the locking device 60 can be firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 60 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 971 provided inside and the main body The frame sliding rod 984 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 685 except for the hook portions 973, 988, and 1014. Accordingly, it is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 984 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like. Further, when the locking device 60 is attached, the locking projections 862 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are inserted into the lock locking holes 351 and positioned and locked. The screw fixing portions 861 and the screw fixing holes 898 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides opposite to the open side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 685 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 350 with screws. Therefore, the front portion of the locking device 60 is locked by the locking protrusion 862 and the lock locking hole 351, and the rear portion of the locking device 60 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 861, the screw locking hole 898, and the lock mounting hole 350. The locking device 60 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the screw fixing hole 898 formed in the lock mounting piece 866 and the cylinder lock through hole 354 of the main body frame 3 are formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 866 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685. However, instead of this, a screw 870 for attaching the cylinder lock 868 to the lock attachment piece 866 is used, and the tip of the screw 870 penetrates the lock attachment piece 866. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 354. Further, the locking device 60 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 685 is not screwed, or only by fixing the screw fixing portion 861 at the rear portion of the locking device 60 and the lock mounting hole 350. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 685 having the left and right side surfaces 685a and 685b. The door frame sliding rod 971 and the main body frame sliding rod 984 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 685a that is not in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 685b in close contact with the first peripheral wall 290 is attached. L-shaped base body (lock base body) is omitted, and a sliding frame 971 for a door frame and a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 685a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and the first peripheral wall 290. It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 984. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[About the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the door frame 5 includes a door frame main body 100 formed in a square shape, a door lens unit 120, a reinforcing sheet metal 160, a glass unit 190, a dish unit 300, a security cover 210, and the like. Installed. A vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 having an opening area that occupies approximately 3/4 of the door frame main body 100 when viewed from the front is formed in an upper portion of the door frame main body 100. In other words, the door frame main body 100 formed of a synthetic resin in a frame shape is formed with a gaming window 101 in the upper part thereof, and a lower part of the gaming window 101 is a plate-like part. Note that circular speaker openings 102 that allow the speakers 144a and 144b to pass therethrough are formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101. A stop lever 108 for locking the stopper piece 194 of the glass unit 190 is rotatably provided below the speaker opening 102.

  In the door frame 5, the door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface of the gaming window 101, while the dish unit 300 is provided on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A handle unit 318, which will be described later, protrudes and is fixed to one side (open side) of the dish unit 300. A reinforcing sheet metal 160 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 190 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101. Furthermore, the slide unit 230 corresponding to the handle unit 318, the mounting base 220, and the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 are attached to the back surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, respectively. A security cover 210 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 190.

  In the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passing port 103 through which a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) of the dish unit 300 passes is provided at the upper part on the pivot support side. Further, a lid opening 105 for detaching the side surface opening lid 383 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) is provided near the oblique center of the prize ball passing port 103. Further, a ball feed opening 104 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. A lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 868 to pass therethrough is further opened near the opening side of the ball feed opening 104.

  Further, a slide unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the slide unit 230 is formed at a position below the ball feed opening 104 on the back side of the plate-like portion below the game window 101. Further, engagement receiving pieces (not shown) for hooking the latching protrusions 195 of the glass unit 190 are formed at the lower left and right of the gaming window 101. A mounting opening 110 is formed on the side of the engagement receiving piece to which the mounting elastic piece 213 of the crime prevention cover 210 is mounted.

  Further, at the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, the engagement is inserted into the guide hole 436 (see FIG. 44) of the dish unit 300 toward the front (that is, the front side) of the door frame 5. A protrusion 111 is formed. On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate-like portion below the gaming window 101, a door frame protrusion 112 protruding rearward (that is, on the back side) of the door frame 5 is formed along the lower side of the door frame main body 100. . The door frame protruding piece 112 is engaged with engaging grooves 42 and 43 (see FIG. 1) formed in the main body frame 3, and an outer protrusion that is engaged at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured as a pair.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part of the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door lens unit attached to the front side of the door frame. FIG. 40 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the relationship between the lens cover of the door lens unit and the lens cover provided on the dish unit. FIG. 41 is a front view of the door frame when a member that irradiates the LED among members constituting the speaker cover and the decorative member is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the door lens unit 120 includes reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b, cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b, LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b, a lens cover 140, and a speaker 144a. 144b and the lens base body 121.

  More specifically, the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b are reflecting surfaces. The cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b are attached to the front surfaces of the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b, respectively. In addition, LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b are attached to the inside of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b, respectively. Furthermore, a light-transmissive lens cover 140 that covers the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is provided in front of the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b. The lens cover 140 is disposed with a lens base body 121 described later as a base, and a pair of left and right speakers 144a and 144b are attached to the upper portion of the lens cover 140.

  The lens base body 121 is formed of a synthetic resin so as to form an inner hollow triangular shape having a circular arc at the front and a linear shape at the rear in plan view and a rear surface (that is, a back surface) opened. An inverter board 136 that supplies a high-voltage current to the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b is housed and fixed in the hollow interior of the lens base body 121. Further, an upper reflector 122 having an L-shaped cross section is attached so as to contact the front and bottom surfaces of the lens base body 121. The upper reflector 122 is formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white, and has a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surface of the upper reflector 122 is a reflection surface that reflects light emitted from the upper cold cathode tube 132 and the upper LED substrate 137. Note that side reflectors 130a and 130b, which will be described later, are similarly formed of a polycarbonate resin colored in white.

  Incidentally, electrode support portions 125 for supporting both ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 are formed at both ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively. Further, in order to support the upper cold cathode tube 132 at an appropriate interval, a cathode tube support piece 123 having a tip portion formed in a U shape is projected from the front surface of the upper reflector 122. This is because the central portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is bent into a "<" shape and is bent, so that the bent portion at the center is stressed and is easily damaged. is there. That is, by supporting the horizontally long upper cold cathode tube 132 not only by the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends but also by the cathode tube support piece 123 at an appropriate interval, the upper cold cathode tube 132 is preferably not damaged. Can be supported. Further, by supporting the upper cold cathode tube 132 so as not to move with the cathode tube support piece 123 in a state where the upper cold cathode tube 132 is sandwiched between heat-resistant rubber packings (not shown), a support structure that is more difficult to break. It can be.

  In addition, the electrode support portions 125 at the left and right ends are open at the top, and an electrode insertion hole (not shown) that is open to receive the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is formed in the peripheral wall facing inward. ing. On the other hand, rubber sleeves 133 that can be elastically deformed are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the upper cold cathode tube 132 to which wiring is connected. Then, the electrode cover 127 is fitted from above the electrode support 125 in a state where the rubber sleeve 133 is inserted from above into an electrode insertion hole (not shown) formed in the electrode support 125. As a result, the upper cold cathode tube 132 can be attached to the front surface of the upper reflector 122.

  Thus, the rubber sleeve 133 is attached to both ends of the upper reflector 122, and the rubber sleeve 133 is supported in the electrode insertion hole (not shown) of the electrode support portion 125 in a loosely fitted state. With this structure, even if the upper cold cathode tube 132 vibrates due to an impact or the like, when the rubber sleeve 133 absorbs the vibration, the end portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132 is swung at the electrode support portion 125 or The sliding stress is weakened by sliding. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper cold cathode tube 132 from being damaged at the electrode support portion 125 and the bent portion of the upper cold cathode tube 132. Note that speaker through holes 128a and 128b through which the speakers 144a and 144b penetrate are formed on the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122, respectively.

  By the way, the left and right ends of the upper reflector 122 are connected to the side reflectors 130a and 130b so as to hang down. The side reflectors 130a and 130b are also formed of a polycarbonate resin colored white like the upper reflector 122, and have a surface whose reflectance is increased by the white colored resin. That is, the surfaces of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are reflecting surfaces that reflect the light emitted from the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b. The side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b attached in front of the side reflectors 130a and 130b are formed in a straight line extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, electrode support portions 131a and 131b that support the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are formed at two locations on the upper and lower ends of the side reflectors 130a and 130b, respectively. Of course, the structure for supporting the side cold-cathode tubes 134a and 134b with the electrode support portions 131a and 131b is the same as that of the upper cold-cathode tube 132 and the electrode support portion 125 described above. That is, rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are attached to the end portions of the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b, and the rubber sleeves 135a and 135b are in contact with and supported by the electrode support portions 131a and 131b. . Thereby, it can be set as the support structure which is hard to be damaged even if the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b vibrate.

  Note that LED boards 137, 138a, and 138b on which a large number of LEDs are mounted are attached to the inner side of the upper reflector 122 and the side reflectors 130a and 130b (positions that border the gaming window 101). The inner peripheral surface of the lens cover 140 described later is decorated by the LEDs mounted on the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b.

  The lens base body 121, the upper reflector 122 to which the upper cold cathode tube 132 is attached, and the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b are attached are arranged on the back side of the lens cover 140. Fixed. The lens cover 140 includes an upper lens cover portion 141 and side lens cover portions 142a and 142b as a cover body made of a transmissive resin. The upper lens cover portion 141 is a cover body provided corresponding to the upper reflector 122 to which the lens base body 121 and the upper cold cathode tube 132 are attached. The side lens cover parts 142a and 142b are cover bodies provided corresponding to the side reflectors 130a and 130b to which the side cold cathode fluorescent lamps 134a and 134b are attached, respectively.

  More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are both formed as a white lens portion, and a front bulge portion having a wedge-shaped cross section is formed of a synthetic resin. Further, on the rear end side of the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b, a red lens portion 150 formed of a synthetic resin having a different color from that of the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b borders the gaming window 101. Each is formed along the peripheral surface. In the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b, the white lens portion and the red lens portion 150 are connected and formed in a series. The red lens portion 150 is illuminated by a plurality of LEDs mounted linearly on the upper LED substrate 137 and the side LED substrates 138a and 138b.

  By the way, the upper lens cover part 141 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section in which the inside is hollow and the rear side is open, and is configured in a boomerang shape in plan view. The inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip end portion of the upper lens cover portion 141 is close to the above-described upper cold cathode tube 132 formed in a “<” shape. Further, a front lens portion 141c colored in silver is bonded to the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip portion of the upper lens cover portion 141. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 141 is illuminated by the upper cold cathode tube 132.

  Further, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are similar to the upper lens cover portion 141 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. However, the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are configured in a boomerang shape having a wedge-shaped protrusion amount smaller than that of the upper lens cover portion 141 in a side view and having a gentle curve as a whole. Further, the inner surfaces of the wedge-shaped tips of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b are close to the side cold cathode tubes 134a and 134b formed in the above-described linear shape. Furthermore, a front lens portion 142c colored in silver is bonded to the outside of the wedge-shaped tip portions of the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b. With this structure, the front bulging surface having a wedge shape in cross section corresponding to almost the entire side lens cover portion 142a, 142b is illuminated by the side cold cathode tubes 134a, 134b.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light source disposed in the space defined by the reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b. Then, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b corresponding to these light emitting sources were molded and connected with synthetic resins having different colors (in this case, white and red). Specifically, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the reflectors 122, 130a, 130b are white lens portions, while the lens cover portions 141, 142a, 142b corresponding to the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b are red. The lens unit 150 was used. In this manner, the lens cover portions 141, 142a, and 142b can be molded with a structure and color that are suitably irradiated by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, and 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, and 138b. Of course, different types of light emitting sources are not limited to the combination of the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED substrates 137, 138a, 138b, and both may be configured as LED substrates.

  By the way, speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b for attaching the speakers 144a and 144b are formed in a connecting portion between the upper lens cover portion 141 and the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b of the lens cover 140. And speaker cone 145a is provided in the front of these speakers 144a and 144b. Therefore, the cone support that supports the speaker cone 145a is attached from the back surface of the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b using a predetermined attachment member (not shown). The front surfaces of the speakers 144a and 144b attached to the speaker attachment holes 143a and 143b are covered by speaker covers 146a and 146b having mesh-like covers 147a and 147b (punching metal).

  Further, decoration member attachment areas 148a and 148b are formed below the side lens cover portions 142a and 142b, and the decoration members 149a and 149b are attached to the decoration member attachment areas 148a and 148b. The decorative members 149a and 149b have shapes similar to the speaker covers 146a and 146b described above. With this structure, when the lens cover 140 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, it is possible to give an impression that the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 140 are balanced.

  Incidentally, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b not only simply cover the front of the speakers 144a, 144b or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 140, but the surroundings are light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  Specifically, in the speaker covers 146a and 146b, the LED substrate 152 is in close contact with the back surface of the cover base plate 151 formed of a synthetic resin in a flat plate shape. The speaker frame 154 is covered with an inner lens and a front lens (not shown) with the speaker frame 154 built in front of the cover base plate 151. Further, the front surfaces of the speaker covers 146a and 146b are closed with mesh covers 147a and 147b.

  Further, inside the decorative members 149a and 149b, the LED substrate 156 is in close contact with the back surface of the decorative base plate 155 formed into a flat plate shape with a synthetic resin. The decoration base plate 155 is covered with an inner lens and a decoration lens (not shown) with the decoration frame 158 built in front of the decoration base plate 155. Further, the front surfaces of the decorative members 149a and 149b are closed by the decorative plates 159a and 159b.

  Thus, the speaker covers 146a, 146b and the decorative members 149a, 149b are light decorations by the cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b and the LED boards 137, 138a, 138b in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5. Separately, the four corners of the door frame 5 are mainly light-decorated. Therefore, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a strong tendency to arrange only speakers. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, since the light decoration around the speaker is not performed, the light decoration around the outer periphery of the game window 101 has an impression. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery of the door frame 5 excluding the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively light-decorated.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the reinforcing sheet metal 160 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 161, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 162, an open side reinforcing sheet metal 163, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 that are fastened with screws or the like. It is configured in a shape. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 is attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door frame main body 100. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is attached along the shaft support side side part back surface of the door frame main body 100. The open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 is attached along the open-side side portion back surface of the door frame main body 100. The lower reinforcing metal plate 164 is attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the game window 101 of the door frame main body 100.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 161 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width dimension of the door frame body 100. And the both ends of the long side in the upper side reinforcement sheet metal 161 are the upper bending protrusion piece 165 and the lower bending protrusion piece 166 which each bent toward the back. The upper bent protrusion 165 and the lower bent protrusion 166 are fitted in the upper crime prevention double groove 33 (see FIG. 11) of the main body frame 3.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 is also formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 162 are a shaft support side short bent protrusion 172 and a shaft support side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 which are bent backward. However, the shaft support side short bent protrusion 172 that is the inner bent protrusion is extremely short, while the shaft support side L-shaped bent protrusion 167 that is the outer bent protrusion is the tip of the bent portion. Is formed in an L shape. The shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 167 is configured such that a tip portion bent in an L shape contacts the inside of the shaft support side portion 49 of the main body frame 3 described above.

  The opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the longitudinal dimension of the door frame main body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 are an open-side outer bent protrusion 173 and an open-side inner bent protrusion 174 that are bent rearward. The open-side outer bent protrusion 173 is inserted into the side crime prevention groove 34 (see FIG. 11) of the main body frame 3 described above, and the open-side inner bent protrusion 174 is a security concave portion of the main body frame 3. 35 (see FIG. 11). Engagement openings 175 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 163 so that the door frame hook portion 973 of the locking device 60 can enter. A hook cover 176 with which the door frame hook portion 973 engages is fixed so as to cover the back side of these engagement openings 175.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 has a predetermined width and is formed to have the same length as the width of the door frame body 100. Then, both end edges of the long side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 are a lower bent protrusion piece 178 and an upper bent protrusion piece 179 which are bent toward the rear. However, the lower bent protruding piece 178 is formed by bending the lower long side edge of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 toward the rear, and the upper bent protruding piece 179 is the upper longer side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164. The both sides of the edge are bent rearward, and the portion sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 179 on both sides is a vertical bent protrusion 180 extending in the vertical direction. Yes. The vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper end edge shape matches the lower end shape of a unit frame 191 of a glass unit 190 described later. Then, when the glass unit 190 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the upper end piece of the vertical bent projecting piece 180 is formed along the substantially central outer periphery in the width direction of the unit frame 191 of the glass unit 190. The mating groove 200 is engaged. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 177 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit>
Next, the glass unit 190 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 is demonstrated with reference to FIG.37 and FIG.38. As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the glass unit 190 is configured by adhering a unit frame 191 and a glass plate 201 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate). The unit frame 191 is a frame having an annular vertically long octagon shape molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101. The glass plate 201 is two transparent plates disposed on the front and rear surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 191.

  Stopping pieces 194 are formed on the left and right sides of the upper portion of the unit frame 191 so as to project outward. In addition, on the left and right sides of the lower part of the unit frame 191, hooking protrusions 195 are formed so as to protrude toward the outer side of the ring. The stopper piece 194 and the latching protrusion 195 are for attaching the glass unit 190 to the back surface of the door frame 5 as described above. Note that the glass unit 190 of the present embodiment is integrally formed with a unit frame 191 with a pair of security projection plates 199 (see FIG. 9) that project obliquely upward in a front view. Therefore, when the glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame 5, the security protruding plate 199 is connected to the lateral positions of the speakers 144a and 144b without any gap.

<Security cover>
Next, the crime prevention cover 210 provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 190 described above and prevents an unauthorized tool from entering the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the security cover 210 is formed in a flat plate shape with a transparent synthetic resin so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 190 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 162 and 163. The upper side portion of the crime prevention cover 210 is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 211 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail unit 462, and the rear end of the crime prevention crashes backward along the contact recess 211. A piece 214 is projected.

  The rear surface of the crime prevention cover 210 is formed with a rear end protrusion piece 215 for crime prevention that projects obliquely on the rear surface of the door frame 5 with the door frame 5 attached thereto. Yes. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 210, the security cover 210 is attached to the door frame 5 and the pre-crime projection piece 212 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 191 and both lower ends of the unit frame 191 A mounting elastic piece 213 formed in a U-shape is formed so as to project forward.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the mounting base 220 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100. And like the crime prevention cover 210, it is formed in the horizontal rectangular parallelepiped shape which the front open | released with the transparent synthetic resin. A ball flight guide surface 227 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 220, and the launch rail 38 is held between the ball flight guide surface 227 and the plate portion 32 when the door frame 5 is closed. Thereby, the ball launched from the launch rail 38 is smoothly guided to the game area 20.

  By the way, an opening for a prize ball passage opening through which a rearward protruding portion of a prize ball passage opening covering portion (not shown) formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 164 is formed in the upper portion of the mounting base 220 according to the present embodiment. 221 is formed. A ball feed unit mounting recess 222 for mounting the ball feed unit 226 is formed in the lower part on the open side of the mounting table 220. In addition, the area | region of the diagonal direction from this ball feed unit attachment recessed part 222 is the above-mentioned ball flight guide surface 227. The ball feed unit 226 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 222 is provided with a ball feed member (not shown) that swings in response to the reciprocating motion difference of the hitting ball of the launching device 57. By this swinging movement of the ball feeding member, the balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 38. Further, a lid opening 223 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 383 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 220. Further, a vertical wall 224 is formed on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 220. When the security cover 210 is attached, the standing wall 224 is in contact with the front surface of the security cover 210 so as to restrict the lower part of the security cover 210 from moving forward.

<Frame decoration relay terminal board>
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, a frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting table 220. Further, a relay board cover 241 is attached so as to cover the rear surface of the frame decoration relay terminal board 240. The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 includes an electrical component and electrical components (cold cathode tubes 132, 134a, 134b, LED boards 137, 138a, 138b, speakers 144a, 144b, 341a, 341b, handles provided on the door frame 5. Wiring from a switch, a ball rental unit 324, an operation button unit 326, and the like provided in the unit 318 are collectively connected. Then, the wiring from the frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is delivered to the delivery control board box 55 via the door frame connector 2012 of the sub drawer relay board 649 incorporated in the board unit 54 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The control board is connected to the main control board of the main control board box 25.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a front view of the dish unit provided on the front surface of the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the dish unit. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the dish unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, in the dish unit 300, members such as a lower speaker unit 330, a dish body 360, a second ball extraction link unit 400, and a dish lid body 430 are attached to a unit frame 301 constituting the appearance. Is configured. Specifically, the lower speaker unit 330 is attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, while the dish 360 is provided so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301 above the lower speaker unit 330. The second ball removal link unit 400 performs the ball removal operation of the ball removal valve 375 provided in the dish body 360, while the dish lid body 430 closes the rear surface of the unit frame 301.

  First, the unit frame 301 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, in the unit frame 301, an upper surface cover portion 302 and a front surface cover portion 303 are integrally formed of synthetic resin. The upper surface cover portion 302 has a semi-elliptical shape in plan view in which the upper surface is gently inclined toward the near side, and constitutes the upper surface of the unit frame 301. Further, the front cover portion 303 continuously extends from the front side to the rear side and constitutes the front and bottom surfaces of the unit frame 301. A vertical cover portion 302 a that contacts the front side of the door frame main body 100 is also integrally formed on the back side of the upper surface cover portion 302. The vertical cover portion 302a has a ball rental button unit opening 323 at the center thereof. The ball rental unit 324 can be attached to the ball rental button unit opening 323 from the back side. When a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the lending unit 324 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like.

  Further, a dish body upper surface opening 305 is opened from the rising portion of the vertical cover portion 302a of the upper surface cover portion 302 toward the front. An operation button unit concave space 306 is formed at the front center of the dish upper surface opening 305. Further, an LED decoration space portion 307 is formed along the front end portions of the left and right upper surface cover portions 302 from the operation button unit concave space portion 306. Further, a first ball extraction button opening 313 a for attaching the first ball extraction button 313 is provided on the side of the dish upper surface opening 305. The dish body upper surface opening 305 is formed in the same shape as the storage part 361 of the dish body 360 and the upper surface opening of the guide passage part 362 communicating therewith. When the dish body 360 is attached to the unit frame 301, the storage section 361 and the guide passage section 362 of the dish body 360 face the dish body upper surface opening 305.

  In addition, a space portion forming member 310 is attached to the operation button unit concave space portion 306, and the operation button unit 326 is attached to the space portion forming member 310. The space forming member 310 has a wiring housing opening 310b. The wiring storage opening 310b stores a connector 310a for wiring to be connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the operation button unit 326 when the operation button unit 326 is inserted into the space forming member 310. It is. The operation button unit 326 includes a plurality (three in the illustrated example) of operation buttons 327. The plurality of operation buttons 327 are operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the effect display device 115 or the like.

  Further, the first ball removal button 313 is attached to the upper surface cover portion 302 via a sliding support member 314 attached to the first ball removal button opening 313a of the upper surface cover portion 302. The member 314 is slid in the vertical direction. When the first ball removal button 313 is pressed by the player, the rotation member 366 positioned below the first ball removal button 313 rotates about the rotation shaft 367 in the clockwise direction. Then, in conjunction with the operation of the rotating member 366, the slide valve 365 linked to the lower end of the rotating member 366 moves. The slide valve 365 is always biased by the spring 369 and is in a position where the downstream end of the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 is closed. When the first ball removal button 313 is moved as described above, the first passage extraction portion is retracted from the guide passage portion 362 and is continuous to the downstream side of the guide passage portion 362 and the guide passage portion 362. 364 is communicated. Thereby, the balls stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish body 360 can be extracted from the dish body 360. This structure will be further described in detail when the dish 360 is described.

  Next, the configuration of the front cover portion 303 of the unit frame 301 will be described. As described above, the front cover portion 303 forms the front surface and the bottom surface of the unit frame 301 continuously from the front side of the upper surface cover portion 302. Therefore, the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 is inclined to the back side as the central portion protrudes most forward and moves left and right. Speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed on the left and right sides of the front surface portion of the front cover portion 303 (that is, the central protrusion). The speaker openings 315a and 315b are covered with a mesh-like speaker cover 316a and 316b (punching metal). Then, two speakers 341a and 341b that are housed and fixed in the lower speaker unit 330 are located behind the speaker covers 316a and 316b. Note that the speaker openings 315a and 315b are formed in an inclined surface that inclines from the protruding portion at the center of the front surface of the front cover portion 303 toward the back side. Therefore, when the unit frame 301 is viewed from the front, the unit frame 301 is opened outward from the central vertical line of the pachinko machine 1. And the front decoration board 304 is attached so that the protrusion from the center of the front surface of the front cover part 303 may be bordered to the upper and lower opening edges of the speaker openings 315a and 315b.

  Further, a handle attachment hole 317 for attaching the handle unit 318 is formed below the open side end of the front cover portion 303. As is well known, the handle unit 318 is for adjusting the resilience of the hit ball. Therefore, the handle unit 318 is provided with a rotation operation member 318a that can be operated by the player. When the turning operation member 318a is turned, the engaging cam 319 fixed to the rear end of the turning shaft is turned. As described above, by converting the rotational movement of the engagement cam 319 into the slide movement movement of the slide engagement / disengagement piece 231 of the slide unit 230, the strength of the elastic force of the launching device 57 can be adjusted. It is like that.

  Here, the second ball removal link unit 400 includes a second ball removal button 401, a pressing swing member (not shown), a first link 414, and a second link 419. The pressing swing member (not shown) is a member that swings when the second ball extraction button 401 is locked. The first link 414 and the second link 419 are members for transmitting a pressing operation of a pressing swing member (not shown) as a ball swinging motion of the ball release valve 375.

  A second ball extraction button opening 320 for opening the second ball extraction button 401 constituting a part of the second ball extraction link unit 400 is opened at the center lower portion of the front cover portion 303. In addition, a ball discharge port for discharging a ball, which has been removed according to the operation of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401, to the outside of the dish unit 300 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the front cover portion 303. 322 is formed. A fastener insertion hole 325 for attaching the operation button unit 326 is formed obliquely in front of the ball discharge port 322. In the present embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 313 and 401 of the first ball removal button 313 and the second ball removal button 401 are provided for the following reason. That is, all the spheres stored in the storage portion 361 and the guide passage portion 362 of the dish 360 can be extracted by operating the first ball release button 313, but are aligned in a line at the guide passage portion 362. It takes some time to remove the sphere. On the other hand, since the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 361 of the dish body 360 can be quickly extracted from the large-diameter extraction opening 388 by operating the second extraction button 401, the extraction time is shortened. Can do. In other words, it is possible to arbitrarily select the length of time that the player spends removing the ball. Also, when a big hit is made during the game and a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full switch 730 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 may function. is assumed. Then, due to the operation of the full tank switch 730, the payout operation is stopped or the bulleting operation is stopped, and there is a possibility that the game cannot be continued despite the big hit. In such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 401, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, The game can be continued.

  Next, the configuration of the dish lid 430 that closes the back surface of the unit frame 301 of the dish unit 300 will be described. The dish lid 430 is formed of a synthetic resin as a rectangular flat plate so as to close almost the entire back surface of the unit frame 301. In addition, a ball escape passage rear bar 433 is formed integrally and projectingly at substantially the center of the front side of the dish lid 430. A curved upper guide rod 434 and a lower guide rod 435 are formed on the rear ball passage 433 so as to guide the ball upward and downward. Then, when the dish lid 430 is attached to the back surface of the unit frame 301, it faces the ball passage passage front rod 337 and the ball passage passage rear rod 433 formed in the speaker box body 331 of the lower speaker unit 330 so as to be integrated. This constitutes a ball passage in the dish. At this time, the guide rod 338 formed on the ball extraction passage front rod 337 is positioned between the upper guide rod 434 and the lower guide rod 435 of the ball extraction passage rear rod 433. For this reason, the in-dish ball extraction passage is formed in a meandering shape, and the extracted ball is discharged to the outside from the ball discharge port 322 while weakening the momentum.

  In addition, an opening lid attachment window 432 is formed in the dish lid body 430 on the upper side of the rear punching passage 433. Further, a square cylindrical award ball connecting rod 431 protrudes from the upper back of one end side (the pivot support side) of the dish lid 430. When the dish unit 300 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the prize ball communication rod 431 penetrates the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the lower part of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100 and It penetrates to the back side. Then, with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the end of the prize ball passage formed in the main body frame 3 faces in a superposed manner. The opening lid attaching window 432 is an opening for detachably attaching the side opening lid 383 that closes the side wall opening (not shown) of the second ball extraction passage portion (not shown) of the dish body 360. And it is provided in the position corresponding to the opening 105 for lid | covers (refer FIG.38 and FIG.39) formed in the door frame main body 100. FIG.

[About Game Direction Unit]
The configuration of the game effect unit 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a front view of the game effect unit. FIG. 46 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game effect unit. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the game effect unit. FIG. 48 is a perspective view seen from the back of the game effect unit. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the game effect unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 to 49, the game effect unit 4 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 680, a game panel 409, a panel holder 540, a back unit 510 as a wide space holding unit, a panel back plate 504, a center role. An object 620, a substrate holder 505, and an effect display device 115 are mainly provided.

  The game panel 409 is a plate-like panel made of a transparent resin having a size corresponding to the game area 20. The panel holder 540 is a frame-shaped holder made of a resin to which the game panel 409 is detachably fitted. The front component member 680 is disposed on the front side of the panel holder 540 and sandwiches the game panel 409 in cooperation with the panel holder 540. Further, the front component member 680 includes a guide rail 482 that partitions the game area 20 and guides the game ball into the game area 20. The guide rail 482 includes an outer rail unit 472 and an inner rail unit 462. A center accessory 620 described later is attached to the approximate center of the game panel 409.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 includes a plate-like panel back plate 504 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, and a substrate disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504. A holder 505 is provided. The substrate holder 505 has a box shape with the front and upper sides opened, and the peripheral control substrate box 24 and the main control substrate box 25 are supported on the rear side. Specifically, the peripheral control board box 24 in which the peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 59) is housed is mounted on the board holder 505, and the main control is performed while being superimposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 24. A main control board box 25 in which a board 710 (see FIG. 58) is housed is mounted. The board holder 505 is electrically connected to a main control board or the like in the main control board box 25 supported on the rear side of the board holder 505 and can be slidably connected from the rear side. A panel relay terminal plate 750 that supports 2000a and the unit side sub drawer connector 2002a is further provided.

  Furthermore, the game panel 409 is further provided with a back unit 510 attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and an effect display device 115 including an LCD capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. The back unit 510 has a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 that can form a wide space of a predetermined volume behind the game panel 409. The effect display device 115 is detachably supported by the back box 514 so as to close the opening 514a formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514.

  A display device control board box 119 having a display device control board 816 (see FIG. 59) for controlling the effect display device 115 and the like is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect display device 115 is provided with a larger one (for example, about 21 inches) than the effect display device used in the conventional pachinko machine.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11 as well, the front component member 680 has an arcuate opening 680a that connects the upper end of the outer rail unit 472 to the lower end of the inner rail unit 462 in a clockwise direction (see FIG. 49). The game area 20 having a substantially circular shape in front view is defined by the guide rail 482 and the opening 680a. The guide ball 482 guides the game ball launched along the launch rail 38 by the game ball launching device 57 to the upper part of the game area 20. Further, at the downstream end of the outer rail unit 472, the above-described connection passage portion 477 connected to the rail connection member 44 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 38 is formed in an oblique shape. A foul port 489 (see FIG. 23) is formed on the upstream side adjacent to the connection passage portion 477.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the structure relating to the foul ball discharge formed in the above-described game effect unit 4 (including the foul port 489 (see FIG. 23), the guide rail 482, the rail connection member 44, the connection passage portion 477, A foul ball guide hole 489 or the like) is formed in the front component member 680 (see FIG. 23). Then, by assembling the front component member 680, it is possible to form the foul port 489 (see FIG. 23) in the game effect unit 4 and properly discharge the foul ball without providing a foul port on the main body frame side. It is.

  Furthermore, a security protrusion 465 (see FIG. 11) is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail unit 472 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. This security protrusion 465 overlaps with the rear end protrusion 215 (see FIG. 36) of the crime prevention rear end projecting on the security cover 210 (see FIG. 36) in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, and is pivotally supported. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5.

  Also, at the center of the lower portion along the inner rail unit 462 (that is, the most downstream side in the game area 20), none of the winning ports such as the start ports 600, 602, 604 and the general winning ports 614 were won. An out port 471 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. Between the inner rail unit 462 and the outer rail unit 472 from the out port 471 to the backflow prevention member 463, a guide passage through which the hit ball is guided to the game area 20 is configured. Then, the hit ball that has flown back through the guide passage without reaching the game area 20 is taken into the foul mouth 489 (see FIG. 23) and is again discharged to the dish body 360 (see FIG. 2) of the dish unit 300. ing. In addition, a rail security groove 464 (see FIG. 11) is formed in the front component member 680 on the way from the out port 471 of the inner rail unit 462 to the stop portion 476. The rail crime prevention groove 464 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime protrusion piece 214 (see FIG. 36) protruding from the crime prevention cover 210 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Then, by the uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 464 and the post-crime projection piece 214, the piano is overlapped in the vertical direction and inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the open side. Finally, the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as wires is prevented.

  Further, a substrate holder 505 is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the back unit 510. The substrate holder 505 is formed with a space so as to collect the winning balls in front of the substrate holder 505, and a drop opening (not shown) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The dropping port joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 471 and further communicates with an out ball passage 645 formed in the substrate unit 54. The substrate holder 505 has a peripheral control board box 24 for storing a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 59) for controlling a game operation and a main control board box for storing a main control board 710 (see FIG. 58) on the back surface. 25 and a panel relay terminal plate 750 (see also FIG. 58) for connecting to a payout control board, a power supply board, and the like provided in the board unit 54 are attached. On the panel relay terminal plate 750, the unit-side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a that are automatically connected to the above-described frame-side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b provided on the board unit 54 only by mounting the game effect unit 4 on the main body frame 3. Is provided.

  Further, the center accessory 620 provided on the game panel 409 is an accessory that is formed in the game area 20 with various decorative bodies and winning holes, and is attached from the front side of the game panel 409. ing. Specifically, as described above, the game panel 409 is appropriately formed with an opening 409e for attaching the center accessory 620, and the center accessory 620 is fitted into each opening 409e from the front side of the game panel 409. Later, it is fixed with screws.

  The center accessory 620 has a frame-shaped decorative body 622 as a main component, and the effect display device 115 disposed behind can be visually recognized through an opening 621 formed in the center of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. ing. However, a transparent plate 621 a made of a transparent resin is formed in the opening 621 so as to cover the entire back surface of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. Therefore, from the front side of the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 can be visually recognized through the opening 621 (transparent plate 621 a), while the game ball can be viewed through the opening 621 (transparent plate 621 a). It is impossible to enter behind the center actor 620.

  In the state where the center combination 620 is attached to the game panel 409, the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a form substantially the same plane (become substantially flush). Therefore, in the game effect unit 4, light can pass in the back direction or the near side beyond the position where the game panel 409 is disposed (the plane position formed by the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a). In principle, the game ball is prevented from entering beyond the position where the game panel 409 is disposed (the plane position formed by the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a).

  Further, the rear unit 510 is configured such that the effect display device 115 is detachably attached to the rear unit 510. Specifically, the back unit 510 is formed so as to be separated from the upper and lower sides on one side (left side in rear view) extending vertically on the inner periphery of the opening 514a formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the back box 514. Two attachment / detachment grooves 516 and an attachment / detachment mechanism 518 having an attachment / detachment lever are provided on the rear surface of the back box 514 on the opposite side to the attachment / detachment groove 516 (right side in the rear view).

  On the other hand, the effect display device 115 has an outer shape formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and two detachable protrusions 116 formed at positions separated from each other in the vertical direction on one of the left and right side surfaces (the left side surface when viewed from the back). An attachment / detachment locking portion 118 is provided on the other side surface (the side surface on the right side in the rear view) opposite to the side surface on which the attachment / detachment protrusion 116 is formed, and is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. These attachment / detachment protrusion 116 and attachment / detachment locking portion 118 both protrude outward, are formed so as to correspond to the attachment / detachment groove 516 and attachment / detachment mechanism 518 of the back unit 510, and the effect display device 115 is attached to the back side. The unit 510 is detachable.

  Furthermore, the wide space of the back unit 510 is provided with a rotation distribution accessory and a decoration accessory which will be described later. Here, the back unit 510 is arranged such that the wide space of the back unit 510 is formed over the entire back side of the game panel 409. Therefore, the wide space of the back unit 510 functions as an effect area formed over the entire back side of the game panel 409. In addition, a plurality of electrical components and light emitters described later are disposed on the front side of the back unit 510. A lamp driving board box 508 that accommodates a lamp driving board 850 (see FIG. 59) that is connected to these accessories, electric parts, and the like and controls driving is disposed at the lower back of the back unit 510. .

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 11, a positioning recess 466 that fits into a unit positioning projection 37 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on one side (shaft support side) of the game effect unit 4. On the other side (open side), a game effect unit stopper 467 inserted into a unit stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 3 is provided. When the game effect unit stopper 467 is pushed and fixed, its end is inserted into the unit stopper insertion hole. Thus, in order to fix the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the game effect unit 4 from an oblique direction so that the positioning recess 466 fits into the unit positioning protrusion 37 from the front side of the main body frame 3. Then, the entire game effect unit 4 is pushed into the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit stop 467 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end is inserted into the unit stop. Insert it into the hole and fix it. Thereafter, the game effect unit fixing tool 46 that is rotatably provided on the upper front surface of the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game panel 409. Thus, the entire game effect unit 4 including the game panel 409 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game effect unit 4, the procedure may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure. However, in the case of the illustrated embodiment, a fastening portion 469 is formed by cutting out a part of the lower end side on the lower side of the game panel 409, and is formed on the fastening portion 469 and the plate portion 32 of the main body frame 3. It is also possible to prevent the game effect unit 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3 by fastening the fastening hole 41 to be performed with a fastener (not shown).

  Further, the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a provided on the game effect unit 4 side and the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b provided on the main body frame 3 side attach the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3 from the front. In this case, they are arranged at positions where they can face each other. Further, the board unit 54 is formed with a fitting hole 646 (see FIG. 25) extending in the back direction at a substantially middle position between the frame side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b. On the other hand, the panel relay terminal plate 750 is formed with a fitting protrusion 751 (see FIG. 48) extending rearward at a substantially middle position between the unit side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a. With this structure, when the game effect unit 4 is attached to the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 from the front surface, the fitting protrusion 751 is fitted into the fitting hole 646 while being guided. At the same time, the unit-side drawer connectors 2000a and 2002a on the game effect unit 4 side are positioned so as to face the frame-side drawer connectors 2000b and 2002b on the main body frame 3 side, respectively. Therefore, the main drawer connector 2000 (2000a and 2000b) and the sub drawer connector 2002 (2002a and 2002b) are connected to each other simply by attaching the game effect unit 4 to the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to perform a typical connection work and work efficiency is improved.

  Note that the game panel 409 is formed with speaker cutouts 468 on the upper left and right sides of the game panel 409 so as to be able to receive the rearward protruding portions of the speakers 144a and 144b provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. A passage cutout portion 478 into which a part of the passage for discharging the prize ball is inserted is also formed obliquely below the foul mouth 489 (see FIG. 23).

  As described above, in the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment, at least the game panel 409 is configured by the transparent member, and the electrical decorations and the like arranged behind the game panel 409 can be visually recognized. In other words, it is not necessary to provide an electric decoration or the like in the game area, and the area where the game ball can actually flow down in the game area 20 can be widened as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Further, since the game panel 409 in which the game area 20 is formed is configured by a transparent member, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the game panel 409. For example, a large effect display device 115 extending over the entire game area 20 is arranged behind the game panel 409 to display an unprecedented large effect image, and various effects and decorations are displayed in depth. It can be set as the structure of the game production | presentation unit 4 with the sense of depth which is arrange | positioned in the direction and has not existed until now. Thereby, it becomes possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can attract the player's interest.

<Assembly structure of game production unit>
Here, the assembly structure of the main members (the front component member 680, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the board holder 505) constituting the game effect unit 4 described above will be specifically described. FIG. 50 is an enlarged front perspective view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. FIG. 51 is an enlarged rear perspective view of the game effect unit excluding the center combination and the back unit. FIG. 52 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the game effect unit excluding the center accessory and the back unit. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective enlarged view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 as viewed from the front. 54 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the game effect unit shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 as viewed from the back.

  50 to 54, the assembly structure of the game effect unit 4 will be described except for the center accessory 620 and the back unit 510 for easy understanding. The shape, position, size, and the like of the opening 409e in the game panel 409 vary depending on the structure of the center accessory 620 attached to the opening 409e, but the opening 409e is not shown here. However, in FIG. 52, only the back box 514 is schematically illustrated among the components of the back unit 510 in order to explain the mounting structure of the back unit 510 to the game panel 409.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 54, the front component member 680 is provided with a plurality of positioning fixing bosses 680c and positioning protrusions 680d protruding rearward on the rear surface side. The positioning fixing boss 680c and the positioning projection 680d can be positioned with the panel holder 540 and the substrate holder 505 disposed on the rear side, as will be described in detail later. A plurality of positioning protrusions 680d are also provided on the rear surface side of the inner rail unit 462, and are fitted and fixed in an inner rail fixing hole 409d of a game panel 409 described later.

  The gaming panel 409 in the gaming effect unit 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 20 and is formed of a transparent resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . Note that the gaming panel 409 is thinner than the panel holder 540 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail 410 (see FIG. 52) is installed. Yes.

  The game panel 409 includes a plurality of fitting holes 409a that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the upper portion and are formed of round holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the left and right lower portions and extend in the front-rear direction. 409b is provided. The fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b are disposed outside the game area 20 and are positioned with the panel holder 540.

  In addition, the game panel 409 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 409c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 409c has a shape in which approximately half of the thickness of the game panel 409 is cut out, and is disposed outside the game area 20 as well as the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b. The panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 are engaged and fixed.

  Furthermore, the game panel 409 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 409d at predetermined positions. The inner rail unit 462 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 680d protruding from the rear side of the inner rail unit 462 into the inner rail fixing hole 409d.

  Further, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 52, the game panel 409 has a lower hole 409f for planting the obstacle nail 410 so as to penetrate the game panel 409. The lower hole 409f The inner diameter of the hanger 410 is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the obstruction nail 410 on the planting side. A plurality of lower holes 409f are drilled at predetermined positions in the game panel 409, and obstacle nails 410 are implanted into the lower holes 409f from the front side using an obstacle nail planting device (not shown). A large number of obstacle nails 410 are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  The obstacle nail 410 according to the present embodiment has a head diameter of 4 to 5 mm and a total length of 25 to 30 mm. And the driving | running | working part formed in the axial part of the obstruction nail 410 is rounded at the front-end | tip, and the helical part cut | disconnected helically is formed. That is, since the tip shape of the driving portion of the obstacle nail 410 is rounded, the obstacle nail 410 can be easily inserted into the small-diameter pilot hole 409f. Furthermore, the obstacle nail 410 can be easily embedded in the game panel 409 by the twisted portion formed in the driving portion of the obstacle nail 410. The depth at which the obstacle nail 410 is implanted with respect to the game panel 409 (so-called driving dimension) is preferably about 10 mm.

  Further, on the front side of the game panel 409 (that is, the surface on which the game area 20 is formed), in addition to the many obstacle nails 410, a windmill (not shown) is disposed at an appropriate position. Further, the game panel 409 is appropriately formed with an opening 409e having a predetermined shape so that the front component member 680 including the guide rail 78, the frame-shaped center accessory 620, and the like are fixed by screws. Yes.

  By the way, when the gaming panel 409 is a transparent resin plate formed by extrusion, the material may be taken so that the vertical direction of the gaming panel 409 is inclined by about 45 degrees with respect to the extrusion direction. Thereby, the dot matrix of the effect display device 115 arranged behind the game panel 409 interferes with a plurality of fine molding marks formed by extrusion molding, and the occurrence of moire is suppressed as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 from being difficult to see due to moire.

  Subsequently, the panel holder 540 in the game effect unit 4 has a substantially square shape with a size including the game panel 409 in a front view, and is a member made of wooden plywood in the game effect unit of a conventional pachinko machine (for example, a game effect). It is made of a thermoplastic resin having a thickness (in this example, about 20 mm) substantially the same as the thickness of the unit base or the like. The panel holder 540 is detachably fitted with a game panel 409 and is fitted with a fitting step 540a that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side. The inside of the fitting step 540a is substantially the same size as the game area 20. Now, a through hole 540b penetrating in the front-rear direction is mainly provided.

  The fitting step portion 540a of the panel holder 540 has a depth from the front surface substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 409, and the front surface of the game panel 409 fitted to the fitting step portion 540a is the panel holder 540. It is designed to be substantially flush with the front surface of. In addition, the fitting step portion 540a has a front inner peripheral surface that has a predetermined amount of clearance C with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 409. The clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 409 expands and contracts relatively due to a change in temperature or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with an engaged portion that engages with the engagement step portion 409c at a position corresponding to the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409. More specifically, the engaged portion disposed in the fitting step portion 540a on the lower side of the panel holder 540 corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 409c in the game panel 409, and is in contact with the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. An engagement protrusion that extends a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 540 with a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409 to be inserted therebetween. 540c is formed. On the other hand, the engaged portion disposed in the fitting step portion 540a on the upper side of the panel holder 540 corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 409c in the game panel 409, and projects forward from the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. The engaging claw portion 540d is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 409c. The engagement claw portion 540d has such a size that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 540. By engaging the engagement step portion 409c of the game panel 409 with the engagement protrusion 540c and the engagement claw portion 540d, the panel holder 540 can hold the game panel 409 in a detachable manner. .

  Further, the panel holder 540 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 409a and the long hole 409b formed in the game panel 409 fitted and supported by the fitting step portion 540a, from the front surface of the fitting step portion 540a. A plurality of projecting pins 540e that extend forward and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 540e into the fitting holes 409a and the long holes 409b of the game panel 409, the panel holder 540 and the game panel 409 can be positioned relative to each other.

  The panel holder 540 is formed with a boss insertion hole 540f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning fixing boss 680c provided in the front component member 680 can be inserted. The panel holder 540 and the front component member 680 are positioned relative to each other by inserting the positioning fixing boss 680c of the front component member 680 into the boss insertion hole 540f.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a mounting support portion 540g having a recessed shape on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface side. The rear surface of the panel holder 540 is recessed by a mounting support portion 540g above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression (depth Is a depth that can accommodate a flange-shaped fixing portion of a predetermined member such as the back box 514 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 540g (in this example, about 2.5 mm, between 1 to 3 mm) It is desirable that By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 540g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 540, and the panel holder 540, that is, the game effect unit 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The main body frame 3 can be securely attached.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504 is accommodated while being recessed toward the front side below the position where the mounting support portion 540g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height. A possible accommodation recess 540h is formed. Further, a locking portion 540i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the housing recess 540h in the front-rear direction and that can lock the locking claw 504c formed on the panel back plate 504 is further formed. The housing recess 540h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 504 by engaging the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 with the locking portion 540i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 504 is a panel. The holder 540 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Further, the mounting support portion 540g formed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 has a plurality of first mounting holes 540j and a plurality of second mounting holes 540k reaching the edge of the panel holder 540, as shown in the figure. Are provided in a predetermined arrangement. A small-diameter first screw 515 disposed on the upper side of the housing recess 540h can be screwed into the plurality of first mounting holes 540j. A second screw (not shown) having a diameter larger than that of the first screw 515 can be screwed into the plurality of second mounting holes 540k on the upper side of the mounting support portion 540g. In this example, the diameters of the screw portions of the first screw 515 and the second screw are about 2.1 mm and about 3 mm, respectively, and the diameters of the first mounting hole 540j and the second mounting hole 540k are The first screw 515 and the second screw have a diameter that can be screwed together.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 540l disposed so as to correspond to the first mounting hole 540j and the second mounting hole 540k. The positioning hole 540l has a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion 514c formed on the fixing portion 514b of the back box 514) formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the first mounting hole 540j or the second mounting hole 540k. Is to be inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 540l is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the back.

  Further, the panel holder 540 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 540m that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 540 is reduced by the thinned portions 540m. It has become. On the other hand, these thinned portions 540m are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 540h, that is, the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 540 to a predetermined height. That is, within this range, since the front surface of the panel holder 540 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the guide rail 482 of the front component member 680 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface. Thereby, the game ball launched from the launching device 57 is smoothly guided in the guide rail 78. In addition, the panel holder 540 is formed with a thinned portion 540m so that the first mounting hole 540j, the second mounting hole 540k, and the like are formed in a boss shape. At the same time, in order to support the first mounting hole 540j, the second mounting hole 540k, etc., or to maintain the strength of the panel holder 540, grid-like ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 540 is formed with an existing obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 540n corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and the game panel 409 is attached to the obstacle nail planting device. It can be set while holding. Further, a communication hole 540o that communicates with the communication port 473 of the guide rail 482 in the front component member 680 and a communication hole 540p that communicates with the out port 471 of the front component member 680 are further provided in the lower portion of the panel holder 540. ing.

  Next, the panel back plate 504 of the game effect unit 4 is arranged on the rear side of the panel holder 540 so as to cover the lightening portion 540m within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height. At the same time, the housing recesses 540h of the panel holder 540 can be accommodated so that the rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. Further, a plurality of screw holes 504a arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the flat rear surface and capable of screwing the first screws 515, a plurality of positioning holes 504b arranged so as to correspond to the screw holes 504a, and the panel holder 540 A locking claw 504c that can be locked to the locking portion 540i and a concave portion 504d for reducing the weight so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b in the panel back plate 504 have substantially the same configuration as the first mounting holes 540j and the positioning holes 540l in the panel holder 540. Similarly to the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504 is also formed in a boss-like portion where the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 504b are formed by the recessed portions 504d. At the same time, in order to support the screw holes 504a, the positioning holes 504b, etc., and to maintain the strength of the panel back plate 504, grid-like ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 504 is provided with an opening 504e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the communication holes 540o and 540p and the boss insertion hole 540f of the panel holder 540.

  The panel back plate 504 is housed in the housing recess 540h of the panel holder 540, and the locking claw 504c of the panel back plate 504 is locked to the locking portion 540i of the panel holder 540, so that it is integrated with the panel holder 540. Assembled. In such a state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 504 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 540. Thus, by integrating the panel holder 540 and the panel back plate 504, the first mounting holes 540j are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 540 in a predetermined arrangement over the entire outer periphery of the through-hole 540b. The mounting holes including the second mounting holes 540k and the screw holes 504a and the positioning holes 540l and 504b are disposed. The presence of these mounting holes makes it possible to attach a predetermined member having a size substantially the same as that of the panel holder 540, and select and mount an appropriate mounting hole at an arbitrary position. Since it becomes possible, the freedom degree of design can be raised. In the present embodiment, the back box 514 and the substrate holder 505 are provided with a size substantially the same as the panel holder 540.

  The substrate holder 505 in the game effect unit 4 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel back plate 504 and has a box shape in which the front and upper sides are opened, and the game ball discharge port 505a, the bottom plate 505b, the escape portion 505c, and the substrate support. Part 505d. The game ball discharge port 505a is a game medium discharge port having a size through which a game ball can pass. The bottom plate 505b is a plate-like portion that is inclined so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the game ball outlet 505a. The escape portion 505c is a predetermined amount of a gap formed between the panel back plate 504 and the rear surface side. The board support portion 505d is disposed on the rear side where the escape portion 505c is formed, and supports the main control board box 25 having the main control board 710 and the like.

  The substrate holder 505 collects game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 and can discharge them downward from the game ball discharge port 505a. Further, the relief portion 505c has a depth (in this example, approximately about a flange-like fixing portion in a member (not shown) attached and fixed to the panel back plate 504, similarly to the mounting support portion 540g of the panel holder 540. 1 mm, preferably between 0.5 and 3 mm).

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with a cylindrical fixing boss 505e that fits with the positioning fixing boss 680c of the front component member 680 at a predetermined position on the front side thereof. Then, the fixed boss 505 e is fitted to the positioning fixed boss 680 c of the front component 680 with the panel holder 540 sandwiched between the fixed boss 505 e and the front component 680. At the same time, a predetermined screw is screwed into the positioning fixing boss 680c of the front component 680 through the through hole 505f penetrating the fixed boss 505e from the rear of the substrate holder 505, so that the front component 680, the panel holder 540, and the substrate holder 505 are screwed. Can be fixed together.

  Further, the substrate holder 505 is provided with an opening receiving portion 505g communicating with the communication port 473 of the front component member 680 at the lower part of the front surface thereof. The opening receiving portion 505g can guide the game ball to the lower side of the substrate holder 505 at a position different from the game ball discharge port 505a. The “dead ball” received inside the substrate holder 505 can be distinguished from the game ball that was missed when the game ball was driven into the game area 20.

  The assembly structure of each member constituting the game effect unit 4 has been described above. With this structure, the main members (the front component member 680, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, the board holder 505, etc.) constituting the game effect unit 4 can be easily and integrally assembled. In particular, a transparent resin game panel 409 is suitably held, and a center role 620, a back unit 510, an effect display device 115, and the like are arranged before and after the game panel 409, thereby providing an unprecedented depth game. The production unit 4 can be realized.

  In this example, the game panel 409, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the substrate holder 505 are formed of a thermoplastic resin except for a part of the front component member 680 so that these members can be recycled. It has become. As the resin, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, polypropylene, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, and the like can be used. In addition to the thermoplastic resin, a thermosetting resin is appropriately used according to the function and application. It may be used. In addition to the game panel 409, a transparent resin may be used for the front component 680, the panel holder 540, the panel back plate 504, and the like.

<About Center Title>
Next, the center accessory 620 disposed from the front side of the game panel 409 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, a frame-shaped center accessory 620 is arranged in the center of the game area 20. The center accessory 620 occupies a width of 4/5 or more in the width direction of the game area 20. The center accessory 620 has a substantially rectangular opening 621. The center accessory 620 includes a frame-shaped decorative body 622, and the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 621.

  And the effect display apparatus 115 is arrange | positioned behind the transparent plate 621a arrange | positioned so that the opening part 621 may be obstruct | occluded so that it can visually recognize through this opening part 621 by front view. That is, the inside of the center combination 620 (that is, the opening 621) is an image display area 20a in which the effect display device 115 is exposed in the game area 20. The center area 620 divides the game area 20 into the above-described image display area 20a and a ball flow-down area 20b where game balls mainly flow down. In principle, the game ball enters the image display area 20a only when the game ball passes through warp paths 550 and 650 described later.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of game balls enter the opening 621 and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the behind-the-scenes display device 115 due to the game balls. In particular, in the present embodiment, despite the fact that the larger display device 115 is used than before, the image display area 20a keeps various effects displayed on the effect display device 115 in a good state for easy viewing. The person can surely visually recognize various effects displayed on the effect display device 115.

  In the gaming panel 409, the center role 620 is arranged so as not to come into contact with the front component 680, and a game ball driven into the game area 20 passes through the right side or the left side of the center role 620. It flows down toward an out port 471 provided below the center accessory 620. In the present embodiment, the arcuate side wall extending from the upper side of the center accessory 620 (specifically, the frame-shaped decorative body 622) in the clockwise direction in the clockwise direction is between the inner peripheral wall of the front component member 680. They are close enough to form a gap through which only one game ball can pass. Therefore, most of the game balls that have been driven into the game area 20 flow down to the left side of the game area 20 in which a second starting port 602 and a passage gate 612, which will be described later, are disposed. On the other hand, among the game balls that are driven into the game area 20, a part of the game balls that are driven with a large elasticity by the launching device 57 can flow down the right side of the game area 20 one by one.

  A first start port 600 capable of receiving a game ball that is driven toward the game area 20 is disposed below the center accessory 620. A third start port 604 (a second start port will be described later) having a pair of movable pieces 606 is disposed below the first start port 600. When the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the closed state, the third start port 604 is unable to receive the game ball or difficult to receive, and when the pair of movable pieces 606 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept game balls than the one start port 600.

  An opening / closing device 500 is provided between the first start port 600 and the out port 471, specifically, below the third start port 604 and above the out port 471 (directly above in the present embodiment). Yes. The opening / closing device 500 includes a prize winning opening 500a and a prize winning opening / closing door 500b provided corresponding to the prize winning opening 500a. The special winning opening 500a is an opening through which a game ball can be received. The special prize opening / closing door 500b is a member for switching the special prize opening 500a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. It should be noted that when the special winning opening 500a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is not always possible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 20, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. good.

  On the left side of the first starting port 600, a passing gate 612 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Further, three general winning ports 614 are provided on the left and right sides of the third starting port 604 slightly below the passing gate 612.

  The most downstream side of the game ball flow direction is an out port through which game balls that have not won any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 are discharged behind the game panel 409. 471 is formed. That is, a game ball that has not won any of the start ports 600, 602, 604, the opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 provided on the upstream side of the out port 471 in the flow direction of the game ball It flows down toward the mouth 471.

  The opening / closing device 500 is disposed immediately above the out port 471. As a result, during the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500, game balls that have not won any of the starting ports 600, 602, 604, the opening / closing device 500 and the general winning port 614 gather near the opening / closing device 500. You can have a sense of expectation for winning a prize.

  An LED display area 80 composed of a plurality of LEDs is formed at the lower right of the center accessory 620. In this LED display area 80, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 900 to be described later, and a second special symbol display for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 910. 86, a first special symbol hold indicator 88 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (the number of lottery processes performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 in the hold state) and the second A second special symbol hold display 90 is provided for displaying the number of lotteries held by the special symbol lottery means 910 (the number of lottery processes performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 in the on-hold state). The LED display area 80 is provided with a normal symbol display 82 for displaying a lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the normal symbol lottery means 920. ing. These displays can recognize that a plurality of processes relating to the progress of the game sequentially executed by a main control board 710 described later are functioning based on control data stored in a RAM 713 described later. It can also be said to be a main control function diagnostic display.

  Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is composed of, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 910, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 920, the holding number of lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the holding number of lotteries by the second special symbol lottery means 910, and the holding number of lotteries by the normal symbol lottery means 920 Is notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” refers to the number of holds for the determination (lottery process) of whether or not the acquired random number for determination is correct, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired. This means, but is not limited to this, and it may be the number of determinations of the randomness for success / failure determination that suspends acquisition of the randomness for determination of success / failure and suspends the acquisition.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  The center accessory 620 has a shelf-like stage 660 near the lower frame of the frame-shaped decorative body 622. In addition, in order to guide the game ball flowing down the game area 20 to the first stage 660 near the center of the left frame of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 in the vertical direction (that is, to the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 622). A first warp inlet 652 that can be received in the first warp passage 650 that is a stage guide path is provided. The game ball received at the first warp inlet 652 is discharged from the first warp outlet 654 and guided to the first stage 660. That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area 20 enters the first warp inlet 652, the game ball is transferred to the first stage 660 provided inside the center accessory 620 via the first warp passage 650. It is comprised so that.

  The first warp inlet 652 is provided below the second start port 602 in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area 20. A warp guide piece 658 for guiding the game ball to the first warp inlet 652 is provided below the first warp inlet 652. The warp guide piece 658 protrudes leftward from the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, from the center accessory 620 to the game area 20), so that the game ball is easily guided to the first warp inlet 652. Therefore, even when the game ball is not guided to the second start port 602, the expectation that the game ball is received at the first warp inlet 652 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The first stage 660 has a curved surface formed in a wave shape from the first warp outlet side end 666 to the first warp counter-exit side end 668. Specifically, a crest portion 662 that bulges upward is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the stage 660, and a trough portion 664 continuously connected to the crest portion 662 is formed on the left and right sides of the crest portion 662. Is formed.

  In addition, the height of the peak portion 662 is lower than the first warp outlet side end portion 666 and the first warp opposite outlet side end portion 668. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the first warp outlet 654 can get over the mountain portion 662 and reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 666 and the first warp counter-exit side end 668. Can roll.

  As a result, the flow direction of the game ball in the first warp passage 650 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the first stage 660 are substantially collinear, so that the game ball flowing down the first warp passage 650 has kinetic energy. There is little loss. That is, kinetic energy is lost when a game ball that has flowed down the first warp passage 650 changes its traveling direction. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp passage 650 rolls on the first stage 660 vigorously. In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 660 from the right side of the center accessory 620. That is, since the game ball is guided to the first stage 660 only from the left side of the center role 620, the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 is inhibited from rolling by the game ball guided from the opposite direction. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the time for the game ball to roll on the first stage 660 vigorously and stay on the first stage 660 becomes longer, and as a result, the game ball plays in the first stage 660 and the interest is enhanced.

  In addition, a guide groove that is inclined downward toward the front side is formed in the peak portion 662 of the first stage 660 in order to guide the game ball to the first start port 600. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 loses the momentum of rolling near the mountain portion 662, the game ball is easily guided to the first start port 600 by the guide groove. On the other hand, a trough 664 of the first stage 660 is formed with a guide groove that is inclined downward toward the front side in order to guide the game ball to the side of the first start port 600. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 660 loses the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the valley 664, the game ball is relatively easily guided to the first start port 600 by the guide groove. . Therefore, even when the game ball is not guided to the second start port 602, the expectation that the game ball is received at the first start port 600 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

<About back unit>
Next, the back unit 510 disposed on the back side of the game panel 409 will be described. The back unit 510 has an opening formed substantially in the center, and is arranged so that the effect display device 115 faces the opening. The back unit 510 is attached to the back side of the game panel 409 so as to form an effect space 510G described later. The effect display device 115 is arranged so that the liquid crystal display surface is substantially parallel to the game panel 409, and thereby, the effect is displayed from the front side of the game effect unit 4 through the opening 621 of the center accessory 620. The liquid crystal display surface of the display device 115 becomes visible. The opening 621 of the center accessory 620 is provided with a transparent shielding plate that shields from the game area 20, and the rear of the shielding plate is also included in the above-described effect space 510G.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 to 49, in the back unit 510, a shelf-like second stage 560 on which a game ball can roll is formed near the bottom wall in the opening 514a of the back box 514. A second warp passage 550 is provided on the left side wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514. The second warp passage 550 is a stage guide path for guiding the game ball won in the second start port 602 to the second stage 560. . In addition, the game ball received in the second start port 602 is discharged from the second warp outlet 554 and guided to the second stage 560. That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area 20 enters the second start port 602, the game ball is provided inside the back box 514 (that is, the bottom wall of the opening 514a) via the second warp passage 550. The second stage 560 is conveyed.

  By the way, the above-described shielding plate provided in the opening 621 of the center accessory 620 prevents the game ball rolling on the second stage 560 from returning to the game area 20 again. In other words, the so-called discharge ball received in the second start port 602 is used to produce an effect. Thus, the effect space 510G is formed not only around the effect display device 115 but also in the front surface of the effect display device 115.

  The game ball received in the second start port 602 flows down in the second warp passage 550 provided on the front side of the back unit 510 (that is, behind the game panel 409). 550 is configured as a transparent member. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the gap between the game panel 409 and the back unit 510 through the transparent game panel 409. Therefore, the player can observe the state that the game ball received in the second start port 602 is conveyed to the second stage 560, and the interest is enhanced.

  The second stage 560 is provided with a rotation distributing tool 580 that has a rod-like body whose diameter is reduced toward both left and right ends, with the left-right direction of the game effect unit 4 being the longitudinal axis direction. Then, the second stage 560 has a substantially intermediate height in the left-right direction on the front side of the rotational distribution member 580 lower than the second warp outlet side end portion 566 and the second warp counter-exit side end portion 568. Inclined so that Therefore, the game ball guided to the second stage 560 is the second warp outlet side end portion 666 and the second warp counter-exit side on the front side (front stage 560a) of the rotation distribution combination 580 in the second stage 560. It can roll back and forth between the end portions 668.

  The rotary distribution combination 580 provided on the second stage 560 rotates in one direction from the near side to the far side with the horizontal direction of the game effect unit 4 as the axis line center. A magnetic body (not shown) is provided in the magnetized portion 580a, which is a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the rotational distribution member 580, and the game ball is attached to the magnetized portion 580a by the magnetic force of the magnetic body. It is possible to contact. That is, when the game ball rolling on the front stage 560a of the second stage 560 loses the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the magnetized portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580, it is attached to the magnetized portion 580a by the magnetic force. Will be.

  In addition, on the rear side (rear stage 560b) of the rotary distribution role 580 in the second stage 560, a special receiving port 562 that can receive a game ball is provided at the approximate center in the left-right direction. Adjacent to each other. In addition, on the left and right sides of the special receiving port 562, a normal receiving port 564 is formed adjacent to the rotary distribution combination 580, respectively. Then, the game ball attached to the magnetically attached portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580 is transported to the back side of the second stage 560 as the rotary distribution role 580 rotates, and the special receiving port 562 and the normal receiving port 562 It is received by being distributed to any of the receiving ports 564.

  As described above, by using the game ball won at the second start port 602 to perform the sorting operation by the rotary sorting tool 580 in the second stage 560, the game ball won at the second start port 602 or more. It is possible to give the player a sense of joy and superiority. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is received at the special receiving port 562, a certain point is given to the player, and when the accumulated point becomes equal to or greater than a specific value, a predetermined privilege is given to the player. (For example, a special effect that is not normally displayed is displayed). Therefore, when a game ball wins at the second starting port 602, the player will be watching whether or not the game ball is received by the special reception port 562, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. .

  Note that the rear stage 560b of the second stage 560 is inclined so that the height of the substantially intermediate position in the left-right direction is higher than the second warp outlet side end 666 and the second warp counter-exit side end 668. ing. Therefore, if the game ball attached to the magnetically attached portion 580a of the rotary distribution role 580 is not received by either the special receiving port 562 or the normal receiving port 564, the game ball moves on the rear stage 560b. After rolling toward the second warp outlet side end 666 or the second warp counter-exit side end 668, it is again guided to the front stage 560a. Therefore, the game ball supplied to the second stage 560 is surely received in either the special receiving port 562 or the normal receiving port 564.

  On the other hand, a disk-like accessory 590 that is a decorative body imitating an unidentified flying object (so-called UFO) is provided in the vicinity of the upper wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514. An electrical decoration member is provided. More specifically, three hemispherical lower electrical decoration bodies 592 projecting downward are provided on the bottom surface side of the main body 591, and two upper parts simulating a circular window are provided on the front side of the main body 591. An electrical decoration body 594 is provided, and a line-shaped middle electrical decoration body 596 extending left and right is provided between the lower electrical decoration body 592 and the upper electrical decoration body 594.

  Inside the main body portion 591 of the disk-shaped accessory 590, there is an LED substrate (not shown) having LEDs as light emitting sources corresponding to each of the electric decorations 592, 594, 596 in the back. The driving of these electric decorations 592, 594, 596 is also controlled by a lamp driving board 850 (see FIG. 59) housed in a lamp driving board box 508 provided in the back unit 510.

  Note that the opening 514a of the back box 514 is formed so as to partially protrude upward, and a disk-shaped accessory 590 is fitted into the protruding portion. Therefore, when the game effect unit 4 is viewed from the front, only the lower electric decoration 592 of the disk-like accessory 590 overlaps the displayable area of the effect display device 115. As described above, even if the disk-like accessory 590 having a relatively large volume is provided in the back unit 510, the range in which the disk-like accessory 590 overlaps the displayable area of the effect display device 115 is narrow. It is prevented that the effect display device 115 becomes difficult to visually recognize by the object 590.

  By the way, the back unit 510 is provided with a second stage 560 for performing an effect of distributing the game balls, a rotary sorting tool 580, a large disk-shaped tool 590 for decorating the game panel 409, and the like. Further, since the effect display device 115 larger than usual is attached to the back unit 510, the rear projecting portion of the game effect unit 4 is necessarily increased. However, in the present embodiment, the rear projecting portion of the game effect unit 4 can be easily accommodated by the structure for mounting the game effect unit 4 by the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3 described above. Therefore, the game effect unit 4 can adopt various parts and shapes not only on the front side of the game panel 409 but also on the back side, and the game effect unit 4 can have a more diverse and deep structure. it can.

<About the electrical decoration member of the game production unit and its light emission mode>
A plurality of electric decoration parts and light emitters are arranged behind the game panel 409, and the driving of these electric parts and the like is accommodated in a lamp driving board box 508 provided in the back unit 510. It is controlled by 850 (see FIG. 59). Hereinafter, the main ones of these electric parts will be described in detail. In addition, an electrical decoration member provided on a main body portion 591 of a disk-shaped accessory 590 described later, a lower electrical decoration body 592 (described later) provided on a bottom surface side of the main body portion 591, a blade-type decorative body 632 described later, and the related The LEDs provided on the LED substrate 535 that causes the feather-shaped decorative body 632 to emit light from the rear are collectively referred to as a center decorative lamp 853. Also, a wing-shaped decorative body 530, which will be described later, an LED (not shown) that causes the wing-shaped decorative body 530 to emit light from the rear, a light-shaped decorative body 520, which will be described later, and a light-emitting decorative body disposed in the effect space are rearward. The LED (not shown) that emits light from is called a panel decoration lamp 852.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the center accessory 620 is formed with a plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 having a substantially blade shape when viewed from the front. The plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 are slightly curved from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409 in front view from the upper side to the lower right side in the clockwise direction in the frame-shaped decorative body 622 of the center accessory 620. However, it is formed at substantially equal intervals so as to extend (that is, radially). Each feather-shaped decorative body 630 has a blade-shaped shape that gradually becomes wider in front view as it extends in the extending direction (the direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409).

  In addition, a blade-type decorative body 632 protruding from the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is formed on the left side of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 of the center accessory 620. This feather-shaped decorative body 632 is formed to extend while slightly curving from the left edge of the effect display device 115 to a position where it is joined to the inner rail unit 462 in front view. It should be noted that the blade-type decorative body 632 is also a blade-type decorative body that gradually becomes wider in the front view as it extends in the extending direction (the direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409), like the blade-type decorative body 630 described above. It has a shape.

  However, the plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 are formed in the inner region of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, the image display area 20a) where the game balls do not flow down, whereas the blade-shaped decorative bodies 632 It protrudes from the outer region of the frame-shaped decorative body 622 (that is, the ball flow-down region 20b). For this reason, the wing-shaped decorative body 632 provided in the ball flow down region 20b allows a game ball to pass behind it, so that a space slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between it and the game panel 409. In addition, the frame-shaped decorative body 622 is installed to the inner rail unit 462. Further, unlike the plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 630, the blade-shaped decorative body 632 is formed with a slit-shaped window portion 632a so that a game ball flowing down behind can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, the back unit 510 is also formed with a plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 530 that are substantially blade-shaped when viewed from the front. The plurality of feather-shaped decorative bodies 530 extend while curving slightly from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409 in a front view from the lower left to the upper clockwise in the opening 514a of the back box 514. (Ie, radially), they are formed at substantially equal intervals. Each feather-shaped decorative body 530 becomes wider in front view as it extends in the extending direction (direction toward the outer periphery of the game panel 409), like the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 of the center accessory 620. It has a blade shape like this.

  On the front side of the back unit 510, an LED substrate 535 (see FIG. 47) having a plurality of LEDs as a light emission source is provided at a position corresponding to the above-described blade-type decorative bodies 630 and 632 in front view. Yes. In other words, the LED boards 535 are respectively provided behind the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 of the center accessory 620 via the game panel 409. Each blade-type decorative body 630, 632 emits white light at the outer edge portion of each blade-type decorative body 630, 632 when viewed from the front by driving the LED substrate 535 provided behind each blade-type decorative body 630, 632.

  Similarly, in the back unit 510, an LED substrate 535 is also provided behind the plurality of blade-type decorative bodies 530. Each blade-type decorative body 530 emits white light at the outer edge portion of each blade-type decorative body 530 when viewed from the front by driving the LED substrate 535 provided behind each blade-type decorative body 530.

  Here, the feather-shaped decorative body 530 is provided in the back unit 510, while the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 are provided in the center accessory 620. However, when the game effect unit 4 is viewed from the front, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 function as a series of decorative members that extend radially from the outer edge of the effect display device 115 toward the outline of the game panel 409. When the wing-shaped decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 emit light by driving the corresponding LED substrates 535, an effect is provided in which light extends radially from the effect display device 115 in the outer direction of the game panel 409. Thereby, the impression as if the effect display device 115 emitted light toward the outline of the game panel 409 beyond the displayable region (that is, the impression that the light emission display extends outward from the effect display device 115). And the illusion that the displayable area of the effect display device 115 temporarily increases.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after securing the depth width (FIG. 13: depth width L2) as the gaming effect unit installation recess (large accommodation space) 30 as described above, As shown in FIG. 55, the display device 115 has a display surface behind the rear surface of the outer frame 2 and a rear wall portion (third rear wall portion) of the second main body frame side wall (axis side). ) Is placed in front of. And on this, the wing-shaped decorative body 530 as a rear inclined decorative body, which is disposed rearward of the game panel 409 and inclined toward the direction in which the display surface of the effect display device 115 is provided, In addition, blade-type decorative bodies 630 and 632 are provided as front-side inclined decorative bodies that are arranged in front of the game panel 409 and are inclined toward the direction in which the display surface of the effect image device 115 is provided. . As will be described later, when a predetermined light emission effect is performed on the display surface of the effect display device 115, the CPU 811 (see FIG. 59) of the peripheral control board 810 is provided on the side where the display surface of the effect display device 115 is provided. From the above, the control for causing the blade-type decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 to emit light is performed through the outer peripheral side substrate (lamp driving substrate and LED substrate) and the like. As a result, the light emission effect that appears on the display surface of the effect display device 115 jumps out to the player side through light emission over almost the entire game area 20 by the rear inclined decorative body and the front inclined decorative body. It becomes possible to realize a three-dimensional effect like Taka.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 811 (see FIG. 59) of the peripheral control board 810, when a predetermined light emission effect is performed on the display surface of the effect display device 115, the blade as the rear inclined decorative body. The mold decorative body 530 itself and the blade-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 as the front inclined decorative bodies themselves emit light from the side close to the display surface of the effect display device 115. Therefore, it is possible to more surely realize a three-dimensional effect as if the light emission effect that appeared on the display surface of the effect display device 115 jumped out to the player side. In addition, as above-mentioned, these wing | blade type | mold decoration bodies 530,630,632 are actually light-emitted by light emission from LED on the LED board provided in those back.

  Further, the back unit 510 is formed with a plurality of third light-like decorative bodies 520 in front view. These light-like decorative bodies 520 are configured as a set of one blue lens body and two red lens bodies adjacent to the blue lens body. In the light decorative body 520, the blue lens body and the red lens body are circular, and the red lens body is a lens body having a smaller diameter than the blue lens body.

  The plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 are arranged at substantially equal intervals on the front side of the back unit 510 so as to surround the entire circumference of the opening 514a of the back unit 510. Further, behind each light-like decorative body 520, an LED substrate (not shown) including LEDs corresponding to each of the three lens bodies (one blue lens body and two red lens bodies) is provided. . By driving the LED substrate (not shown), each light-like decorative body 520 emits light through the red lens body or the blue lens body.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the back unit 510 provided on the rear side (behind the game panel 409) in the game effect unit 4 includes various electric decoration members (particularly, a plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520), The electric decoration member projects light to the front side of the game effect unit 4. Furthermore, many of the main components that make up the game effect unit 4 are light transmissive members, such as the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a made of transparent resin. Therefore, an electric lighting member such as a plurality of light decorative bodies 520 gives an impression that the entire game effect unit 4 is lit up in a front view, and the depth of the game effect unit 4 is strongly emphasized. The

  More specifically, when only the blue lens body is caused to emit light among the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520, the back unit is connected via the game panel 409, the transparent plate 621 a, etc. by the blue light emission of each light-like decorative body 520. In addition to 510, the center accessory 620, the front component 680, and the like are illuminated in blue. On the other hand, when only the red lens body is caused to emit light among the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520, not only the back unit 510 but also the game panel 409, the transparent plate 621a, etc. due to the red light emission of each light-like decorative body 520. The center accessory 620, the front constituent member 680, and the like are also illuminated in red. That is, using the fact that the depth of the game effect unit 4 is deep, each light-like decorative body 520 irradiates light from the back side of the game effect unit 4 to the front, so that the entire game effect unit 4 is illuminated. So that it can be decorated. This not only gives a strong visual impact to the player, but also gives the impression that the depth of the game production unit 4 can be seen deeper than it actually is. be able to.

  Further, as described above, the feather-shaped decorative body 632 is disposed outside the effect display device 115 and in a region facing the game region 20. When this wing-shaped decorative body 632 is irradiated from behind, it appears to the player as if it emits light on the surface of the wing-shaped decorative body 632 (that is, the surface of the wing-shaped decorative body 632 becomes a light emitting surface. ). Thereby, it seems to the player that the game ball flows down behind the electric decoration member arranged in front of the game panel 409 (in reality, it is behind the feather-shaped decorative body 632 and the feather-shaped decorative body. 632 flows down in front of the LED substrate 35 that emits light. In addition, light is emitted from a light emitting decorative body such as the light decorative body 520 from the rear side to the front side of the game panel 409. Accordingly, the game balls flowing down the game area 20 flow down between the light emitting decorative body that emits light from the rear side of the game panel 409 and the feather-shaped decorative body 632 that is arranged on the front side of the game area 20 and emits light. It becomes. Thereby, the rear effect area (effect space 510G) behind the transparent game panel 409 in which the game area 20 is formed, and the front effect area (feather-shaped decorative body 632) ahead of the game panel 409 are arranged. The game area 20 is formed between the game area 20 and the area in front of the game area 20, and an effect full of stereoscopic effect can be performed. In particular, the light-emitting decorative body in the effect space 510G is arranged so as to be shifted from the blade-shaped decorative body 632 and the one facing the blade-shaped decorative body 632 in the front view (not the light-shaped decorative body 520 in this embodiment). Since the objects (light-like decorative bodies 520) are alternately arranged, the stereoscopic effect in the front view is amplified.

  In addition, the effect space 510G is formed not only on the outside of the effect display device 115 but also on the front side of the effect display device 115. That is, as described above, the area on the front side of the effect display device 115 where the effect is performed using a so-called discharge ball received in the second start port 602 corresponds to this. Thereby, in almost the whole area of the gaming area 20, the rear effect area formed behind the transparent gaming panel 409, the gaming area 20 along the gaming panel 409, and the gaming panel 409 (that is, the gaming area 20). A front effect area formed forward is formed. Thereby, the novel pachinko machine 1 which has never existed can be provided, and the fall of interest can be suppressed. Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the game area 20 enlarged in the left and right direction and the height direction, so that it is possible to produce an effect full of three-dimensionality and realism. It can attract interest and can suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, when the blue lens body and the red lens body are caused to emit light simultaneously in each light-like decorative body 520, the light-like decorative body 520 emits pink light from a player spaced a predetermined distance from the game panel 409. To be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to cause not only the back unit 510 but also the center accessory 620 and the front constituent member 680 to illuminate in pink by the light emission of each light-like decorative body 520 through the game panel 409.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the decorative design displayed on the effect display device 115 is represented by one of red, blue, and pink. That is, the three colors of red, blue, and pink can be said to be image colors that symbolize the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The red, blue, and pink light emission control by the light decorative body 520 has an effect of impressing the player with the image color of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in a conventional pachinko machine, a game window (glass unit) formed on the door frame is usually formed in a substantially circular shape in accordance with the game area of the game effect unit. However, in the present embodiment, the gaming window 101 (glass unit 190) formed in the door frame 5 is vertically long and has a size that greatly exceeds the gaming area 20 in front view and encompasses substantially the entire gaming panel 409. It is formed in a substantially octagonal shape. That is, the area of the game window 101 (glass unit 190) is extremely large compared to the conventional one. Thereby, the player can experience the depth of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment more strongly, and light emitted from various electrical decoration members from the back side of the game effect unit 4 is the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make it easy to express to the side (that is, the player can easily grasp the light emission mode).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the depth in which the game effect unit 4 is arranged is deep, it is difficult for light to enter the game area 20 from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in a state where the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members are not driven, the game area 20 is darker than the conventional pachinko machine. And the effect display apparatus 115 and various electrical decoration members are located in the back | inner side of the game effect unit 4 which is hard to be illuminated by the light from the outside.

  From this, the situation display device 115 and various electrical decoration members are prevented from being prevented from visually recognizing the display mode and the light emission mode by the light entering from the outside of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the effect display device 115 and various illumination members are displayed or light-emitted on the back side of the game effect unit 4 that is kept in a relatively dark state. It is easy to visually recognize the light emission mode of the decoration member.

  Further, by using a structure that blocks the entrance of light from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and intentionally darkening the effect display device 115 and various electric decoration members, the gaming area 20 is darker than the conventional gaming machine. State. Then, using the intentionally darkened game area 20, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the game area 20 is a space or a concert venue. For example, in this game area 20, it is possible to produce a UFO that floats in outer space in a pseudo manner by illuminating or emitting light from the disk-shaped accessory 590. In the game area 20, more various effects can be realized by using the image display on the effect display device 115 and the light emission modes of various electric decoration members.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can effectively perform light decoration on the entire periphery of the door frame 5 except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. In the conventional pachinko machine 1, the light-decorated range is mainly limited to the game area 20, while the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is light-decorated including the game area 20 and the door frame 5 when viewed from the front. The range is extremely large. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a two-dimensional spread of light decoration that could not be achieved with a conventional gaming machine.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an unprecedented depth feeling due to the light decoration is realized by performing the light decoration with the electric decoration member from the back side of the game effect unit 4. In other words, combined with the flatness and depth of light decoration, players will feel as if they are wrapped in light decoration, and they will be able to concentrate on the game while experiencing an unprecedented interest. it can.

  Further, by performing light decoration with an electric decoration member from the back side of the game effect unit 4, the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are illuminated by the light. Thereby, an impression can be given to the player as if the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is floating. Furthermore, since the light that illuminates the game ball is diffusely reflected on the surface of the game ball, the color of the game ball can have a complex variety, and the game ball is a meteor flowing through outer space for the player. An image like that can be given.

  Furthermore, the electrical decoration member provided in the game effect unit 4 has the following effects, particularly in relation to the effect display device 115. In other words, in the present embodiment, the back unit 510 has a plurality of light emitting decorative bodies (specifically, a light decorative body 520). The light decorative body 520 is in an after-mentioned effect space 510G for accommodating the effect device behind the game panel 409, and is formed on the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 (that is, formed on the back unit 510) in front view. The outer edge of the opening). Thereby, the light emission mode of the light decorative body 520 can be grasped through the transparent game panel 409. In addition, the light decorative body 520 is disposed on the back side of the gaming panel 409 in which the gaming area 20 is formed (it is not necessary to be disposed in the gaming area 20), and thus obstructs the flow space of the gaming ball. There is nothing to do. As a result, a plurality of or relatively large light-like decorative bodies 520 can be employed, and a large effect display device 115 can be employed as long as it is not wasted. In addition, it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

  By the way, if the effect display device 115 is made larger than necessary, not only a wasteful display area is increased, but also the cost is increased. In other words, since the human eye cannot gaze at all the large area screen, even if the production display device 115 is enlarged more than necessary, it is the specific area of the large area screen that is being watched during the game. This is the only area. Therefore, even if an effect or the like is performed in an area where the player can watch, the player hardly notices it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a “light-emitting decorative body” that has a higher luminance than the liquid crystal display, such as a lamp or LED (here, a light-shaped decorative body 520) is used. Thereby, the player recognizes the display image of the effect display device 115 by arranging the light-like decorative body 520 on the outer periphery of the effect display device 115 in front view (that is, an area where the player cannot gaze or is difficult). On the other hand, it is also possible to grasp the light emission mode such as turning on, blinking, and / or turning off the light-like decorative body 520.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light emission mode of the electrical decoration member provided in the game effect unit 4 is appropriately controlled according to the game state in the pachinko machine 1. For example, in a gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated (external advantageous gaming state described later), the light emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520) is in an advantageous mode, and a flashing light emitting effect is performed. Thereby, the player can confirm that the flashy performance is performed without gazing at the light-like decorative body 520. In addition, this flashy production is performed in a wide-area production area (production space 510G described later) using substantially the entire area on the back side of the game panel 409. Can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since this light emission effect is performed around the effect display device 115 (that is, a portion where it is difficult for the player to gaze), a flashy light emission effect can be performed without adversely affecting the player's eyes. The “flashy light emission effect” is an effect that enhances the player's mood, such as an effect of performing illumination with a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies.

  Further, in a gaming state in which the opening extension function is not activated (external normal gaming state described later), the light emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520) is controlled to the normal mode. This normal mode is a modest mode than the advantageous mode, and corresponds to, for example, light extinction or dark lighting. Thereby, the player can grasp that the gaming state is not advantageous to the player. By the way, the “external normal gaming state” according to the present embodiment includes “external normal gaming state A” in which the probability changing function does not operate and “external normal gaming state B” in which the probability changing function operates. Therefore, in the “external normal game state B”, the image effect on the effect display device 115 is substantially the same as that in the “external normal game state A”, while the light effect on the light-like decorative body 520 is flashy. It may be made to become. As a result, the “external normal gaming state A” and the “external normal gaming state B” as a whole are very similar in the production mode, but the atmosphere and aura of each gaming state can be made different.

  In a gaming state that is executed only for a predetermined period (a goal achievement mode, which will be described later), while the effect image indicating the goal achievement mode is displayed on the effect display device 115, the light-emitting decorative body (light-like decorative object 520) is at least. It becomes a flashy mode than the normal mode. Thereby, the player can be made to think that it is an advantageous state not only by the display by the effect display device 115 but also by the effect over substantially the entire game area 20. And it is preferable to control so that the light-like decorative body 520 will be in a normal mode after completion of the objective achievement mode. This allows the player to recognize that the state advantageous to him has ended, so that the joy will be even greater if the big win is won early in the goal achievement mode.

  By the way, it is possible to produce a deep effect depending on whether the light emitting decoration (light-like decoration 520) arranged in the three-dimensional space (that is, the effect space 510G) is turned on or off. For example, as described above, the duty ratio of the pulse wave transmitted to the light emitting decoration body is controlled when being controlled to the “external normal gaming state A” and when being controlled to the “external normal gaming state B”. By changing, the atmosphere emitted from the entire game area 20 changes. In addition, since the effect space 510G is formed in substantially the entire back surface of the game area 20, a so-called aura can be generated from the entire pachinko machine 1 by controlling the light emission mode of the light decorative body 520 arranged in the effect space 510G. It is possible to create an atmosphere that is generated.

  Further, in the case of being controlled to the “external normal gaming state A” and the case of being controlled to the “external normal gaming state B”, the aspect of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 is the same or mutually different. While it is set as the effect image which resembles, only the light emission mode of the light emission mode of the light-like decorative body 520 may be different. Thereby, although the player cannot clearly grasp whether it is controlled to “external normal gaming state A” or “external normal gaming state B”, by the aura emitted from the entire pachinko machine 1, It is possible to give a sense that the player is controlled to the “external normal game state B”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the rear of the game area 20, the effect is produced in the effect space 510G as a wide three-dimensional space extending in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, and the depth direction of the game area 20. It is the composition which can perform.

  The effect display device 115 is arranged in the center of the wide effect space 510G, and a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies (light-like decorative bodies 520) are arranged around the effect display device 115. By arranging the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 uniformly in the left and right direction and the up and down direction of the game area 20, it is possible to produce effects in substantially the entire area of the game area 20. In addition, what is arrange | positioned in production space 510G is not restricted only to the light-like decorative body 520, You may arrange | position several types of lamp | ramp, LED, etc. FIG.

  By the way, conventionally, since it is necessary to secure a space such as a flow path through which the game ball flows down and obstacle nails, it has been difficult to arrange the light emitting decorative body over the entire game area 20. In addition, since the effect display device 115 has been enlarged in recent years, the space for arranging the light emitting decorative body has been eroded. For this reason, the production using the production display device 115 is flowing more than the production using the luminescent decorative body.

  However, the area that can be watched by human eyes (hereinafter referred to as “gaze area”) is a limited range, and even if the effect display device 115 is enlarged, only the useless area that cannot be watched is increased. Further, increasing such a useless area leads to high cost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 115 is arranged in the gaze area, and the light emitting decoration is arranged in the area outside the gaze area. Therefore, it is preferable that the light emitting decorative body arranged outside the gaze area is a lamp or LED having higher luminance than the liquid crystal display.

  In addition, the effect display device 115 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 20 as the gaze area, and a light emitting decorative body is arranged along the periphery of the effect display device 115, so that direct information is provided to the player. It is possible to send information and send information indirectly.

  This will be described in detail. Since the effect display device 115 is arranged in the gaze area, the display state of the effect display device 115 can directly inform the player of information such as the current game state. . For example, if it is an aspect in which information related to the gaming state is displayed by displaying characters etc. on the liquid crystal, unless it is a rare case such as looking away, if you are watching the effect display device 115 and playing a game, It can be confirmed whether or not the character is displayed on the effect display device 115. In this sense, the display by the effect display device 115 is direct information transmission.

  On the other hand, when the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body arranged outside the gaze area is changed, the player may not notice the change unless the change is very large. The plurality of light emitting decorations (light decorations 520) arranged outside the gaze area (specifically, the outer peripheral side of the effect display device 115) are uniformly distributed throughout the gaming area 20. Although each light-like decorative body 520 is easy to visually recognize, it is difficult to visually recognize all the light-like decorative bodies 520 at a time. In other words, it is easy for the player to grasp the light emission mode of each light decorative body 520 individually, but the light emission modes of all the light decorative bodies 520 dispersed in a wide area are grasped at a time. It is difficult. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly transmit information to the player by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting decorations that are uniformly arranged in the entire game area 20.

  In addition, as an example of changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting decorative body, in addition to changing only the light emitting mode of some light emitting decorative bodies, the duty ratio of the pulse wave transmitted to the light emitting decorative body is changed to It is conceivable to give a slight change to the light emission mode. Conventionally, since a small number of light-emitting decorative bodies have been arranged in the game area 20, when information is transmitted to a player using the light-emitting decorative bodies, it is necessary to clearly change them. For example, it is turned off in the normal gaming state and blinked in the advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since information can be transmitted using substantially the entire game area 20, a fuzzy change is given to the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body (that is, by giving a slight change), It becomes possible to send information indirectly to the player.

  With the above configuration, for example, when being controlled to the “external normal game state B”, the display form of the effect display device 115 is made to be very similar to that of the “external normal game state A”, while the light decorative body 520 is used. If a fuzzy change is given to the light emission mode, the player will feel a unique sense of incongruity although the probability change state cannot be clearly grasped. In other words, the player feels that the pachinko machine 1 has a unique atmosphere and aura. This makes it possible for the player to have a sensory expectation of “may be probable” although it is not explicit.

  In this embodiment, the outer peripheral board of the sub-control device has the light emitting mode (light emission color, light emission frequency, light emission intensity, etc.) of the light emitting decorative body changed to the external normal gaming state (external normal gaming state). A light emission driving means (such as an LED driving circuit) is provided to make the difference between A or B) and the above-described external advantageous gaming state. As a result, even if the merit due to the transition to the external advantageous gaming state is small (the operation frequency of the pair of movable pieces 606 is low), the current display without viewing the display surface of the effect display device 115 The game state can be easily recognized. This makes it possible to feel the merit in the external advantageous gaming state with a higher probability in combination with the display mode of image symbols and game specifications appearing on the effect display device 115 described later. In this embodiment, the disk-like accessory 590 provided in the vicinity of the upper wall of the opening 514a of the back box 514 is lit in yellow when in the external normal game state, while the external advantageous normal game. When it is in a state, it is lit in red.

[Relationship between outer frame, main frame and game effect unit]
Next, the positional relationship when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a plan sectional view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 56 is a plan sectional view of the pachinko machine, in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame.

  Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of wood having a thickness of 19 mm. On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are thin-walled members constituted by an aluminum alloy extruded plate. In the present embodiment, the side frame plates 12 and 13 have a thickness of 3 mm. Further, as described above, ribs are formed on the inner side of the rear portion of the side frame plates 12 and 13 so that the thickness h2 of the rear portion (see FIG. 10C) is increased. That is, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of vertically long outer wall portions 12a and 13a (a portion having a thickness of 3 mm), and thickness portions 12b and 13b in which ribs directed toward the inner side of the rear portions of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed. (The outer wall portion 13a and the thickness portion 13b of the open side frame 13 are shown in FIG. 7). The thickness sections 12b and 13b are formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section so as to have a space section 12G opened behind the side frame plates 12 and 13.

  The outer wall portions 12a and 13a are substantially flat plate members, and the thickness portions 12b and 13b are erected inwardly from the rear end portions of the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Thereby, the thickness of the left-right direction in the front-end part of the side frame boards 12 and 13 becomes the thickness of the outer wall parts 12a and 13a, and there is no structure which increases this thickness elsewhere. Further, outer frame spaces 12A and 13A having a rib width are formed inside the outer wall portions 12a and 13a. Accordingly, a part of the main body frame 3 (more specifically, the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291) can be accommodated in the outer frame inner space 12A, and the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291 are accommodated. The outer frame 2 can be made closer. As a result, the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral surface walls 290-293 on the pivot support side and the peripheral surface walls 290-293 on the open side can be widened to the limit, and the left-right width of the game area 20 can be increased. Moreover, the effect becomes remarkable by making the side frame plates 12 and 13 thin. In this way, while the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made thin by reducing the thickness, not only can the strength equal to or higher than that of the conventional wood be maintained, but also the game area 20 can be enlarged. Can also be achieved. The “outer frame spaces 12A, 13A” correspond to the “vertical frame spaces” of the present invention.

  Furthermore, the door frame sliding rod 971 and the body frame sliding rod 984 of the locking device 60 are also provided in the outer frame inner space 13A on the open side in a state where the main frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2. Be contained. Thereby, the lateral width of the gaming panel 409 (the lateral width when viewed from the player) is substantially equal to the thickness of the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 from the lateral width of the entire pachinko machine 1 (more specifically, the thickness of the outer wall portion). ) Is subtracted. As a result, a sufficient width of the game area 20 can be secured. When the main body frame 3 is confined to the outer frame 2, the second peripheral wall 291 of the main body frame 3 is close to the open side thick portion 13 b of the side frame plate 13. It is difficult to insert a finger or the like from between b and the second peripheral wall 291). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress injustice such as operating the door frame sliding rod 971 or the body frame sliding rod 984 from behind the outer frame 2.

  The main body frame 3 is formed with peripheral wall 290 to 293 along the inner peripheral surface of the outer frame 2. That is, the main body frame 3 is configured such that the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is provided along the surface of the inner peripheral wall of the outer frame 2 while maintaining the width of the left and right when viewed from the front. Specifically, the inner side wall surface of the pivot side frame 12 and the outer side surface of the first peripheral wall 290 on the pivot side are closely adjacent to each other and formed on the side frame plate 12 on the pivot side. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. Further, the open side frame plate 13 and the open side first peripheral wall 290 are formed on the open side frame plate 13 with the thin side locking device 60 (details will be described later) sandwiched therebetween. A first peripheral wall 290 is extended to the ribs. In this way, the first peripheral wall 290 is closest to the outer frame 2 on both the pivot support side and the open side. Thereby, the width in the left-right direction of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the shaft support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side can be maximized. Note that almost no openings are formed in the peripheral walls 290 to 293.

  Further, on the pivot support side, the main body frame 3 is bent at a substantially right angle about 18 mm inside just before the rib formed on the open side frame plate 13, and the second peripheral wall 291 avoids this rib. Is extended substantially in parallel with the first peripheral wall 290 toward the rear.

  The third peripheral wall 292 is substantially parallel to the second peripheral wall 291 from the rear end of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear. Is extended. The third peripheral wall 292 is slightly (about 1 mm) inside the second peripheral wall 291. In other words, on the shaft support side, a fine step having a wall thickness is formed between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292.

  Furthermore, from the rear end portion (boundary portion between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear, the fourth peripheral wall 293 is substantially parallel to the third peripheral wall 292. Is extended. The fourth peripheral wall 293 is slightly (about 1 mm) inside the third peripheral wall 292. That is, on the shaft support side, a fine step of about the thickness is formed between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293.

  In addition, since the thickness of the level | step difference between the 2nd surrounding wall 291 and the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and between the 3rd surrounding wall 292 and the 4th surrounding wall 293 is a thin thickness and is small, the main body frame 3 is 2nd. From the front end portion of the peripheral wall 291 to the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293, it extends substantially linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the game panel 409. Moreover, although the second peripheral wall 291 to the fourth peripheral wall 293 are substantially straight, the strength of the main body frame 3 is increased by forming a fine step of about the thickness.

  On the other hand, on the open side, the main body frame 3 is connected to the first peripheral wall 290 from the rear end of the first peripheral wall 290 (the boundary between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291) toward the rear. A second peripheral wall 291 extends substantially in parallel. The second peripheral wall 291 is slightly inside (about 5 mm) from the first peripheral wall 290. In other words, on the open side, a fine step with a thickness of approximately 1 is formed between the first peripheral wall 290 and the second peripheral wall 291.

  Further, a third peripheral wall 292 extends from the rear end portion of the second peripheral wall 291 (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) toward the rear inner side. Note that a fine step having a thickness of about a thickness is formed at the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292. In other words, the third peripheral wall 292 extends from the front end (the boundary between the second peripheral wall 291 and the third peripheral wall 292) to the rear end (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293). It will be formed diagonally backward.

  Further, a fourth peripheral wall 293 extends from the rear end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 (boundary portion between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) toward the rear inner side. In addition, a fine step having a thickness of about 3 mm is formed at the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293. That is, the fourth peripheral wall 293 on the open side is the boundary between the front end (the boundary between the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293) and the rear end (the fourth peripheral wall 293 and the open rear wall 294). Part), it will be formed obliquely rearward.

  In this way, the main body frame 3 is formed obliquely rearward from the front end portion of the third peripheral wall 292 toward the rear end portion of the fourth peripheral wall 293 without interfering with the side frame plate 13 on the open side. The body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 around the axis connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) (see FIG. 2). 56). In particular, in the present embodiment, when the axis connecting the upper shaft support bracket 47 and the lower shaft support bracket 48 (see FIG. 2) is used as the center of rotation, the open-side peripheral walls 290 to 293 have the axis It is formed along an arc shape having a radius from the center to a portion close to the inner end of the side frame plate 13 (specifically, the first peripheral wall).

  In other words, the main body frame 3 has a plurality of peripheral walls 290 to 293 as strip-shaped plate portions whose longitudinal direction is the vertical direction, and is thicker so that the rear peripheral wall is arranged on the inner side. A slight level difference is formed. That is, the second peripheral wall 291 is inside the first peripheral wall 290, the third peripheral wall 292 is inside the second peripheral wall 291, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 is inside the third peripheral wall 292. Very few step portions are formed so as to be arranged respectively. As a result, the strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased, and the open peripheral wall 290 to 203 can be brought close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2. While adopting the effect display device 115, the width of the game panel 409 (the width in the left-right direction as viewed from the player), that is, the width of the game area 20 can be sufficiently secured. Further, on the open side, the third peripheral wall 292 and the fourth peripheral wall 293 are inclined obliquely inward toward the rear, so that the main body frame 3 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can smoothly open the main frame 3 without interfering with the outer frame 2.

  Of the peripheral walls 290 to 293, the surface close to the open side frame plate 13 (that is, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 extending rearward from the open side inner surface) is the “free end” of the present invention. It corresponds to the “side wall portion”. Moreover, the surface (namely, the peripheral wall 290-293 extended toward the back from the inner surface of a shaft support side) among the surrounding surface walls 290-293 close to the side frame board 12 by the side of a support is "" This corresponds to the “opening / closing axis side wall”. Furthermore, among the peripheral walls 290 to 293, the first peripheral wall 290, the second peripheral wall 291, the third peripheral wall 292, and the fourth peripheral wall 293 adjacent to the side frame plates 12 and 13 are respectively “strips” of the present invention. Corresponding to the “shaped plate part”.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 is inserted and attached to the main body frame 3 described above. More specifically, the front structural member 680 and the panel holder 540 that partition and form the game area 20 are arranged along the inner wall of the first peripheral wall 290 without a gap. Further, the transparent game panel 409 is sandwiched between the front component member 680 and the panel holder 540.

  In addition, the game effect unit 4 is inserted into the main body frame 3 so as to be accommodated in the game effect unit installation recess 30. In other words, the foremost part of the game effect unit 4 (the surface of the game panel 409) is located deeper than the foremost part of the main body frame 3 (the foremost surface of the first peripheral wall 290). The open-side rear wall 294 is molded at a substantially right angle from the rear end of the open-side third peripheral wall 292 toward the inside (left side in front view), and the upper rear wall 295 is the rear of the upper fourth peripheral wall 293. It is molded at a substantially right angle from the end toward the inside (front view lower side), and the shaft support side rear wall 296 is approximately directed from the rear end portion of the shaft support side third peripheral wall 292 toward the inside (right side of the front view). Molded at right angles. Accordingly, the game effect unit 4 is closed in the depth direction by the peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the outer frame 2. As a result, an illegal act such as inserting a foreign object from the side of the gaming panel 409 and operating a winning member such as each start opening 600, 602, 604, the general winning opening 614 and the opening / closing device 500 provided in the gaming panel 409, etc. Can be suppressed, and the pachinko machine 1 excellent in security can be provided. In particular, since the peripheral wall 290 to 293 is not formed with an opening other than the lock locking hole 351, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 functions as a covering portion that covers the game effect unit 4 from the side. The cheating from the side with respect to the production unit 4 can be suppressed.

  Behind the panel holder 540, a back unit 510 having a frame-like box-shaped back box 514 that forms a space of a predetermined volume is disposed. An opening 514a is formed on the rear surface side of the back box 514, and the effect display device 115 is arranged so as to close the opening 514a. Behind the effect display device 115, a main control board box 25 that houses a main control board 710 (see FIG. 58) and a peripheral control board box 24 that houses a peripheral control board 810 (see FIG. 59) are mounted.

  Thus, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25, and the peripheral control board box 24 are accommodated in the main body frame 3. That is, the front structural member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24 are mounted on the main body frame 3 as a box-like game box. Is done.

  Here, in other words, the positional relationship among the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the game effect unit 4 is a state in which the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The side portions (longitudinal outer surfaces) of the pivot support side and the open side game panel 409 are brought close to the inner ends (inner side surfaces) of the side support plates 12 and 13 on the pivot support side and the open side, respectively. Is formed. In addition, for each of the pivot support side and the open side, a thin first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front toward the rear between the side portion of the game panel 409 and the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is installed. Further, the upper side portion (outer side surface in the short side direction) of the game panel 409 is formed so as to be close to the inner end (inner side surface) of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper side portion and the upper frame plate of the game panel 409 are formed. A thin-walled first peripheral wall 290 extends from the front to the rear also between the inner ends of the tenth. Thereby, the game area 20 formed in the game panel 409 can be designed sufficiently large. In addition, the left limit, right limit, and upper limit of the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 are easy to understand, and the design of the game effect unit 4 can be facilitated.

  By the way, in the space formed by the back unit 510, a light-like decorative body 520 and a decorative board 521 are arranged. The light decorative body 520 is an electrical decoration member as described above, and projects light toward the front side of the game effect unit 4. Note that the light-like decorative bodies 520 are arranged around the effect display device 115 arranged in the approximate center of the back unit 510 and scattered over substantially the entire game area 20.

  On the other hand, the decorative board 521 is a decorative member molded in a mesh shape, and is arranged in a spiral shape in the front-rear direction over the entire area of the game area 20 in the space formed by the back unit 510. The light-like decorative body 520 is supported. The decorative plate 521 has a gloss plating on the surface and shines brightly by reflection of light. This provides a gaming machine that gives an image that emits beautiful light forward from substantially the entire back surface of the game area 20 without increasing the number of light emitting decorations arranged in the effect space 510G as the effect area. be able to.

  In addition, by making the decorative plate 521 glossy plating in this way, it is not always necessary to uniformly arrange the plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 behind the game area 20, and a plurality of LEDs are collectively arranged. You may arrange | position an LED board only in the specific site | part with which the back of the game area | region 20 was biased. Even in such a case, since the external light source or the light source of the LED is reflected by the decoration plate 521, it is possible to shine the entire game area 20 from the rear toward the front. In addition, at this time, by increasing or decreasing the duty ratio of the LED, only a specific part is caused to emit light strongly (in this case, direct information transmission is performed), or approximately the entire game area 20 is lighted gently. be able to. In this way, it is possible to switch between indirect information transmission and direct information transmission.

  Further, in the present embodiment, many of the main components constituting the game effect unit 4 such as making the game panel 409 and the transparent plate 621a made of transparent resin are light transmitting members. Furthermore, in the space formed by the back unit 510, effect devices such as a light-like decorative body 520 and a decorative board 521 are arranged. Accordingly, the game area 20 is not narrowed by the light decorative body 520 and the decorative plate 521, and a sufficient space for the game ball to flow down can be secured. In addition, since the main body frame 3 extends rearward while maintaining a wide state, a wide-area production space 510G (nets shown in FIGS. 55 to 57) for accommodating the production device is provided behind the game panel 409. A hanging portion) is formed, and it is possible to play a three-dimensional game with a wide and deep sense of reality. In particular, an electric lighting member such as a plurality of light-like decorative bodies 520 can give an impression that the entire game effect unit 4 is lit up in front view, and the decorative plate 521 is front and rear as viewed from the player. By arranging in a spiral manner in the direction, it is strongly emphasized that the depth of the game effect unit 4 (more specifically, the depth of the effect space 510G) is deep. In addition, this wide production space 510G is widely formed behind the game panel 409 (particularly, formed up to the back of the guide rail 482).

  In addition, the main body frame 3 has a housing portion (game effect unit installation recess) formed so as to be surrounded by the peripheral wall 290 to 293 with almost no opening on the side surface from the first peripheral wall 290 to the fourth peripheral wall 293. 30). The main body frame 3 is integrally molded. Therefore, there are no gaps or the like that may occur when a plurality of plate members are screwed, and security is improved. Further, a box-shaped game whose main components are the front component member 680, the panel holder 540, the game panel 409, the back unit 510, the effect display device 115, the main control board box 25 and the peripheral control board box 24. The production unit 4 can be accommodated as it is. Thereby, it is only necessary to design the game effect unit 4 in consideration of only the space secured by the peripheral walls 290 to 293, and it is not necessary to consider the balance with other components constituting the pachinko machine 1. The production unit 4 can be easily designed. The gaming panel 409 is provided with winning members such as the start ports 600, 602, 604, the general winning port 614, and the opening / closing device 500, and foreign players are inserted from the side of the gaming panel 409 to receive these winnings. It is possible to suppress fraud such as operating members, and the pachinko machine 1 having excellent security can be provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame 3 is from the peripheral wall 290-293 (the side wall of the 1st peripheral wall 290 and the 2nd peripheral wall 291 in this embodiment) which opposes the side frame plates 12 and 13 among the peripheral walls 290-293. It extends toward the rear. In addition, the main body frame 3 is integrally molded, and the back cover 58 is provided on the rear end surface of the main body frame 3 (open side rear surface wall 294, upper rear surface wall 295, shaft support side rear surface wall 296). Thereby, the back cover 58 can be provided without worrying about interference between the hinge for opening and closing the back cover and the outer frame (more specifically, the side frame plate) as in the prior art. Accordingly, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 can be made closer to the inner ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the width in the left-right direction between the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the pivot support side and the peripheral wall 290 to 293 on the open side can be increased. Can be wide.

  Next, the flow of game balls flowing through the prize ball tank 50, the tank rail member 51, the ball path unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. FIG. 55 is as described above, and FIG. 57 is a side sectional view of the pachinko machine.

  The prize ball tank 50 is disposed in front of the open side rear wall 294 and above the outer frame 2 (more specifically, the peripheral wall 290 to 293 extending from the upper side of the main body frame 3 toward the rear. Placed on the top surface). By the way, since the prize ball tank 50 receives the game balls circulated and supplied from the island facility, the position of the pachinko machine 1 is uniquely determined. That is, since the island facility cannot be remodeled unnecessarily, it is necessary to be able to receive a game ball supplied from the island facility even if any pachinko machine is installed on the island. However, the prize ball tank 50 of this embodiment includes a position (region) for receiving a game ball supplied from the island facility, and is disposed over a wide region extending from the upper surface of the peripheral wall 290 to 293. Thereby, even if the prize ball tank 50 is formed in a shallow dish shape, a large amount of game balls can be stored, so that the peripheral walls 290 to 293 extending from the upper side of the main body frame 3 to the rear are removed from the outer frame 2. As a result, the game effect unit 4 can be enlarged in the vertical direction (the height direction viewed from the player). Therefore, the game area 20 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and the effect space 510G provided behind the game panel 409 can be enlarged both in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. As a result, the game area 20 and the effect space 510G that are enlarged in both the left and right directions and the up and down direction can be formed, so that it is possible to provide a game full of three-dimensionality and profound feeling.

  The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 flow to the tank rail member 51 by a gravitational action. The tank rail member 51 is a double rail, and game balls are alternately sent from the rails to the ball path unit 52 one by one by the order supply device 51a. The tank rail member 51 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294.

  The ball passage unit 52 is a single rail, and is meandered in the width direction (left and right direction as viewed from the player) so that the game ball flowing down by its own weight meanders and flows down. Thereby, the ball pressure more than necessary is not applied to the game ball flowing down in the tank rail member 51. Then, the game balls flowing through the ball passage unit 52 are sent to the ball payout device 53 one by one. The ball passage unit 52 is disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294. Further, by making the ball passage unit 52 a single rail, the thickness of the ball passage unit 52 can be reduced in both the front-rear direction and the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and the ball passage unit 52 can be made compact. Can do. Furthermore, since the ball passage unit 52 can meander in the left-right direction, a wide-area effect space 510G formed by the back unit 510 over the entire back side of the game panel 409 can be secured.

  The ball payout device 53 is a device that pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the storage unit 361 of the dish unit 300 in accordance with winning, and has a payout motor 1465 for ball cutting. And along the rear surface of the open side rear wall 294, it is disposed below the ball passage unit 52. However, since the game ball paid out from the ball payout device 53 is supplied to the storage unit 361 by the action of gravity, the ball payout device 53 needs to be arranged at a position higher than the storage unit 361. In the present embodiment, the ball payout device 53 is disposed behind the open-side rear wall 294 and slightly higher than the storage portion 361, and is disposed as low as possible ( At least below the effect display device 115).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11, a ball supply passage 59 formed in the internal space is formed between the ball payout device 53 and the storage unit 361 so that the flow path of the game ball meanders. A ball outlet 1536 (see FIG. 21) which is an opening formed on the most downstream side of the game ball in the ball supply passage 59 is a prize ball communication rod 431 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) of the dish unit 300 described later. Furthermore, it communicates with the passage notch 478 (see FIG. 23). Then, the game balls paid out from the ball payout device 53 are paid out to the storage unit 361 through the ball supply passage 59 and the prize ball communication rod 431. The ball supply passage 59 can store game balls as much as possible from the rear of the open side rear wall 294 to the storage unit 361. That is, although this ball supply passage 59 cannot be visually recognized by the player, it can substantially store the paid-out game balls, so that there are more game balls than the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit 361 (part that can be viewed). Can actually be stored. In particular, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can store the same or more game balls in the storage unit 361, although there is no conventional lower dish.

  On the other hand, on the most upstream side of the game ball in the ball supply passage 59, the above-described ball payout device 53 is connected, and a foul ball inlet 1538 (see FIG. 21) which is an opening through which the game ball can flow is formed. Yes. The foul ball entrance 1538 communicates with the communication port 473 on the back side of the game effect unit 4. Here, among the game balls that have been ejected by the launching device 57 and entered the game effect unit 4, the launch guide path 29 (which is formed in the gap between the outer rail unit 472 and the inner rail unit 462) without reaching the game area 20. The hit ball that has flowed back the injection path of the game ball is received by the foul port 489 and enters the communication port 473. Then, the game ball that has entered the communication port 473 is guided from the back side of the game effect unit 4 to the ball supply passage 59 via the foul ball entrance 1538, and the ball supply passage 59 and the prize ball communication pole 431 are the same as described above. After that, it is discharged to the storage unit 361. The ball dispensing device 53 is also provided with a ball removal connecting passage 415 that is a flow path for discharging the game balls with the ball removed from the bottom of the pachinko machine 1 to the inside of the island.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the tank rail member 51, the ball passage unit 52, and the ball dispensing device 53 are all disposed along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294 (that is, the above-mentioned). It will be arranged on the rear side of the game box. Thereby, it does not interfere with the display device control board box 119 which is arranged behind the above-mentioned wide-area effect space 510G and attached to the rear side of the effect display device 115. Therefore, it is possible to freely design the arrangement positions of the tank rail member 51, the ball path unit 52, and the ball payout device 53 while ensuring the wide production space 510G and increasing the size of the production display device 115. In particular, it is necessary for the ball passage unit 52 to escape the ball pressure by folding back so that a load exceeding a predetermined ball pressure is not applied. However, since the ball passage unit 52 in the present embodiment is a compact single rail, and is arranged meandering in the left-right direction along the rear surface of the open-side rear wall 294, the arrangement position and the meandering method can be changed. It can be designed freely, and it is possible to avoid clogging due to abnormal ball pressure.

  In addition, since the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible, it is possible to secure a certain amount or more of the game balls present in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a ball shortage trouble. That is, if a certain amount or more of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be secured, for example, when a large amount of game balls are paid out, the game paid out more than the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 There is concern that the amount of spheres will exceed. Since the amount of game balls existing in the pachinko machine 1 is determined by the amount of game balls existing between the prize ball tank 50 and the ball payout device 53, the ball payout device 53 is arranged as low as possible. Trouble caused by the shortage of balls can be suppressed.

  If the ball payout device 53 is arranged below, the time from winning a game ball to paying out a game ball as a winning ball is shortened, and it is confirmed that the game ball as a prize ball has been paid out reliably. May not be able to confirm. In other words, if there is a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball and paying out a game ball as a winning ball, rather than a series of actions of winning and winning a ball being performed instantaneously It is easy to perform both checks. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ball supply passage 59 is provided between the ball payout device 53 and the storage portion 361, and the ball passage unit 52 is a single rail. By disposing 53 below, it is possible to provide a certain time lag between winning a prize and paying out a prize ball while suppressing a problem of running out of balls.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the game board attached to the main body frame is a mountain shape in which only the center portion where the effect display device is provided in the lateral width direction protrudes backward in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). It was common to have a shape or a pyramid shape. However, the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment has a square shape having substantially the same protruding width in the rear direction in the horizontal width direction in plan view (that is, when viewed from above). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48, the game effect unit 4 has a substantially box-like appearance as a whole, and such a characteristic shape is caused by the following points.

  That is, in the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 is disposed behind (in the depth direction) the game panel 409 as described above, and a wide effect space 510G is formed in the gap between the effect display device 115 and the game panel 409. doing. With this structure, the substantially center portion of the game effect unit 4 in the front view largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction).

  Further, in the game effect unit 4, a feather-shaped decorative body 530 or a light-shaped decorative body 520 as a plurality of light emitting members each having an LED substrate behind is provided behind the game panel 409 around the effect display device 115 in a front view. It is arranged. Various substrates such as lighting / flashing control of the LED substrate behind the light emitting member behind these light emitting members (more specifically, on the back side of the decorative plate 521 inside the back box 514). Is provided.

  In this way, the game effect unit 4 has a plurality of light emitting members and various substrates related to them on the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion in front view. Therefore, the outer peripheral portion with respect to the substantially central portion of the game effect unit 4 also largely protrudes behind the game panel 409 (depth direction). With this structure, almost the entire area of the game effect unit 4 in the front view protrudes greatly behind the game panel 409 (in the depth direction), and forms a substantially box-shaped appearance as a whole. Then, the substantially box-shaped game effect unit 4 can be closely fitted into the effect space 510G having a space shape substantially equal to that of the game effect unit 4.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
Next, control configurations of the main board and the peripheral board of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 59 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  Control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 700 (shown in FIG. 58) and a group of peripheral boards 800 (shown in FIG. 59). The group of main boards 700 controls game operations (winning detection, random number acquisition and winning determination, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 800 has stage operations (issue decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display). And the operation of the decorative body).

  As shown in FIG. 58, the main board 700 includes a main control board 710 and a payout control board 720. The main control board 710 includes a CPU 711 as a central processing unit, a ROM 712 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 713 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 711 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 712, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 800 or the payout control board 720.

  The RAM 713 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 710.

  Note that the main board 700 is connected to the power supply board 395 so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395. Specifically, operating power is supplied from the power supply board 395 to the payout control board 720, and operating power is supplied to the main control board 710 via the payout control board 720. However, as described above, in this embodiment, a main drawer relay board 648 is provided between the payout control board 720 and the main control board 710, and the main control board 710 is connected to the main drawer relay board 648 (main drawer board 648). The power supply from the payout control board 720 is received via the connector 2000). Various information exchanges between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 are also performed via the main drawer relay board 648 (main drawer connector 2000).

  The input interface of the main control board 710 detects the winning state to the first starting port sensor 780 and the second starting port 602 for detecting the winning state to the first starting port 600 via the panel relay terminal plate 750. The second start port sensor 782 that performs, the third start port sensor 784 that detects the winning state to the third start port 604, the gate sensor 760 that detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 612, and the general winning port 614. A general winning opening sensor 762 for detecting that the ball has won is connected.

  Further, an opening / closing device count sensor 776 is connected to an input interface of the main control board 710 via an opening / closing device relay terminal plate 754 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 750.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 710.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display substrate 768 is connected to an output interface of the panel relay terminal board 750 via a symbol limiting resistor substrate 766. Thereby, the main control board 710 can output drive signals to the normal symbol display 82, the first special symbol display 84, and the second special symbol display 86.

  Also, the output interface of the switchgear relay terminal plate 754 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and a switchgear open / close solenoid 778. From the main control board 710, the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 and the switchgear open / close solenoid 778 are connected. A drive signal is output toward. The ordinary electric accessory solenoid 774 drives a pair of movable pieces 606 provided above the third starting port 604, and the switching device opening / closing solenoid 778 is a switching device 500 (more specifically, a prize winning port). The door 500b) is driven.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 720 includes a CPU 722 as a central processing unit, a ROM 724 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 726 as a readable / writable memory.

  Then, the payout control board 720 processes the command signal input from the main control board 710 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 53 and the launching device 57 including the launching handle and the firing motor. Thereby, the ball payout device 53 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch device 57 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Also connected to the input interface of the payout control board 720 are an inner frame opening switch 736 for detecting the opening state of the front frame (not shown) of the main body frame 3 and a door opening switch 738 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5. Has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 710 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 720 to the main control board 710.

  The payout control board 720 is also connected to a full tank switch 730 that detects that the game balls stored in the dish 360 are full. Please remove it from the office. "

  An external terminal board 753 is connected to the main control board 710 and the payout control board 720. Various information such as the winning state at each of the start openings 600, 602, 604, the variation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and the gaming state based on the lottery result are provided in the hall provided in the gaming facility via the external terminal board 753. Output to a computer or the like.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 800 includes a peripheral control substrate 810 and a display device control substrate 816 as shown in FIG. Note that communication in only one direction is performed between the output interface and the input interface between the main control board 710 and the peripheral control board 810. That is, even if a command is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, no command is transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 to the main control board 710. Further, the operating power supplied to the peripheral board 800 is supplied via the main control board 710.

  The peripheral control board 810 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 811, ROM 812, and RAM 813, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 810 includes a ROM 819 that stores sound sources that are the basis for effect sounds and musical effects such as music, and effects such as sound effects and music that are based on the contents of the effects based on the sound sources stored in the ROM 819. A sound source IC 818 that outputs sound is provided.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 810 and the display device control board 816 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 816. The display device control board 816 processes the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 810 and outputs a drive signal to the effect display device 115. Note that the display device control board 816 includes a CPU 832, a RAM 834, a ROM 836, a VDP 838, and an image ROM 839.

  The CPU 832 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 810 via the input / output interface, performs arithmetic processing based on the command, and controls the VDP 838.

  The RAM 834 provides a work area for the CPU 832 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 836 holds a program for the CPU 832 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 838 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 838, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 838, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 832 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode on the effect display device 115 can be changed variously.

  The image ROM 839 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  As described above, the peripheral board 800 (peripheral control board 810 and display device control board 816) performs effect control for an image displayed on the effect display device 115, including a variable display effect for a decorative symbol 1153 described later. It is a part to do.

  Further, a lamp driving board 850 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 240 are connected to the peripheral control board 810.

  A panel decoration lamp 852 and a center decoration lamp 853 are connected to the output interface of the lamp driving board 850. Thereby, the lamp drive board 850 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps. Further, a discharge port detection sensor 854 that detects a game ball (that is, an out ball) discharged to the rear side of the game panel 409 is connected to the input interface of the lamp driving board 850.

  The frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 connected to the peripheral control board 810 is connected to speakers 144 and 341 connected to the door frame 5, operation buttons 327, a frame decoration lamp 842, and the like. The frame decoration relay terminal board 240 is connected to the peripheral control board 810 via the sub drawer relay board 649 described above. The peripheral control board 810 switches the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 based on the operation state of the operation button 327, and outputs a drive signal to the speakers 144, 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, functional configurations of the main control board 710 constituting the main board 700 of the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control board 810 constituting the peripheral board 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a functional block diagram schematically showing functional configurations of the main control board and the peripheral control board.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the main control board 710 includes a gaming state control means 934, a first special symbol lottery means 900, a first special symbol display control means 702, a first special symbol hold display control means 930, First special symbol hold counter 903, second special symbol lottery means 910, second special symbol display control means 704, second special symbol hold display control means 932, second special symbol hold counter 913, hold order Storage means 940, random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, processing area 5132, jackpot game execution means 715, opening / closing device operation processing means 714, opening / closing operation control means 938, normal symbol lottery means 920, normal symbol Display control means 716, normal symbol hold display control means 718, normal symbol hold means 923, movable piece opening / closing control means 928, command transmission means 94 It has a, and.

  The gaming state control means 934 determines which gaming state the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is, and controls the gaming state based on the determined gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is an external game state in which the game state can be grasped from the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the player is more external than the external normal game state (normal game state) and this external normal game state. The game state is controlled to any one of the external advantageous game states (chance game state) that is advantageous to the game.

  The external normal game state is a game state in which a later-described opening extension function (so-called time-shortening function) is not activated, and is a game state in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are not controlled in a later-described promotion mode. That is, as will be described later, the pair of movable pieces 606 opens and closes when triggered by the lottery process by the normal symbol lottery means 920, and thereby, the winning probability of the game ball to the third start port 604 As the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates, the first operation mode and the second operation mode (promotion mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation mode are provided. And are prepared. Of these, in the external normal gaming state, the first operation mode is adopted as the operation mode when the movable piece 606 operates. In addition, this 1st operation | movement aspect is an aspect in which the winning of a game ball to the said 3rd starting port 604 is hard to be promoted, for example, the aspect by which the 3rd starting port 604 is maintained in a closed state, or A mode in which the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened to the extent that they do not affect the winning of the game ball as compared to the case where the third start port 604 is maintained in the closed state (ie, even if the movable pieces 606 are opened and closed) This is a mode in which the winning frequency at the third start port 604 is substantially the same as when the closed state is maintained. “To the extent that it does not affect the winning of the game ball” is almost equivalent to the case where the winning frequency at the third start port 604 is maintained in the closed state even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. That is, even if the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened, it means that the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 604 is hardly promoted.

  On the other hand, the external advantageous game state is a game state in which an opening extension function to be described later operates, and a game in which the second operation mode (promotion mode) is adopted as an operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operate. State. Here, the “promotion mode” is a mode in which winning of the game ball to the third starting port 604 is promoted, and for example, a mode in which a longer time is adopted as the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. It is. That is, the “promotion mode” means that the winning probability in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is increased, the lottery time by the normal symbol lottery means 920 is shortened (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened), and the opening time of the pair of movable pieces 606. Up is equivalent. However, it is good also as a promotion aspect by performing only any one or two among these three aspects, and is good also as a promotion aspect by performing all three.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 includes an internally controlled gaming state that is difficult to grasp from the appearance. In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a later-described probability changing function (so-called probability variation function) operates and a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate correspond to it.

  When the probability variation function is not activated, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 performs the lottery process with a predetermined low probability (first probability) of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the probability changing function is activated, the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 causes the probability of winning the jackpot to be at least twice as high as the first probability (in this embodiment, the first symbol lottery means 910). The lottery process is performed with a second probability (winning probability B) that is 10 times the probability of 1 (winning probability A). In this way, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot is at least double that when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is activated. This is because it is possible to win a big hit at a stage where the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is small compared to the above, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  In this embodiment, a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is operated is referred to as “external normal gaming state A”, and a gaming state in which the opening extension function is not operated but the probability changing function is operated is referred to as “external normal gaming state B”. The game state in which the release extension function operates but the probability change function does not operate is referred to as “external advantageous game state A”, and the game state in which both the release extension function and the probability change function operate is referred to as “external advantage game state B”. Called. The above-mentioned “external normal gaming state” means both “external normal gaming state A” and “external normal gaming state B”, and the above “external advantageous gaming state” means “external advantageous gaming state” It is meant to include both “A” and “external advantageous gaming state B”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player cannot distinguish between the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B. Similarly, the external advantageous gaming state A and the external advantageous gaming state B Can not be distinguished. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is advantageous to him if the game is in the external advantageous game state, and determines that the game state is not advantageous to him in the normal normal game state.

  In addition, a change from any gaming state to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is performed only when the condition device is activated. Of the four game states (external normal game state A, external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A, external advantageous game state B), the most advantageous game state for the player is external advantageous game state B. Yes, the most disadvantageous game state for the player is the external normal game state A. Accordingly, a change from the external normal game state A to another game state (external normal game state B, external advantageous game state A and external advantageous game state B), a change from the external advantageous game state A to the external advantageous game state B, etc. Is not performed unless the condition device is activated.

  The first special symbol lottery means 900, when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780 based on the winning of the first start port 600, out of the random numbers for the validity determination generated in the random number range of 0 to 652. One random number is acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquiring means 902. The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Then, when the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to be determined are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and the first special symbol determination unit 904 performs the determination. It is determined whether the jackpot is won or whether a specific condition is met.

  In the case of the external special gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 determines whether or not the randomness value is acquired by the first special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 902. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the figure determination table 906. In this embodiment, since 19 and 457 are jackpot random numbers (random numbers determined to be jackpot winning), first, whether or not the random number values acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 are these jackpot random numbers. If it is a jackpot random number, the jackpot game execution means 715 executes the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 is performed by using the random number value acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the first random symbol value. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the probability variation special figure determination table 908. In this embodiment, 19, 41, 71, 97, 101, 137, 167, 181, 191, 199, 233, 263, 277, 331, 353, 373, 419, 457, 499 and 509 are jackpot random numbers. Then, it is determined whether or not the random value acquired by the first special symbol winning / determining random number acquiring means 902 is a big hit random number.

  When the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port sensor 784 based on the winning of the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, the second special symbol lottery means 910 The second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 acquires one random number among the special symbol success / failure determination random numbers generated with a random number range of 0 to 652 in the same manner as when the first start opening 600 is won. . The acquired random number is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure, and the number of the acquired random number is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913 up to a second predetermined number (for example, 4). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 913 is released, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure are transferred to the processing area 5132 in the order of acquisition, and are determined by the second special symbol determination unit 914. It is determined whether the jackpot is won or whether a specific condition is met.

  In the case of the external special gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, whether the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 914 determines whether or not the random number value acquired by the second special symbol appropriateness determination random number acquisition unit 912 and the second normal special event determination unit 914 It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the figure determination table 907. Note that the jackpot random number stored in the second normal special figure determination table 907 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the first normal special figure determination table 906.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is made by using the random number value acquired by the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 and the second random symbol value. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 so as to be performed based on the probability variation special figure determination table 909. The jackpot random number stored in the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is the same as the jackpot random number stored in the first probability variation special figure determination table 908.

  When a jackpot game is being executed, even if a game ball wins the first start port 600, the winning / nothing determination is not performed, and the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning ball is determined is stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not the game is successful. At the same time, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is counted up. Further, the first normal special figure determination table 906, the second normal special figure determination table 907, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908, and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 are all stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 58). ing.

  In this way, different tables are used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. In this way, by varying the lottery process depending on which start port among the start ports 600, 602, and 604 is awarded, it is possible to increase variations in game content and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the random number storage area 5131 for determination of success / failure stores a lottery order for each special symbol lottery means (that is, a lottery order by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and a lottery order by the second special symbol lottery means 910). However, the lottery order in which both are merged (that is, the order in which the game balls are detected by the start port sensors 780, 782, 784) is not stored. Order in which the game balls are detected by the start port sensors 780, 782, 784 (that is, the order in which random numbers are acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 or the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912) Is stored by the hold order storage means 940. Accordingly, the first special symbol lottery means 900 (specifically, the first special symbol determination unit 904) or the second special symbol lottery means 910 (specifically, the second special symbol lottery means 904) based on the order stored by the holding order storage means 940. The special symbol success / failure determination means 914) determines whether the acquired random numbers are correct or not (performs the determination for each random number).

  By the way, when the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is determined to be a big hit, a symbol generated by a random number range of 0 to 99 by a symbol random number acquisition means (not shown). One random number is acquired from the random numbers. And if this acquired random number value is 39-68, it will be determined as 1st long open big hit, if it is 76-99, it will be determined as 2nd long open big hit, and if it is 3-38, 3rd long open will be determined. If it is determined to be a big hit, 0 to 2 is determined to be a first short open big hit, and if it is 69 to 75, it is determined to be a second short open big hit. When the determined jackpot type is the first long open jackpot, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, an effect image indicating that the jackpot is won by the long open jackpot game execution means 715a is displayed. A long open jackpot (a jackpot game that prompts the player to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is executed to open and close the opening / closing device 500 under the situation displayed on the display surface of the effect display device (effect image display device) 115. Is done. On the other hand, in the case of the first short open big hit or the second short open big hit, an effect image indicating that the big win is won is displayed on the effect display device (effect image display device) 115 by the short open big hit game execution means 715b. A short open big hit (a big hit game in which the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls) is executed in which the opening / closing device 500 is opened / closed under a situation that is not displayed on the screen.

  On the other hand, if the random numbers acquired by the first special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 902 and the second special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 912 are not big hit random numbers, whether the specific condition is satisfied or not is determined. The determination is made by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. Specifically, in the first normal special figure determination table 906 and the first probability variation special figure determination table 908, 1, 3, 31, 211 among the random numbers for determination of success / failure are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers. On the other hand, in the second normal special figure determination table 907 and the second probability variation special figure determination table 909, only three of the random numbers for determination of validity are stored as specific condition establishment random numbers. When it is determined that the acquired random number is a random number that satisfies these specific conditions, an opening / closing device operation process in which the opening / closing device 500 is opened / closed by the opening / closing device operation processing means 714 to approximate the opening / closing operation of the short open big hit is performed. Executed.

  Thus, in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is operating. Similarly, also in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is always constant regardless of whether or not the probability changing function is operating. However, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is different from the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (first special symbol lottery). The probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the means 900 is higher than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910).

  By the way, in the case of an external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, a longer time is adopted as the opening time for the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 (promotion mode). The lottery frequency by the special symbol lottery means 910 is increased (the special symbol lottery opportunities increase). In other words, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases as the special symbol lottery opportunities increase as compared to the case of the external normal gaming state. Therefore, by making the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, the player The frequency with which a specific condition with a small profit given to is satisfied is reduced. Thereby, the troublesomeness resulting from frequent establishment of specific conditions can be reduced, and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the external normal game state A where the opening extension function does not operate, for example, a longer time is not adopted as the opening time for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 606. There are fewer lottery opportunities for special symbols compared to the gaming state in which. Here, since the opening / closing device operating process and the second short open jackpot game are very similar to each other, it is expected that the probability variation function may be activated by increasing the frequency with which the specific condition is satisfied. The frequency to give to becomes high, and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Thus, by making the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910 relatively lower than the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900, In any gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, whether the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the second special symbol lottery means 910 are successful or not is determined by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 being released. Based on. The release condition in the present embodiment is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but is not limited thereto. For example, when a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained is determined, the determination result may be stored until the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

  The result of the determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is determined by the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display control unit 704 by the first special symbol display control unit 702 or the second special symbol display control unit 704. 2 is displayed on the special symbol display 86. However, since the display is displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs, it is difficult for the player to grasp the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determination unit 914. .

  The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 is set by the first special symbol hold display control means 930 or the second special symbol hold display control means 932, respectively. It is displayed on the display 88 or the second special symbol hold display 90.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 and the opening / closing device operation processing means 714 execute the jackpot game or the opening / closing device operation processing based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914. Here, the jackpot game is a game accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the opening / closing device operation processing is a game not accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

  The condition device operates only when the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a big hit, and from one gaming state to the one gaming state. A change (transition) to a gaming state advantageous to the player is possible only when the condition device is activated. For example, a change (transition) from the external normal gaming state A to the external normal gaming state B is a condition that the condition device operates. Therefore, the gaming state does not change when the opening / closing device operating process is executed. For example, when the opening / closing device operating process is executed in the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state A continues, Even if the opening / closing device operation process is executed in the normal game state B, the external normal game state B continues.

  Note that a change (transition) from one gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the one gaming state is not only the operation of the condition device, but also a gaming state changing lottery (from one gaming state to the one gaming state). In the case of winning a lottery (whether or not to change to a disadvantaged gaming state by the player than the gaming state of), or when a special symbol change is performed a certain number of times is there. Therefore, for example, the change (transition) from the external normal gaming state B to the external normal gaming state A, the change (transition) from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external advantageous gaming state A, etc. are cases where the condition device does not operate. May also be performed when the other conditions described above are satisfied.

  The jackpot game execution means 715 operates the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 778 by the opening / closing operation control means 938 if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is large. The opening / closing device 500 is opened and closed to execute a jackpot game.

  More specifically, as the type of jackpot game, the long open jackpot game in which the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 (for example, 30 sec) is relatively long and the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 (for example, 0.6 sec) are relative. There is a short short-open big hit game. If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, the big hit game execution means The long open jackpot game execution means 715a as 715 executes the long open jackpot game. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is the first short open big hit or the second short open big hit, the short as the big hit game execution means 715 The open big hit game execution means 715b executes the short open big hit game.

  Here, the long open jackpot game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed 15 rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. The short open big hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed two rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 938. When a game ball wins the open / close device 500, the open / close device count sensor 776 counts the number of winning balls. Then, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls as prize balls are paid out from the ball payout device 53 to the tray by the payout control board 720.

  The types of jackpot games are not limited to long-open jackpots and short-open jackpots, and the maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 is substantially the same (for example, 30 seconds), but the maximum number of times of opening is relatively There may be a large jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and a jackpot (for example, two rounds) with a relatively small maximum number of times of opening. Further, although the maximum number of times of opening is substantially the same (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively long (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time of the switching device 500 is relatively short (for example, 15 rounds). For example, it may be 0.3 sec).

  Here, “round” is an opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing device 500 at the time of the big hit game, and after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, the closing condition is satisfied from the opened state until the opening / closing device 500 is closed. Round. The closing condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened or that the maximum number of game balls wins the opening / closing device 500. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing device 500 is closed.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the closing conditions at the time of a long open big hit game and the closing conditions at the time of a short open game are different. The closing condition in the long open jackpot game is that 30 seconds elapse after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that nine game balls win. On the other hand, the closing condition in the short open big hit game is that 0.6 sec elapses after the opening / closing device 500 is opened, or that three game balls win.

  The closing conditions of the opening / closing device 500 are not limited to these. However, in the long open big hit game, the closing condition is set so that the maximum number of winning game balls can be won by the opening / closing device 500 before the opening / closing device 500 is opened until a predetermined time elapses. It is preferable. On the other hand, in the short-open big hit game, it is preferable that the closing condition is set so that one or two game balls can be won by the opening / closing device 500 while the opening / closing device 500 is open.

  Thus, even if the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is a long open jackpot and a short open jackpot The profits given to the players are greatly different. That is, when the winning jackpot type is the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit, a large amount of game balls can win the opening / closing device 500. On the other hand, when the winning jackpot type is the first short-open jackpot or the second short-open jackpot, the game device can barely win one or two game balls. Thereby, the profit given to the player is greatly different between the case where the long open jackpot game is executed and the case where the short open jackpot game is executed.

  When the opening / closing device operation processing means 714 determines that the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is out and the specific condition is satisfied, An opening / closing device operating process for opening / closing the opening / closing device 500 is performed in a manner very similar to the short-open big hit game. The “similarity (approximate) mode” includes both the mode that is exactly the same as the short open jackpot game and the mode that is very similar to the short open jackpot game.

  It should be noted that the “very similar mode” is similar to the degree that the player cannot determine whether the short open big hit game or the open / close device operation process has been performed simply by visually recognizing the open mode of the open / close device 500. It means that it is an aspect. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determining unit 904 or the second special symbol appropriateness determining unit 914 is out of place and the specific condition is satisfied, the opening / closing is performed. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed twice with the closing condition of 0.6 seconds from the opening of the device 500 or the winning of three game balls (the opening / closing device 500 in the big hit game). The opening / closing operation unit is referred to as “round”, whereas the opening / closing operation unit of the opening / closing device 500 in the opening / closing device operation processing is referred to as “time”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 and the sound effects and effect sounds output from the speakers 144 and 341 are short when the opening / closing device operation process ends and based on the second short open jackpot. They are very similar to each other when the open jackpot game ends. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not include a state notification unit such as a state notification lamp for notifying which gaming state the internal gaming state is (a general gaming machine has a state notification lamp). Therefore, the internal game state (whether or not the probability changing function is activated) is not notified at all (in fact, the player may not even know the existence of the external normal game state B). Thereby, even if the player notices that the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 has been performed, the player grasps whether the opening / closing device 500 is based on the second short opening jackpot or on the establishment of a specific condition. (In a general gaming machine in which the gaming state is notified, the probability changing function is activated when the short open big hit game is executed, and it is notified that the probability changing function is activated). In addition, since the opening extension function operates after the short opening jackpot game based on the first short opening jackpot is completed, it can be understood that the game was the first short opening jackpot game. Further, “very similar” means not only the same thing but also a very similar thing.

  In this way, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910, there is a possibility that a specific condition may be satisfied even if the big win is not won, and the short open big hit game Since the opening / closing device operating process is very similar to each other, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, the jackpot determination by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is performed separately from the determination of establishment of the specific condition. Here, assuming that the determination of establishment of the specific condition is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the jackpot is successful, the winning determination of the jackpot is not performed when the specific condition is satisfied. That is, the determination of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied is based on the premise that the jackpot determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 is out of order, and therefore the determination of whether or not the jackpot is determined If the determination of establishment of the specific condition is made first, the opportunity to win a jackpot will be lost when the specific condition is satisfied. Accordingly, by determining whether or not the jackpot is won prior to the determination of the establishment of the specific condition, whether or not the jackpot is determined in all the special symbols drawn by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. As a result, the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the establishment of the specific condition is not treated as a failure (that is, treated as a winning type), and the jackpot determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 is a win, It is possible to make the winning and the establishment of the specific condition overlap, but in this case, it is necessary to decide which one is to be given priority, which is complicated in terms of control. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, control complexity can be avoided by determining whether the specific condition is satisfied only when the jackpot is not won (only when the winning combination is lost). Furthermore, two lottery opportunities for determining whether or not the jackpot is successful and determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied can be given, and the player can be given a feeling of feeling, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is set higher than the winning probability of winning the jackpot, and it is not possible to grasp whether the opening / closing device operating process is being executed or whether the short opening jackpot game is being executed. . Therefore, when the player is in the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A, the expectation that the player may win a short open jackpot that may cause the probability variation function to operate each time a specific condition is satisfied. It can have a feeling and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, by giving the player a sense of expectation that is changed from the external normal gaming state A or the external advantageous gaming state A to the external normal gaming state B or the external advantageous gaming state B, the player cannot stop stopping the game. As a result, the operation rate of the pachinko machine is improved, and a profit is also provided for the game shop.

  On the other hand, even if the specific condition is satisfied or the short open jackpot is won in the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B, the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B is continued (that is, The operation of the probability variation function continues), so that the player can feel secure. That is, even if the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is performed twice (or two rounds) in the external normal game state B or the external advantageous game state B, the external normal game state A or the external advantageous game state A is changed. Since there is nothing, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  It should be noted that the same special table need not be used as the table used for the determination of the success / failure by the first special symbol determination unit 904 and the second special symbol determination unit 914. The first special symbol determination unit 904 and the second special symbol determination unit 904 are not necessarily used. Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 914. In this case, the winning probability in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 may be different from the winning probability in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. Furthermore, a mode (for example, given to a player) is different between the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot game mode when winning in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which profits differ.

  Next, lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 920 will be described.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 612 and is detected by the gate sensor 760, the normal symbol lottery means 920 obtains one random number among the normal symbol appropriateness determination random numbers generated in the random number range of 0 to 250 as the normal symbol. It is acquired by the random number acquisition means 922 for determining whether or not it is correct. The acquired random number is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by a normal symbol holding means 923 having a storage area for storing the acquired random number and a normal symbol holding counter for storing the number of the acquired random numbers as a counter value. Deferred. When the normal symbol holding means 923 cancels the hold, the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 determines whether or not the normal symbol is determined.

  In the normal normal game state, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination unit 922 and the normal general symbol determination table 926. It is controlled by the gaming state control means 934. In this embodiment, since 246 to 250 are hit random numbers, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4000 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal mode).

  On the other hand, in the case of an external advantageous game state, the success / failure determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination unit 924 is performed based on the random number value acquired by the normal symbol determination / rejection determination random number acquisition unit 922 and the open extended general symbol determination table 927. As described above, the game state control means 934 controls the game. In the present embodiment, since 1 to 250 is a hit random number, it is determined whether or not the random number values acquired by the normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 922 are those hit random numbers. The opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is executed by the means 928. At this time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1024 msec, and the pair of movable pieces 606 executes the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 1300 msec three times and the opening / closing operation with an opening time of 856 msec twice (promotion mode).

  As described above, when the game is in the external advantageous game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the third start port 604 is dramatically improved as compared to the case of the external normal game state. Therefore, in the case of an external advantageous game state, the number of special symbol lottery opportunities increases dramatically, and a sense of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed increases, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Here, the normal map determination table 926 and the open extended map determination table 927 are both stored in the ROM 712 (see FIG. 58).

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the normal symbol is determined by the normal symbol determination unit 924 is determined to be a win even in the external normal gaming state, and the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 can be executed. Thus, the hit probability may be zero when in the external normal gaming state. That is, the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 may be performed only in the external advantageous gaming state.

  The determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 924 is displayed on the normal symbol display 82 by the normal symbol display control unit 716. Also, the number of holds by the normal symbol holding means 923 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 718.

  The movable piece opening / closing control means 928 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 774 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 606 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol appropriateness determination means 924 is winning. However, as described above, the opening / closing operation mode of the pair of movable pieces 606 is different between the case of the external advantageous gaming state and the case of the external normal gaming state (in the case of the external advantageous gaming state, the third start The winning of the game ball to the mouth 604 is made easier than in the case of the external normal game state).

  In the present embodiment, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is impossible to win a game ball in the third starting port 604, and the pair of movable pieces 606 are opened and closed. Thus, the winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is easier than the winning of the game ball to the first start port 600 and the second start port 602. However, when the pair of movable pieces 606 are closed, it is not limited to a mode in which winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is impossible, and winning of the game ball to the third start port 604 is the first start. It may be more difficult than winning a game ball to the mouth 600 or the second start port 602.

  The command transmission unit 946 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol determination unit 904 or the second special symbol determination unit 914 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 800. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to a variation time of the decorative symbol performed in the effect display device 115.

  It should be noted that the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904, the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914, and the normal symbol success / failure determination means 924 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if the opening / closing device operation process is executed in a manner in which it is extremely difficult to win a game ball to the opening / closing device 500, the opening / closing device operation process may be performed when all winnings are not won. .

  Further, as in the present embodiment, in the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is made prior to the determination of establishment of the specific condition is as described above. Although a remarkable effect is brought about, the establishment of the specific condition may be treated as the winning type, and the determination of whether or not the jackpot is successful and the establishment of the specific condition may be performed collectively.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 810 includes command receiving means 950, effect lottery means 960, and effect control means 962, as shown in FIG.

  The command receiving unit 950 is a part that receives the determination result by the first special symbol admission / rejection determination unit 904 or the second special symbol adequacy determination unit 914 transmitted from the main control board 710 and information related to the determination result.

  The effect lottery means 960, as will be described later, produces an effect mode to be displayed on the effect display device 115 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 710 and sound effects and music output from the speakers 144 and 341. Etc., and the display mode of each lamp 842, 852, 853, and the like.

  The effect control unit 962 is a part that transmits information to the display device control board 816 so that the effect mode determined by the effect lottery unit 960 is displayed on the effect display device 115. In addition, the effect sound and the display are controlled via the frame decoration relay terminal plate 240 so that the speakers 144 and 341 and the frame decoration lamp 842 are output and displayed. Further, the display on the panel decoration lamp 852 and the center decoration lamp 853 is also controlled via the lamp driving board 850.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 700 in accordance with the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.

  As shown in FIG. 61, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 711 (see FIG. 58) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (see FIG. 58) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM 713 (data memory) of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the processing area of the RAM 713 to the backup area, and the temporarily saved data when the power is restored. Is read out to the processing area of the RAM 713, so that a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the process of returning to the power supply stop state according to the backup data stored in the RAM 713 (power recovery) Time processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is deleted. After that, in the RAM 713, various control data necessary for the progress of the game such as jackpot winning probability and control data indicating the current game state are written with respective initial parameters (initialization). processing). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  The current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810, and the display on the effect display device 115 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM 713 of the main control board 710, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 after power recovery, so that even if there is a power failure, The game state displayed on the effect display device 115 can be matched (the peripheral control board 810 does not store the game state at the time of power failure). By the way, with respect to the current gaming state, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the effect display device 115 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern described later at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol. The information of the command is transmitted. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 810 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM erase switch that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is on. That is, even when this RAM erase switch is on, the backup data stored in the RAM 713 is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the game progress, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current game state, are written in the processing area of the RAM 713 with respective initial parameters. Processing). In the state in which such initialization processing has been performed (at the initial time), the control data indicating the jackpot winning probability shows the first probability (winning probability A), which indicates the current gaming state. The control data indicates an “external normal gaming state A” which is a gaming state in which neither the opening extension function nor the probability changing function is activated. Therefore, if the pair of movable pieces 606 may operate at the time of initializing, the pair of movable pieces 606 performs an opening / closing operation once for an opening time of 180 ms (normal mode).

  In the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 710 (see FIG. 58) is activated when such initialization processing is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 810 (FIG. 59). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 810 that the main control board 710 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM 713, and the power supply is started when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 711 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 395. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 710 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 710 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process of temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM 713 when a power failure occurs in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 711 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum in the processing area of the RAM 713 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored in the backup area of the RAM 713 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 713 before the power failure are properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 711 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 713 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 711 prohibits access to the RAM 713 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 711 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process is performed when the power is cut off. As a result, the power interruption occurrence processing is entered due to a momentary power interruption, and even when the infinite loop shown in FIG. 62 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 711 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Instead of the backup area of the RAM 713, a rewritable nonvolatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 713 may be a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM 713 to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 of the main board 700 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 711 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, detection signals from the various sensors described above (gate sensor 760, first start port sensor 780, second start port sensor 782, third start port sensor 784, opening / closing device count sensor 776, etc.) are used. Execute the process to be monitored.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 720 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 760 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing opening / closing control of the movable piece 606 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processing from the start of the special symbol change to the start of the winning game is executed, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing device 500 as the special electric accessory is performed. Execute the process.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 810 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 711 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, random numbers for success / failure determination, design random numbers, random numbers for reach determination (more strictly speaking, random numbers for high expectation effect determination), variation pattern random numbers, and random numbers for normal design success / failure determination Etc.

  The determination random number is a random determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game or a switchgear operating process. When the design random number is determined to generate a jackpot game, the type of jackpot (first long opening jackpot, second long opening jackpot, third long opening jackpot, first short opening jackpot and second short opening jackpot) It is a random number used for the determination of. The reach determination random number is used to determine whether or not to perform a highly anticipated effect such as a reach effect when it is determined that the jackpot is not won (i.e., missed) and the specific condition is not satisfied. The random number used. The variation pattern random number is a random number used for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86. The normal symbol determination random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be in an open state.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern of the decorative design that is display-controlled by the effect display device 115 may be determined by a variation pattern random number, and is mounted on the CPU 811 or the display device control board 816 mounted on the peripheral control board 810 of the peripheral board 800. It may be determined by the CPU 832 (refer to FIG. 59). The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, whether to control the pair of movable pieces 606 in an open state in which it is easy to accept a winning / non-judgment random number, a design random number, and a game ball related to the occurrence of the jackpot game or the switching device operation process The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to whether or not is updated. Here, the random numbers used for determining whether or not the big hit game is generated and whether or not the pair of movable pieces 606 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability determined to generate jackpot game or switchgear operation processing, probability to control the pair of movable pieces 606 to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number is constant. (That is, it is possible to prevent the probability from being biased due to aiming or the like), and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the variation pattern random number irrespective of the occurrence of the winning game and the display result of the normal symbol are updated. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 710 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update process, when the counter for updating the random number for determining whether or not the circuit has made one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring the random number for determination of success / failure, there are provided two means: a first special symbol determination / random determination acquisition means 902 and a second special symbol determination / random determination acquisition means 912. However, only one of these may be provided.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 600, the second start port 602, and the third start port 604, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (in step S120). YES) A variation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not to start the jackpot game or the switching device operation process, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big start is made in the fluctuation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the process selection flag is set to “3”. The process selection flag is updated to “0” if neither the big win nor the determination that the specific condition is satisfied has been made. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, a jackpot type (long open jackpot or short open jackpot) is determined, and the number of rounds, opening time, and game ball winning for controlling the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 according to the jackpot type. Set the limit number and update the processing flag to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the process when the specific condition is satisfied (step S220) is executed. In this opening / closing device operation processing, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing device 500 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In this special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the switchgear 500 is controlled based on the number of rounds, the opening time and the number of game balls that can be won in the jackpot game start process (step S200), and the jackpot game ends. In the case of performing, a process of updating whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time reduction function and updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the opening / closing device operation process (step S250) is executed. In this opening / closing device operation process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 is controlled based on the number of opening times, the opening time, and the limited number set in the process when the specific condition is satisfied (step S220). When the process ends, a process for updating the process flag to “0” is performed. Note that the opening / closing device operation processing is not a game involving the operation of the condition device like the jackpot game, but as described above, it is a game that is very similar to a short-open jackpot game that is a kind of jackpot game.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd starting opening prize process]
Next, the first / second / third start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up winning process.

  In the first, second, and third starting opening winning process, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting opening 602 or the third starting opening 604 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of game ball detection by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port 784 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 782 or the third start port sensor 784, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604 (YES in step S1101). ). If there is no detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 782 and the third start port sensor 784, no game ball is won in any of the second start port 602 and the third start port 604 (in step S1101). NO).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, various data (random determination random numbers acquired by the second special symbol determination random number acquisition means 912, symbol random numbers). , Special symbol type). Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 711 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103), and then proceeds to step S1104. move on. In the second hold storage process, various types of data (win / fail determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 602 are stored in the random number determination random storage region 5131. This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913. The random number storage area 5131 for determining whether or not to win has a random number storage area for determining whether or not to win, a symbol random number storage area, and a special symbol type storage area, and a game ball wins a prize in the second start port 602 or the third start port 604. Various data acquired by doing so are stored in the respective storage areas.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1101 that no game ball has won any of the second start port 602 and the third start port 604 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the second special symbol hold counter When it is determined that the counter value of 913 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 711 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 600 (step S1104). Specifically, the presence / absence of game ball detection by the first start port sensor 780 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 600 (YES in step S1104). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 780, it is determined that no game ball has won a prize at the first start port 600 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that the game ball has won the first starting port 600, various random numbers (random determination random numbers, symbol random numbers, special symbol types acquired by the first special symbol determination random number acquisition means 902) are used. It is acquired and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 711 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106), and the first and second -The third starting entrance prize process is terminated. In the first hold storage process, various data (win / fail determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the first start port 600 are stored in the random number determination random storage region 5131. This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903. In addition, various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 600 are determined as pass / fail as well as various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604. It is stored in each storage area in the random number storage area 5131 for use.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S1104 that a game ball has not won the first starting port 600 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is an upper limit value of 4. Are determined (NO in step S1105), the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes are terminated.

  If the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 913 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604 in step S1102, the various data acquired in step S1101 are stored. Discard. Similarly, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is the upper limit value when the game ball wins the first starting port 600 in step S1105, the various data acquired in step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 602 or the third start port 604, it is not always necessary to acquire various data (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. However, it may be performed between step S1101 to step S1103. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1101, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1103 You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first start port 600, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104; What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (step S1101-step S1103) to the 2nd starting port 602 or the 3rd starting port 604, the winning process (step S1104-) to the 1st starting port 600 is performed. 1106). However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 600 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 602 or the third starting port 604 may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 600, the lottery processing is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900, and when the second start opening 602 or the third start opening 604 wins, Although the lottery process is performed by the 2 special symbol lottery means 910, it is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball is won at the first start port 600 or the third start port 602, the lottery processing is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900, and when the game ball is won at the second start port 602, the second special symbol lottery means is performed. A lottery process may be performed according to 910. Furthermore, special symbol lottery means may be provided corresponding to each of the start ports 600, 602, and 604 (that is, corresponding to the first special symbol lottery unit corresponding to the first start port and the second start port). Second special symbol lottery means and third special symbol lottery means corresponding to the third start port may be provided).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even if any of the lottery process by the 1st special symbol lottery means 900 and the lottery process by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 910 is performed, the winning probability to the jackpot is the same. It is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and the jackpot winning probability when the lottery process is performed by the second special symbol lottery means 910 are different. good.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a bonus is awarded to a player when winning a jackpot in the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 and when winning a jackpot in the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910. There is no difference in the profits made, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is performed, the probability that the first long open big hit game is executed is set relatively high, while the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is performed. When the process is performed, the probability that the first long open jackpot game is executed is set to be relatively low.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 711 first sets the number of random numbers (starting storage number) stored in the random number storage area 5131 for validity determination to be zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1301). If the starting storage number stored in the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is 0, it means that the counter values of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 are both 0. .

  If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), a shift process of the random number storage area 5131 for determination of validity is performed (step S1302). This shift process is a process for shifting the order in which the determination of whether or not the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game balls to the start ports 600, 602, and 604 are made is performed. That is, whether or not the special symbol is successful is determined in the order in which the game balls are won in the respective start ports 600, 602, and 604, and therefore the order is shifted as the change starts. The random number acquired earliest among the random numbers acquired based on the winning of the game ball at each start port 600, 602, 604 is transferred to the processing area 5132. If the start memory number is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the variation start process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 711 determines the type (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol) stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1303). If the type is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303) and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is decremented by one. (Step S1305), the process proceeds to step S1308. On the other hand, if the type is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1306) and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is decremented by one. (Step S1307), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the gaming state (external normal gaming state B or external advantageous gaming state B) in which the probability changing function is operating (step S1308). Here, if the gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (YES in step S1308), the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 or the second probability variation special figure determination table 909 is selected (step S1309). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is in the ON state, the first probability variation special figure determination table 908 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is in the ON state, the second probability variation special symbol determination table 909 is selected. The

  On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1308 (NO in step S1308), the first normal special figure determination table 906 or the second normal special figure determination table 907 is selected (step S1310). Specifically, if the first special symbol flag is ON, the first normal special symbol determination table 906 is selected, and if the second special symbol flag is ON, the second normal special symbol determination table 907 is selected. The

  Then, the determination is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311).

  Note that the jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 904 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 914.

  If it is determined in step S1311 that the game is a big hit (YES in step S1311), the type of jackpot is determined based on the acquired symbol random number (step S1312). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on (step S1313). Specifically, if the first long open jackpot is set, the first long open jackpot flag is turned on. If the second long open jackpot is turned on, the second long open jackpot flag is turned on and the third long open jackpot may be set. For example, the third long open big hit flag is turned on, the first short open big hit flag is turned on if it is the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit flag is turned on if it is the second short open big hit. . Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “1” (step S1316), and the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1311 that the win / fail determination is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (step S1314). If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S1314), the specific condition flag is turned on (step S1315), the process proceeds to step S1316, the processing flag is updated to “1”, The variation start process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1314 that the specific condition is not satisfied (NO in step S1314), the process proceeds to step S1316, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the shift process is performed in step S1302, whether or not the determination is correct is made based on the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the determination random number stored in the processing area 5132. Although it is performed (step S1311), it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the determination is successful based on the determination table and the random number stored first in the determination random number storage area 5131, and the shift process may be performed. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the validity determination random number storage area 5131 can be referred to only when the change starts.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to the determination result. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not any jackpot flag among a plurality of types of jackpots is ON, or whether or not a specific condition flag is ON (step S1510). If the jackpot flag or the specific condition flag is ON (YES in step S1510), a hit variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1520), and then a variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  If neither the jackpot flag nor the specific condition flag is ON in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) with a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot should be performed. (Step S1530). Here, if it is determined that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot is to be performed (YES in step S1530), a high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then the variation Pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1530 that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot should not be performed (NO in step S1530), a low-expectation variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1550), and then A variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  The decision as to whether or not to perform a high-expected production is judged to be a high-expected production if the high-expected production lottery is won, and a high-expected production is not performed if the high-expected production lottery is lost. It is judged. The high expectation effect lottery acquires the above-described reach determination random numbers when winning at each of the start openings 600, 602, and 604, and when the winning or random determination random numbers are out of place, the acquisition is performed when the variation of the symbol is started. This is done by determining whether the reach reach random number is correct. Here, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery varies depending on whether or not the opening extension function is activated. Furthermore, when the open extension function is not activated, the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery also depends on the counter value (so-called number of holds) by the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913.

  Speaking in more detail about the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery, when the opening extension function is not activated (that is, in the case of the external normal gaming state) and the fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, If the counter value of one special symbol hold counter 903 is 0, it is 10.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 1, it is 1/12, and the counter of the first special symbol hold counter 903 If the value is 2, it is 13.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, it is 1/15. In addition, when the opening extension function is not activated (that is, in the case of an external normal game state) and the change is a change of the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is the second special draw. If the counter value of the symbol hold counter 913 is 0, it is 10.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 1, it is 1/12, and the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is If it is 2, 13.5, and if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, it will be 1/15. Note that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 are counter values after being subtracted upon the change.

  In addition, when the open extension function is activated (that is, in the case of an external advantageous game state), regardless of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913, it is won for the high expectation effect lottery. The probability of doing is always 1/14. Thus, in this embodiment, when the open extension function is activated and when the open extension function is not activated, the probability that a high expectation production with a high degree of expectation for jackpot will be performed is similar. It is said that. As a result, it is possible to avoid repeatedly performing only effects (such as non-reach effects) with low expectation of winning the jackpot, and the jackpot is won unfortunately in an external advantageous gaming state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed by the time, the interest of the game is suitably maintained.

  Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1560, the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1570), and the variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1580). For example, if it is determined that the variation pattern is the variation number 10, the command 0AH corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation number 10 is set as an effect command, and 43000 msec is set as the variation time value in the timer. Even if the determined variation pattern is another variation pattern, a command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set as an effect command, as in the case where the variation pattern of variation number 10 is determined, A variation time value corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1590), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In addition, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is not limited to the above description. That is, when the open extension function is not activated, the probability of winning the high-expected performance lottery is always constant regardless of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913. Anyway. On the other hand, when the open extension function is activated, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is not uniform, but varies depending on the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913. Also good.

  In addition, based on the variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process, it is displayed by a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

[About hit variation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the winning variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 69 is a list chart showing a variation pattern for each variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process. 69 in the winning column in FIG. 69 means a long open jackpot, ○ means a short open jackpot, Δ means establishment of a specific condition, and x means a miss.

  In the hit variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 68, first, the CPU 711 determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the opening extension function is operating (step S15201). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal gaming state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S15201), it is determined whether or not the first long opening jackpot flag is ON (step S15202). If it is determined in step S15202 that the first long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15202), one of the variation pattern tables A1 to A3 shown in FIG. 69 is selected (step S15203). The hit variation pattern table setting process ends.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, a total number “1000” of table selection random numbers is associated with each of the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2. In selecting the variation pattern table, one of the selection random numbers is acquired, and one of the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2 is acquired based on the acquired selection random number. I am trying to select it. Therefore, in the variation pattern table selection process in step S15203, as shown in FIG. 69, the variation pattern table A1 is selected with a probability of 820/1000, and the variation pattern table A2 is selected with a probability of 175/1000. The variation pattern table A3 is selected with a probability of 5/1000. Of these tables A1 to A3, table A2 is a table on which the above-described continuous effects are performed. The table selection random number may be used in combination with other random numbers.

  If it is determined in step S15202 that the first long open jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S15202), it is determined whether the second long open jackpot flag or the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15204). If it is determined in step S15204 that the second long open jackpot flag or the third long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15204), the variation pattern table A1 or variation pattern table A2 shown in FIG. 69 is selected (step S15205). ), The winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the variation pattern table A1 is selected at a probability of 825/1000 and the variation pattern table A2 is selected at a probability of 175/1000, as shown in FIG. .

  If it is determined in step S15204 that neither the second long open jackpot flag nor the third long open jackpot flag is ON (NO in step S15204), whether or not the first short open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (step S13206). If it is determined in step S15206 that the first short open big hit flag or the second short open big hit flag is ON (YES in step S15206), the fluctuation pattern table A4 shown in FIG. 69 is always selected (step S15207), and the win fluctuation The pattern table setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S15206 that neither the first short open big hit flag nor the second short open big hit flag is ON (NO in step S15206), the fluctuation pattern table K1 shown in FIG. 69 is always selected (step S15208). The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S15201 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, the external advantageous gaming state in which the release extension function is activated) (NO in step S15201), the first long open big hit flag or the second It is determined whether or not the long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15209). If it is determined in step S15209 that the first long open jackpot flag or the second long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15209), the fluctuation pattern table A5 or the fluctuation pattern table A6 shown in FIG. 69 is selected (step S15210). ), The winning variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the variation pattern table A5 is selected with a probability of 335/1000, and the variation pattern table A6 is selected with a probability of 665/1000, as shown in FIG. .

  If it is determined in step S15209 that neither the first long open jackpot flag nor the second long open jackpot flag is ON (NO in step S15209), it is determined whether the third long open jackpot flag is ON (step S15211). ). If it is determined in step S15211 that the third long open jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15211), the fluctuation pattern table A6 shown in FIG. 69 is always selected (step S15212), and the winning fluctuation pattern table setting process ends. .

  If it is determined in step S15211 that the third long open jackpot flag is not ON (NO in step S15211), it is determined whether the first short open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag is ON (step S15213). If it is determined in step S15213 that the first short opening jackpot flag or the second short opening jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S15213), the fluctuation pattern table A7 shown in FIG. 69 is always selected (step S15214), and the hit fluctuation. The pattern table setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S15213 that neither the first short open big hit flag nor the second short open big hit flag is ON (NO in step S15213), the variation pattern table K2 shown in FIG. 69 is always selected (step S15215). The variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

[Highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process]
Next, the high expectation deviating variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a high expectation disapproval variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 71 is a table showing a variation pattern for each variation pattern table set in the high-expected variation pattern table setting process. 71 in the winning column in FIG. 71 means a long open jackpot, ○ means a short open jackpot, Δ means establishment of a specific condition, and x means a miss.

  In the highly expected disappointment variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 70, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (step S 15401). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal game state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S 15401), one of the variation pattern tables H 1 to H 4 shown in FIG. 71 is selected (step S 15401). S15402), the high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 71, a total number “1000” of table selection random numbers is associated with each of the variation pattern tables H1 to H5. In selecting the variation pattern table, one of the selection random numbers is acquired, and one of the variation pattern tables H1 to H5 is selected based on the acquired selection random number. ing. Therefore, in the variation pattern table selection process in step S15402, as shown in FIG. 71, the variation pattern table H1 is selected with a probability of 820/1000, and the variation pattern table H2 is selected with a probability of 135/1000. The variation pattern table H3 is selected with a probability of 5/1000, and the variation pattern table H4 is selected with a probability of 40/1000. In addition, the probability that the continuous performance is performed in the external normal gaming state is a multiplier (10500) of the reach probability (10.5 to 1/15) and the probability that the table H4 is selected (40/1000). 40 to 15000/40).

  When the CPU 711 determines in step S 15401 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the open extension function is activated) (NO in step S 15401), the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 71 is always displayed. H5 is selected (step S15403), and the high disappointment variation pattern table setting process ends. In addition, the probability that the continuous performance is performed in the external advantageous gaming state is a multiplier (752/14000) of the reach probability (1/14) and the probability that the variable number 58 is selected (752/1000). .

[About low-expected variation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the low expectation deviating variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the low-expected variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 73 is a table showing a variation pattern for each variation pattern table set in the low-expected variation pattern table setting process.

  In the low expectation / disappointment variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 72, the CPU 711 first determines whether or not it is in the external normal gaming state, that is, whether or not the open extension function is activated (step S15501). If it is determined that the game is in the external normal game state (the opening extension function is not activated) (YES in step S15501), a continuous effect lottery is performed (step S15502). The continuous effect lottery is expected from the player even though both the result of the success / failure determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 904 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 914 and the result of the high expectation effect lottery are out of place. It is a lottery of whether or not to perform a continuous production that can give a feeling. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot flag and the specific condition flag are not ON and the reach is not performed, the continuous effect lottery is won with a probability of 1/251. Thus, in this embodiment, in the external normal game state in which the opening extension function does not operate, the probability that the continuous effect is performed when the jackpot is not won is set to be extremely low. As will be described later, the continuous effect is the special symbol display 84 or 86 that is displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. This is an effect (pseudo effect) that appears as if a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 to be described later have been subjected to a variable display effect multiple times.

  After the continuous production lottery is performed, it is determined whether or not the continuous production lottery has been won (step S15503). If it is determined that the continuous production lottery has been won (YES in step S15503), the variation pattern shown in FIG. The table H6 is selected (step S15504), and the low-expected fluctuation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S15503 that the lottery has been lost (NO in step S15503), the number of holdings, that is, the counter value by the first special symbol holding counter 903 or the second special symbol holding counter 913 (subtracted after the change) 73, one of the variation pattern tables H7 to H9 shown in FIG. 73 is selected (step S15505), and the low-expected variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Note that the selection of the variation pattern table in step S15505 is performed when the variation is the variation of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 73, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 0 or 1. If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 2, the change pattern table H8 is selected. If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 3, the change pattern table H9 is selected. Is done. Further, when the change is a change of the second special symbol, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 or 1, the change pattern table H7 indicates that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 2. If so, the fluctuation pattern table H8 is selected, and if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 3, the fluctuation pattern table H9 is selected. That is, the special symbol is displayed in a shorter time when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is larger than when the number is smaller.

  Further, when the CPU 711 determines in step S15501 that it is not in the external normal gaming state (that is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated) (NO in step S15501), the number of holdings, that is, the first special symbol holding. The variation pattern table H10 or the variation pattern table H11 shown in FIG. 73 is selected according to the counter value (the counter value after subtraction upon the variation) by the counter 903 or the second special symbol hold counter 913 (step S15506), The low expectation variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  Note that the variation pattern table in step S15506 is selected when the variation is the variation of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 73, if the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 is 0 or 1. If the variation pattern table H10 has a counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 903 of 2 or 3, the variation pattern table H11 is selected. Further, when the change is a change of the second special symbol, if the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 0 or 1, the change pattern table H10 indicates that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 913 is 2 Or, if it is 3, the variation pattern table H11 is selected. That is, when the number of lottery processes in the hold state is large, the time required for the special symbol variation display is less than “½” when the number of lottery processes is small. The variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  69, 71 and 73, when the extended extension function is not activated, “continuous effect 2 times (or 3 times)” is displayed, while the extended extension function is activated. Is not displayed as "continuous production ...".

  More specifically, in the variation names of the variation numbers 59 to 96, the display of “continuous effect...” Is simply omitted, and actually, two variations of the display effect are simulated. The reach effect corresponding to the variable name is performed only in the simulated second variable display effect. As will be described later, there are prepared variation patterns corresponding to the case where the opening extension function is not activated and the case where the opening extension function is activated (for example, the variation number 49 and the variation number 79 correspond to each other). Variation pattern). That is, the variation patterns corresponding to each other when the opening extension function is not activated and when the opening extension function is activated are very similar (same or very similar) as display modes in the effect display device 115. It becomes a display mode. For example, when a variation pattern with a variation number 79 is displayed on the effect display device 115, a display mode that is very similar to the variation pattern with the variation number 49 is displayed on the effect display device 115.・ "Out of normal" is displayed.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process in step S1560 will be described. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process in step S1520, the high expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1540, or the low expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1550. A pattern is determined. Hereinafter, the variation pattern determination process will be described for each set variation pattern table.

  That is, in each variation pattern table A1 to A7, K1, K2, and H1 to H5, a total number “1000” of variation mode determination random numbers are associated with each variation number indicating a variation display mode (variation name) and the like. ing. In determining the variation pattern, one of the variation mode determination random numbers is acquired, and the variation pattern tables A1 to A7, K1, and K2 are acquired based on the acquired variation mode determination random numbers. One is decided. Note that the variation mode determination random number may also be used in combination with other random numbers.

  Therefore, when the set variation pattern table is A1, any one of the variation numbers 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 is changed to 12/1000, It is determined with the probability of 24/1000, 20/1000, 64/1000, 188/1000, 112/1000, 156/156, 92/1000, 220/1000, and 112/1000. It will be.

  When the set fluctuation pattern table is A2, any one of the fluctuation numbers 26, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 50, 52 The patterns are 24/1000, 8/1000, 60/1000, 124/1000, 72/1000, 76/1000, 64/1000, 80/1000, 8/1000, respectively. It is determined with a probability of 56/1000, 120/1000, 76/1000, 76/1000, 68/1000, and 88/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A3, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 55. When the variation pattern table set is A4, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 54 and is set. Is always determined as a variation pattern of variation number 53.

  When the set variation pattern table is A5, any one of the variation numbers 61, 62, 65, 67, 69, 72, 74, 75, 81, 84, 86, 96, and 99 is changed to 1000 respectively. 8/1000, 8/1000, 40/1000, 140/1000, 360/1000, 20/1000, 24/1000, 36/1000, 20/1000, 20/1000 It is determined with a probability of 236, 80/1000, and 8/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A6, any one of the variation numbers 60, 64, 71, 73, 77, 80, 83, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 is selected. , 8 / 1000,100 / 1000,100 / 1000,100 / 1000,160 / 1000,140 / 1000,160 / 1000,4 / 1000,8 / 1000, respectively Are determined with a probability of 8,1000 / 4,1000 / 1000,8 / 1000,4 / 1000,192 / 1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is A7, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 98. When the set variation pattern table is K2, it is always determined as the variation pattern with the variation number 97.

  When the set variation pattern table is H1, any one of the variation numbers 4, 6, and 22 is determined with a probability of 716/1000, 240/1000, and 44/1000, respectively.

  When the set fluctuation pattern table is H2, 360/1000, 200/1000, 228/1000, and any one of the fluctuation numbers 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20 It is determined with a probability of 88/1000, 72/1000, and 52/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H3, the variation pattern of variation number 4 is determined with a probability of 920/1000, and the variation pattern of variation number 8 is determined with a probability of 80/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H4, any one of the variation numbers 25, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51 is changed to 1000. 360/140, 1000/1000, 84/1000, 64/1000, 32/1000, 28/1000, 16/1000, 108/1000, 60/1000, 48/1000 It is determined with a probability of 24 / minute, 24/1000, and 24/1000.

  When the set variation pattern table is H5, any one of the variation numbers 58, 59, 63, 66, 68, 70, 76, 78, 79, 82, and 85 has a variation pattern of 752, 1000, respectively. 124/1000, 4/1000, 28/1000, 20/1000, 16/1000, 8/1000, 8/1000, 12/1000, 4/1000, 20/1000, It is determined with a probability of 4/1000.

  On the other hand, when the set variation pattern table is H6, the variation pattern of variation number 24 is always determined. That is, since the continuous production lottery is won, the fluctuation pattern is always determined to be out of the continuous production twice.

  Even when the set variation pattern table is H7, the variation pattern with the variation number 1 is always determined. Similarly, when the set variation pattern table is H8, it is always determined to be the variation pattern of variation number 2, and when the set variation pattern table is H9, it is always determined to be the variation pattern of variation number 3.

  When the set variation pattern table is H10, the variation pattern with the variation number 56 is always determined. When the variation pattern table set is H11, the variation pattern with the variation number 57 is always determined.

  When the variation pattern (variation number) is determined in this way, a command (information) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 710 to the peripheral board 800, and the above-mentioned in the peripheral board 800 It is used for processing such as effect lottery by the effect lottery means 960. That is, the effect mode (continuous effect, reach effect, etc.) related to the variable display effect of the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 is actually transmitted from the main control board 710 in the peripheral board 800. Is determined according to the command to be executed. In this sense, the control related to the variable display effect of the decoration symbol 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 is performed in cooperation by the main control board 710 and the peripheral board 800 (display control means).

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any one of the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process waits until the variation time has elapsed (NO in step S1802). When the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 is derived and displayed on the changing display of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the specific condition flag is in the ON state (step S1806). That is, as a result of stopping the current fluctuation and deriving the lottery result, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing device operation process is started. If the specific condition flag is in the ON state (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If the specific condition flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). As described above, since the probability variation function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, if the probability variation function is activated, the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S2001), step S2002 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the open extension function is in operation. As described above, since the opening extension function does not operate when the jackpot game is being executed, if the opening extension function is operating, the operation of the opening extension function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. move on. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the open extension function is not activated (NO in step S2003), step S2004 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the long open big hit. Specifically, if any one of the first long-opening jackpot flag, the second long-opening jackpot flag, and the third long-opening jackpot flag is in an ON state, it is determined that the long-opening jackpot flag is YES (YES in step S2005). ), The number of rounds in the long open big hit game (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum open time (for example, 30 seconds) of the switchgear 500 per round, and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 balls) are set (step S2006). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008, the processing flag is updated to “5”, and the jackpot game start processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S2005, if any one of the first short opening jackpot flag and the second short opening jackpot flag is ON, it is determined that the short opening jackpot is not a long opening jackpot (NO in step S2005), The number of rounds in the short opening big hit game (for example, 2 rounds), the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 sec) and the maximum number of winnings (for example, 3 balls) of the opening / closing device 500 per round are set, and the process proceeds to step S2008.

[About processing when specific conditions are met]
Next, the specific condition establishment process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a specific condition is satisfied. In the process when the specific condition is satisfied, first, the number of times of opening and closing the switching device 500 based on the satisfaction of the specific condition (for example, 2 times), the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 sec) of the switching device 500 per time, For example, 3 balls) are set (step S2201). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6”, and the process when the specific condition is satisfied is terminated (step S2202).

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 77, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is first determined whether or not the opening / closing device 500 is open (step S2401). If the opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2401), it is determined whether a preset maximum opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has elapsed (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2006 or step S2007 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of switchgear 500 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), switchgear 500 is closed (step S2404), and the process proceeds to step S2405.

  If the opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has not elapsed in step S2402 (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether or not a game ball having a preset maximum number of winnings has been received by the opening / closing device 500 (step S2403). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the count value by the opening / closing device count sensor 776 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2006 or step S2007. If it is determined that the maximum number of winning game balls has been received by the switchgear 500 (YES in step S2403), the process proceeds to step S2404, and the switchgear 500 is closed. On the other hand, if the maximum number of winning balls has not been accepted by the opening / closing device 500, the process returns to step S2402.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether a preset number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2006 or step S2007 has been reached. If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (YES in step S2405), the process proceeds to step S2407, and the big hit flag (the first to third long open big hit flags and the first and second short open big hit flags is ON). The flag in the state) is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (NO in step S2405), the opening / closing device 500 is opened (step S2406), and the process returns to step S2402.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2401), the process proceeds to step S2405.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function should be activated (step S2408). If the probability variation function is to be activated, the probability variation function is activated (step S2409). Specifically, the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is one of the first long-open jackpot flag, the second long-open jackpot flag, the first short-open jackpot flag, and the second short-open jackpot flag. If there is, the probability changing function is activated. That is, if the jackpot game that has been played so far is one of the first long open big hit game, the second long open big hit game, the first short open big hit game, and the second short open big hit game, the probability changing function Actuate.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the opening extension function should be operated (step S2410). If the opening extension function should be operated, an operation process of the opening extension function is performed (step S2411). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special feature jackpot control processing is terminated. On the other hand, also when it is determined in step S2410 that the opening extension function is not to be activated (NO in step S2410), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the processing flag to “0” and the special feature big hit control process is terminated.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the gaming state when the jackpot wins has a significant influence on whether or not the opening extension function should be activated.

  Specifically, if the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B, the jackpot flag that was turned OFF in step S2407 is released to the first long Only when it is the big hit flag or the first short open big hit flag, it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is the second long open jackpot flag or the second short open jackpot flag, it is determined in step S2408 that the probability changing function should be activated, but in step S2410. It is determined that the open extension function is not activated.

  If the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot in the external advantageous game state A or the external advantageous game state B, the type of jackpot flag that is turned OFF in step S2407 is any type of jackpot flag. Even so, it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. That is, whether the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is any one of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit (winning the third long open big hit In such a case, it is impossible to proceed to step S2410), and it is determined in step S2410 that the open extension function should be activated. Therefore, once the first long open big hit game or the first short open big hit game is executed, the second long open big hit game or the second short open big hit game is executed unless the third long open big hit game is executed. The later gaming state becomes the external advantageous gaming state B.

  Strictly speaking, in the process of step S2410, first, based on the jackpot flag, it is determined whether or not one of the first long open jackpot and the first short open jackpot is won. As a result, if it is determined that either the first long open jackpot or the first short open jackpot has been won, the open extension function is activated in the process of step S2411.

  However, in the process of step S2410, neither the first long open jackpot or the first short open jackpot is won, but either the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is won. In some cases, it may be determined that it is. In such a case, whether or not the above-mentioned extension extension function has been activated at the time of winning the corresponding hit (second long open big hit or second short open big hit) (before the big hit game is played) Make further decisions. As a result, when it is determined that the opening extension function has not been activated (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), the process proceeds to step S2411 (opening extension function is activated). When the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), the special feature jackpot control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening extension function has been activated (external advantageous gaming state A or external advantageous gaming state B), the processing flag is set to “ When it is updated to “0” (step S2415), the special bonus jackpot control process is terminated.

  In such a configuration, as long as the player is in the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is merely an opportunity to shift to the external normal gaming state. It ’s just a hit. However, after either of the first long opening jackpot and the first short opening jackpot has been elected and the game has shifted to a gaming state (external advantageous gaming state) in which the opening extension function is activated, the second long opening jackpot, The second short opening jackpot is a "winning opportunity to shift to the external advantageous gaming state (the winning that is most advantageous for the player)", and the gaming value is greatly changed. In this sense, the first long opening jackpot or the first short opening jackpot is “the opportunity to shift to a gaming state in which the gaming values of the second long opening jackpot and the second short opening jackpot are different. It can be said.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, even when it is determined in step S2408 that the probability variation function should not be activated (third long open jackpot) (NO in step S2408), the corresponding hit ( It is determined whether or not the opening extension function has been activated at the time of winning the third long open jackpot (before the jackpot game is played) (step S2412). As a result, when it is determined that the release extension function has not been activated (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), the processing flag is updated to “0” at that time (step S2415). ). However, if it is determined in step S2412 that the release extension function has been activated (external advantageous game state A or external advantageous game state B), the release extension function is activated (step S2413). Thereafter, when the number of times of opening extension function operation (for example, 100 times) is set (step S2414), the process proceeds to step S2415 to update the processing flag to “0”, and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. .

  In such a configuration, even if the third long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous state, after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed, the above-mentioned second The two long open jackpots and the second short open jackpot are set to function as “hits that trigger the transition to the external advantageous game state (the highest wins for the player)”.

  If the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot while in the external normal game state, the jackpot flag that was turned off in step S2407 is open and extended in step S2412 regardless of the jackpot flag. It is not determined that the function should be activated (ie, proceeding to step S2415 following step S2412). This is because the process cannot proceed to step S2412 unless the third long open jackpot is won.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot game is executed by winning the jackpot when in the external advantageous game state, when the jackpot flag turned OFF in step S2407 is the third long open jackpot flag, in step S2412 It is determined that the open extension function should be activated, and the process proceeds to step S2413. If the jackpot flag turned off in step S2407 is not the third long open jackpot flag, the process does not proceed to step S2412 and always proceeds to step S2409. Therefore, it cannot be determined NO in step S2412.

[Switching device operation processing]
Next, the opening / closing device operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the opening / closing device operation processing. In the opening / closing device operating process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball having the maximum number of winnings set in step S2201 has won the opening / closing device 500 (step S2501). If the maximum number of winning game balls has won the opening / closing device 500 (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 500 is being opened or closed (step S2502). If the opening / closing device 500 is being opened / closed (YES in step S2502), the opening / closing device 500 is closed (step S2503), and the specific condition flag is turned off (step S2509). If the opening / closing device 500 is not open (ie, closed) in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2509, and the specific condition flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S2510, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the opening / closing device operation processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the maximum number of game balls has not won the opening / closing device 500, it is determined whether the opening / closing device 500 is open (step S2504). If the opening / closing device 500 is open (YES in step S2504), it is determined whether or not the opening time set in advance in step S2201 has elapsed (step S2505), and the opening time has elapsed. If (YES in step S2505), the opening / closing device 500 is closed (step S2506). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of opening / closing operations of the opening / closing device 500 has reached the number set in advance in step S2201 (step S2507). If the number has reached the preset number (YES in step S2507), After the specific condition flag is turned off (step S2509), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2510). If it is determined in step S2504 that the opening / closing device 500 is not open (NO in step S2504), the process proceeds to step S2507.

  If it is determined in step S2505 that the opening time of the opening / closing device 500 has not passed the predetermined time (NO in step S2505), the process returns to step S2501. When it is determined in step S2507 that the opening / closing device 500 has not reached the predetermined number of times (NO in step S2507), the opening / closing device 500 is opened again (step S2508), and then the process returns to step S2501. .

  Thus, when it is determined that a pre-set game ball has won the opening / closing device 500 (YES in step S2501), regardless of whether the opening / closing frequency of the opening / closing device 500 set in step S2201 has been reached or not. The switchgear operating process is terminated.

[About game content]
Next, game contents in each game state will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state A, the external normal gaming state B, the external advantageous gaming state A, and the external advantageous gaming state B are set as described above. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, externally, when the player is in one of the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B, it is determined in advance regardless of the state. The player is only suggested to the player to be in the single (one) gaming state (external normal gaming state which is also the gaming state at the time of initial).

  When a game ball wins one of the start ports 600, 602, 604, a special symbol lottery is performed by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910. The lottery result is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and is displayed on the effect display device 115 by a combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1153.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 to 84, the effect display device 115 displays a decorative symbol 1153 in the center area, a first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, a second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002, and a hold display. And a region 1150. The decorative symbol 1153 is composed of three symbol columns, the left symbol column 1153a displayed on the left side when viewed from the player, the middle symbol column 1153b displayed in the middle when viewed from the player, and the right symbol column when viewed from the player. The right symbol row 1153c to be displayed is composed of three symbol rows. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbols 1 to 8 are sequentially arranged and displayed in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153. Of these symbols, 3 and 7 are displayed in red, 1, 2, 5 and 6 are displayed in pink, and 4 and 8 are displayed in blue. Hereinafter, a symbol displayed in red is referred to as a specific symbol, a symbol displayed in pink is referred to as a quasi-specific symbol, and a symbol displayed in blue is referred to as a non-specific symbol.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in a lower area of the effect display device 115 and has a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152 adjacent to each other. The first hold display area 1151 has four hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1151a to a fourth hold storage display section 1151d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. That is, the sum of the hold storage display part of the first hold display area 1151 and the hold storage display part of the second hold display area 1152, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) of the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 903, and the first The sum of the upper limit value (second predetermined number) of holding by the 2 special symbol holding counter 913 is the same number. More specifically, the number of the reserved storage display parts in the first hold display area 1151 is equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of the hold display parts in the second hold display area 1152 is equal to the second predetermined number. The number is the same. In the present embodiment, both the number of reserved storage display parts (first predetermined number) in the first reserved display area 1151 and the number of reserved storage display parts (first predetermined number) in the second reserved display area 1152 are both reserved. The number is “4” before digestion (“3” after retention digestion).

  In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1151a, the second reserved storage display unit 1151b, the third reserved storage display unit 1151c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a, the sixth The reserved memory display unit 1152b, the seventh reserved memory display unit 1152c, and the eighth reserved memory display unit 1152d are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and an area (common symbol display) where the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed. The lottery results in the (region) are derived in the above-described order. That is, the lottery hold corresponding to each hold storage display unit from the first hold (hold corresponding to the first hold storage display unit 1151a) to the end hold (for example, the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d) in order. It will be derived in the order of the hold. Thereby, it is possible to clearly grasp the order in which the lottery results are derived in the common symbol display area.

  Each hold storage display unit 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, which is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903, and held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. Is displayed in any one of the second display mode indicating that it is held and the third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903.

  Each of the on-hold storage display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second on-hold display area 1152 can be displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode. Information regarding the number of holds in the special symbol hold counter 903 and the second special symbol hold counter 913 may be hidden.

  Each display mode will be described. For example, in FIG. 80, the display mode of the first hold memory display unit 1151a, the second hold memory display unit 1151b, and the fourth hold memory display unit 1151d is the third display mode. The display mode of the third hold storage display unit 1151c and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is the second display mode, and the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is the first display mode. Note that the display modes of the seventh reserved storage display unit 1152c and the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d are not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first display mode indicates that a frame (inside the frame is gray) is displayed and can be reserved by the first special symbol reservation counter 903. The second display mode means that a red character (here, a character imitating UFO) is displayed and held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. The third display mode means that a blue character (here, a character simulating a UFO of a size smaller than the second display mode) is displayed and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Yes. In this way, the display mode is different between the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 903 and the display mode that is held by the second special symbol hold counter 913. .

  Here, FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A or external normal gaming state B), where (a) is a background image of a dome stadium, (B) is an image in which the background image is a passenger ship, and (c) is an image in which the background image is a night view. In the external normal game state, any one of the images shown in FIGS. 79A to 79C is selected and determined at random. It should be noted that any one of the images shown in FIGS. 79A to 79C may be selected and determined by the operation button 327. Thereby, a player's desired image will be displayed on the production | presentation display apparatus 115, and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  In an external normal gaming state, the first long open big hit and the second long open big hit in a lottery process (hereinafter simply referred to as “special symbol lottery process”) by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the second special symbol lottery means 910 Or, when winning the 3rd long open jackpot, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 scrolls in the vertical direction, and then stops and displays with a zebra eye (three symbol rows 1153a to 1153c become the same symbol). Is done.

  The result of the special symbol lottery process is displayed not only on the decorative symbol 1153 but also on the lower right of the image displayed on the effect display device 115 as the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Here, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 900 is displayed as the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000, and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is displayed as the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002.

  When the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open jackpot, the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is stopped and displayed with a specific symbol, a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and then A long open jackpot game based on the 1 long open jackpot is executed. The gaming state after the long open jackpot game is over will be in the external advantageous gaming state B until the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process. Although the details will be described later, after the long open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process in the external normal game state based on the first long open jackpot has ended, there is a possibility that a great benefit may be brought to the player Enter the “promotion mode”.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second long open jackpot or the third long open big hit, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) are stopped and displayed with a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol double-eyed After that, a long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot is executed.

  The game state after the long open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process being the second long open jackpot is the external normal game state B. The gaming state after the long opening jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery processing being the third long opening jackpot is the external normal gaming state A. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second long open jackpot and the result of the special symbol lottery process is the third long open jackpot, these The external game state after the long open jackpot game based on the jackpot of the game is the normal external game state that also appears at the time of the initial as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is not advantageous to him and plays the game.

  In this way, if the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state is a doublet with a specific symbol, the first long open jackpot is won at that time. Can be grasped. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state after the first long open big hit game is the external advantageous gaming state B (that is, to enter the promotion mode), it can give the player a great expectation, Reduction can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state is a quasi-specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, it is grasped which jackpot is won at this stage. I can't do it. However, even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153a to 1153c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are quasi-specific symbols or non-specific symbols, if the first long open jackpot is won, After the jackpot game is over, it is notified that the first long open jackpot was made. Therefore, the player executes the jackpot game while having a sense of expectation that the player will enter the “promotion mode”, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the jackpot game that tends to be monotonous.

  In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot or the second short open jackpot, or the result of the special symbol lottery process is out and the specific condition is satisfied At this time, in the present embodiment, a chance eye is displayed on the effect display device 115 without displaying a flat eye. If the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot, a short open big hit game based on the first short open big hit is executed, and the gaming state after the short open big hit game is finished is the external advantageous gaming state B. (It can be grasped that the first short opening big hit was obtained by operating the opening extension function). After the short open jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short open jackpot, the player enters the “promotion mode”.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second short open big hit, a short open big hit game based on the second short open big hit is executed, and the gaming state after the short open big hit game is finished is an external normal Game state B is entered. Further, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is not satisfied and the specific condition is satisfied, the opening / closing device operating process is executed. Since the execution of the opening / closing device operating process is not a condition, the game state is not changed even when the opening / closing device operating process is executed. For example, when the specific condition is satisfied when the external normal game state A is established, the external normal game state A remains after the end of the opening / closing device operation process, and when the external normal game state B is satisfied, the specific condition is satisfied. In this case, the external normal gaming state B remains even after the opening / closing device operation process is completed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery process is the second short open jackpot when in the external normal gaming state, or if the result of the special symbol lottery process is out and the specific condition is satisfied, The game state after the short open big hit game based on the second short open big hit or the opening / closing device operating process based on the establishment of the specific condition is the external normal game state, and the operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is promoted. There is no control. For this reason, it seems that there is no change in the gaming state from the viewpoint of the player.

  It should be noted that the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot, Based on the number of second short-open jackpots, the “probability of entering the promotion mode” in the external normal gaming state is approximately one third. The “probability of entering the“ promotion mode ”when in the external normal gaming state” is the “percentage distribution rate per chance that triggers the transition to the promotion mode” when in the external normal gaming state. Yes, specifically, the probability of entering the `` promotion mode '' after winning the jackpot game in the special symbol lottery processing in the external normal game state and finishing the jackpot game based on the winning to the jackpot game, This means that it is approximately one third of the number of times that the jackpot game is executed.

  After winning the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot in the external normal game state, after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot ends, It becomes an external normal game state. However, if the winning type at this time is the second long open jackpot, the gaming state after the second long open big hit game is the external normal gaming state B, and if the third long open big hit, the third long The gaming state after the open jackpot game ends is the external normal gaming state A.

  In this way, in the external normal game state, when winning either the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, regardless of the winning type, the jackpot game corresponding to the corresponding win has ended. After that, the external normal gaming state is entered again, and the effect image indicating that it is in the external normal gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 115 again. Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not provided with a state notification lamp (for example, a lamp for displaying whether or not the probability changing function is activated when the lottery process is performed) that always displays the gaming state. . Therefore, the player plays a game by determining that the game state is not advantageous to the player (the game state that appears at the initial stage) regardless of whether the player is internally in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B. It will be. In other words, since the operation mode when the pair of movable pieces 606 operate is the same as that at the initial time, the player has no change in the gaming state from the initial time, and the jackpot winning probability is also the above It is determined that it will be the same as the winning probability A (first probability) adopted at the time of initial, and the game is played.

  However, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot (per-share distribution ratio per second long open jackpot) and the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot (per hit distribution per third long open jackpot) with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers described above Rate), in the external normal gaming state, the probability of winning the second long open jackpot (the distribution ratio per second long open jackpot) and the probability of winning the third long open jackpot (third long open jackpot) Is the same level (generally 2 to 3). According to such a configuration, when the game is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state by winning either the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, the winning probability A employed also at the initial time is used. When the lottery process is performed with (first probability), and when the lottery process is performed with a winning probability B (second probability) that is higher than the corresponding selection probability A, the game state is the same. Under the circumstances suggested to the player, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the double standard of the winning probability A and the winning probability B. Accordingly, the player wins the jackpot in a small number of lotteries since the last jackpot game was performed, despite the fact that the player has continuously shifted to the same external normal gaming state as at the initial time. It becomes easy to enjoy the so-called jackpot villas per surprise (unexpected jackpot).

  Incidentally, FIG. 80 is an image showing one aspect of the effect mode that appears on the effect display device 115 when in the external normal game state. For example, one of the second long open jackpot and the third long open jackpot is won. Therefore, it appears on the effect display device 115 when, for example, the game continuously shifts to the external normal gaming state. In this image, the background image is a dome stadium, and the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) scroll in the vertical direction. Thus, as long as the player is in the external normal gaming state, the player is in a predetermined single (one) gaming state (external normal gaming state that is also adopted at the time of initial) regardless of the internal gaming state. Is intimately suggested to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the image shown in FIG. 80 is displayed until the special symbol lottery process is performed up to 50 times after the long open jackpot game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot ends. Is done. If no big hit game is generated while the result of the special symbol lottery process is performed 50 times, the image shown in FIG. 80 is displayed, and then any one of the images shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c) is displayed. Is displayed.

  By the way, based on the number of random numbers of the second long open jackpot with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers and the number of third long open jackpots with respect to the random number width of the design random numbers, the jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot and the third long The ratio with the open jackpot game is approximately 2 to 3 (that is, when the game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long jackpot or the third long jackpot is finished is the external normal gaming state A) And the external normal gaming state B is approximately 3 to 2). Therefore, in the gaming state after the long-opening jackpot game based on the second long-opening jackpot or the third long-opening jackpot, the frequency of winning the jackpot increases until the special symbol change is performed several tens of times. In other words, the jackpot game can be executed in a so-called bead sequence. In the case of the external normal gaming state B, it goes without saying that the big win is won at a very high frequency until the change of the special symbol is performed several tens of times, but even if it is the external normal gaming state A, Due to the probability of winning a jackpot in the external normal gaming state A in this embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot before the special symbol changes until several tens of turns.

  On the other hand, since the player is playing on the premise that the player is in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate, the number of times after the long open big hit game based on the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit game has ended It is unexpected for a player to win a jackpot in a daisy chain at an early stage compared to the winning probability of the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A where the probability variation function does not operate, such as 10 rotations. In this way, if the player wins a jackpot unexpectedly (hereinafter referred to as an “unexpected jackpot”), the player thinks that he / she has a “luck” and plays the game well. It can be performed, and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

  Such an unexpected jackpot is actually a game state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended, even though the game state does not seem to be a game state in which the probability variation function operates. Is generated by actively presenting the case of the external normal game state B in which the probability changing function is activated (as much as the external normal game state B). Therefore, the jackpot game is not executed in a daisy chain by mere coincidence relying only on the winning probability of the jackpot in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate. Since it can be won, the decline of interest can be suppressed. Moreover, despite the possibility of an unexpected jackpot after the long-open jackpot game based on the second long-open jackpot or the third long-open jackpot game, the reverse, that is, what is the number of changes in the special symbol, for example? Since it is not intentionally set to a game state that falls into a so-called humiliation such as a thousand revolutions (but there is a possibility that it will accidentally fall into the so-called hamari), the willingness to continue the game is not lost, Reduction can be suppressed.

  In other words, in the external normal gaming state after the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, the winning probability A adopted at the initial time and the probability higher than the corresponding selected probability A The lottery process for the jackpot is executed with one of the two winning probabilities B and the winning probabilities B equal to each other (by the double standard of the winning probabilities A and B). Therefore, even if this external normal gaming state is repeated, since at least the same winning probability A as the external normal gaming state A is maintained, the situation of falling into a state where the jackpot is not won for a long period of time is eliminated. In addition, with the winning probability B that is easy to win a big win, it is possible to give a change (so-called wave) to the ease of winning a big win in the external normal gaming state.

  In addition, if the winning probabilities for the second long open jackpot and the third long open jackpot that trigger the transition to the external normal gaming state are similar, the winning probability in the external normal gaming state is as follows. With B, the expectation that the jackpot lottery process will be executed increases. In other words, the winning probability (average probability) expected in the external normal gaming state is much larger than the winning probability A in consideration of the proportion of the winning probability A adopted in the external normal gaming state and the proportion of the winning probability B adopted. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation is further enhanced in the external normal gaming state.

[About time limit mode]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second short opening jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state or when a specific condition is established, the short opening big hit game based on the second short opening jackpot winning or the establishment of the specific condition is established. After the opening / closing device operation processing based on is completed, the “time limit mode” is entered.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the time limit mode. In the “time limit mode”, as shown in FIG. 81, eight alphabets of eight characters are displayed on the effect display device 115. When the time limit mode is entered, all alphabets are displayed in black and partially colored according to the progress of the game. In FIG. 81, “I”, “K”, “A”, and “D” are black display, and “P”, “N”, “L”, and “Y” are colored display. In the time limit mode, as the game progresses, the black display of the alphabet is changed to colored display, and when the alphabet of all 8 characters changes to colored display within a limited time shown in advance, The jackpot game is started. In this time limit mode, the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) scroll in the vertical direction as shown in FIG.

  In the normal normal game state A where neither the probability changing function nor the open / extended function is activated, if the player wins the second short open jackpot or enters the “time limit mode” due to the establishment of a specific condition, the game state in this time limit mode May be in the external normal gaming state A and in the external normal gaming state B. Based on the number of jackpot random numbers for the random number width of the random number for success / failure determination, the second short open jackpot for the random number width of the design random number, and the number of random numbers satisfying a specific condition for the random number width of the random number for determination / failure, the external normal gaming state The ratio between the winning probability for the second short open jackpot in A and the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 1:19.

  On the other hand, in the case of entering the “time limit mode” because the second short open jackpot is won or the specific condition is satisfied in the external normal game state B, the game state at this time is always the external normal game state B. Become. This is because the opening / closing device operation process is not a hit with the operation of the condition device, and therefore the external normal game state B continues even if the specific condition is satisfied in the external normal game state B.

  By the way, although the game state in the “time limit mode” may be in the case of the external normal game state A and the case of the external normal game state B, the game state can be recognized only by the player only in the external normal game state. It is. However, in the external normal game state A, after winning the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot, the long open big hit game based on the winning of the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended. Instead of making the player think that it is a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate as in the gaming state, as described above, a predetermined matter (in this embodiment, 8 characters) within a certain limited time. A certain amount of expectation is given to the player such that the jackpot game is started when the black display portion for all alphabets is colored and displayed). Moreover, since the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is higher than the winning probability of winning the jackpot, the player enters the “time limit mode” at a relatively high frequency, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Externally, the jackpot game starts when the black-out display portion for all eight alphabets is colored, but internally, when the jackpot is won, all eight alphabets are colored. Processing such as display is performed. Therefore, when the player is in the normal normal game state B, the colored display alphabet is greater than the black display alphabet in the external normal game state A, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. ing.

  In the present embodiment, when entering the “time limit mode”, the timer 1004 indicating the remaining time of the “time limit mode” is displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 115. Here, the time in the “time limit mode” is a fixed time (3 minutes in the present embodiment) regardless of whether the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B. Since the number of fluctuations of special symbols per minute is about 5 on average, the number of fluctuations of special symbols in “Time Limit Mode” is about 15. If done, the number of fluctuations will be further reduced). This number of 15 times is less than half of the reciprocal of the winning probability for the jackpot in the external normal gaming state B.

  Thus, in the “time limit mode”, the lottery process for the jackpot is performed with the winning probability B that is higher than the jackpot winning probability A adopted at the initial time by the winning of the second short open jackpot. If the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery process is performed under the condition that the external normal gaming state at the time of the corresponding selection is maintained. In other words, since there is a case in which a lottery process is performed with the winning probability B by winning the second short open jackpot, the degree of expectation for the jackpot in the “time limit mode” is suitably set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the “time limit mode”.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the game is continuously shifted to the external normal gaming state, the winning probability A adopted at the initial time and the winning probability set to be higher than the corresponding winning probability A. One of the two winning probabilities with B is adopted to the same extent (winning probability A and winning probability B are double standard), and when the lottery process is performed with the winning probability A, the lottery process is performed with the winning probability B. Under the circumstances where the player is suggested to be in a predetermined single (one) game state regardless of the time, the lottery process is performed with either the winning probability A or the winning probability B. Like to do. Therefore, the player sees that the lottery process is performed only with the winning probability A, regardless of whether the winning of the second short open big hit or the establishment of the specific condition is entered. Compared with the case where the final value is determined, the expectation level for jackpots can be dramatically increased.

  By the way, when the game state in the “time limit mode” is the external normal game state B, the game state remains in the external normal game state B even if the jackpot is not won during the “time limit mode”. That is, in the “time limit mode”, even if the “time limit mode” ends without the black display portion of all eight alphabets being colored, the probability variation function remains active. The jackpot game can occur at a relatively early stage.

  In the present embodiment, even if the gaming state in the “time limit mode” is the external normal gaming state B, it is not always a big win in the “time limit mode”. In other words, while the number of changes in the special symbol in the “time limit mode” is about 15 as described above, the reciprocal of the jackpot winning probability in the external normal gaming state B is more than 15 times. That is, even if it is assumed that the “time limit mode” is the external normal gaming state B, the probability of winning a big hit in the “time limit mode” is less than half. As a result, although the player is discouraged once, it can be revived and it can be thought that the player has won the jackpot, the player can be given more joy, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, when the “time limit mode” ends, even if the game is in the external normal game state B, the background image of the effect display device 115 is externally similar to that in the external normal game state A. Therefore, when the “time limit mode” ends, the player can be greatly discouraged. The greater the degree of discouragement, the greater the joy when a big hit game is generated at a relatively early stage.

  In addition, the “time limit mode” is entered not only when a specific condition is satisfied, but also when winning the second short opening big hit, so it is a so-called mission mode that is merely a mere presentation as in the past. Unlike the “time limit mode”, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation to win a jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, the “time limit mode” is entered even when a specific condition is satisfied in the external normal gaming state (that is, the external normal gaming state B) after winning the second long open jackpot. In this case, in the “time limit mode”, since the probability changing function is operated based on the second long open jackpot, it is very easy to win the jackpot. As a result, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot in the “time limit mode” can be further improved.

  In the “Time Limit Mode”, as in the previous case, the big win lottery with one of the two winning probabilities (double standard) of the winning probability A in which the probability changing function is not activated and the winning probability B in which the probability changing function is activated. Processing is executed. Then, in order to increase the expectation that the jackpot lottery process is executed with the winning probability B in the “time limit mode”, when the second short open jackpot is won, the “time limit mode” is entered. However, such as the second short-opening jackpot, “the hit where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” is recognized by the player as having a low value as a jackpot There is a need to improve this.

  In this regard, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when the first short-opening jackpot is won, which is “a winning where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” Shifts to the promotion mode in which the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probabilistic jackpot (a so-called probability fluctuation function and a so-called short-time function, which is the most valuable hit for the player) I am doing so. In such a promotion mode, the so-called probable jackpot is more likely to be won than in the above-mentioned external normal gaming state (in this sense, the winning probabilities are higher when viewed only with the so-called probable jackpot). It can be said that the mode has been changed to a high winning probability), and the player's main purpose is to shift to such a promotion mode, rather than simply winning per winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. The game will be aimed at winning the first short open big hit. As a result, the value of “a winning where the player is not prompted to pay out a certain amount of game balls despite winning the jackpot” has been increased, including the case where the second short opening jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the player does not win a winning ball that prompts a certain amount of game balls to be paid out. That is, it is possible to provide not only a monotonous game such as how many winnings can be won per player who is required to pay out a certain amount of game balls, but also a new game.

  By the way, in the “time limit mode”, in the external normal game state A, the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit is won, and the long open based on the second long open big hit or the third long open big hit is won. There is a case where the player enters a normal game state after the jackpot game is over. At this time, the sum of the number of changes in the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game until entering the “time limit mode” and the number of changes in the special symbol in the “time limit mode” may be less than 50 times. is there. For example, if a special symbol change display is made 10 times before entering the “time limit mode” after the jackpot game ends, the “time limit mode” The sum of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates until it enters the time and the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the “time limit mode” is approximately 25 times. In such a case, when the “time limit mode” ends, the image displayed on the effect display device 115 regardless of whether the game is in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B is shown in FIG. The image becomes one of (a) to (c) and does not return to FIG. 80 again. As a result, in the external normal game state A, the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot was won, and the long open jackpot game based on the win for the second long open jackpot or the third long open jackpot has ended. When entering the “time limit mode” from this gaming state, in the external normal gaming state A, the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won, and the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won. A process for storing the number of special symbol fluctuations in the gaming state after the long open jackpot game based on the winning is not required, and the load on the CPU 832 mounted on the display device control board 816 can be reduced.

[About promotion mode]
Next, game contents in the external advantageous game state B, that is, the “promotion mode” will be described. Winning the jackpot without the operation of the extension extension function (that is, the jackpot where the extension extension function does not operate after the jackpot game ends even if winning in the special symbol lottery process in the external normal gaming state A) Even so, in the “promotion mode”, the opening extension function is activated after the jackpot game ends.

  In addition, as described above, the “promotion mode” means that when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open big hit or the first short open big hit in the external normal gaming state, the first long open big hit This is a gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game based on the first short-opening jackpot or the short-opening jackpot game based on the first short-opening jackpot (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B). In the promotion mode entered after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot, and the promoted mode entered after the short open jackpot game based on the first short open jackpot, the effect display device 115 The background image displayed on is different.

  Here, FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the effect display device 115 when the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot is finished and the player enters the promotion mode. 82, in the promotion mode after the long open jackpot game based on the first long open jackpot is over, the effect display device 115 displays a diagram reminiscent of outer space as a background image. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) is displayed by being attached to a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and the front and back surfaces are alternately displayed instead of scroll fluctuation. As a result, rotational fluctuations that change the design are performed.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the effect display device when the short open big hit game based on the first short open big hit ends and then the player enters the promotion mode. According to FIG. 83, in the promotion mode after the short open jackpot game based on the first short open jackpot is over, the effect display device 115 displays the character silhouette on the dark background image (the character silhouette is a decorative pattern). Since it is displayed behind 1153, it is difficult to see in FIG. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol rows 1153a to 1153c) is displayed on a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and scrolls.

  Thus, the image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the “promotion mode” is significantly different from the image displayed on the effect display device 115 in the external normal gaming state. In particular, since the display method of each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is remarkably different, the “elevation mode” is in a special state different from the external normal game state. Can be grasped. Furthermore, since the operation of the pair of movable pieces 606 is controlled in the promotion mode, the player can grasp that the gaming state is advantageous to him / herself.

  By the way, when it is in the external normal game state, if the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process, the long open jackpot game based on the second long open jackpot or the second short open jackpot is based. The gaming state after the short opening big hit game is ended becomes an external normal gaming state B that does not involve the operation of the opening extension function. In addition, when the third long open jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process in the external normal game state A, the game state after the long open big hit game ends is the external normal game state A.

  However, in the “promotion mode”, even if the second long open jackpot or the second short open big hit is won in the special symbol lottery process, the long open big hit game or the second short open based on the second long open big hit The gaming state after the short-opening jackpot game based on the jackpot ends is an external advantageous gaming state B that involves the operation of both the probability changing function and the opening extension function. That is, even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153 a to 1153 c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are not only specific symbols but also semi-specific symbols, the “promotion mode” after the jackpot game ends. (In other words, it becomes a probable open extended game). Here, among the symbols 1 to 8, the number of specific symbols is two (3 and 7) and the number of quasi-specific symbols is four (1, 2, 5 and 6). It seems that “promotion mode” continues with a probability of 6 minutes. Thereby, game willingness improves and the fall of interest can be suppressed. However, even if the result of the special symbol lottery processing is the first long open big hit or the second long open big hit, as in the case of the external normal gaming state A, the effect display device 115 stops at a non-specific symbol double eye. It may be displayed.

  In addition, when in the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B, the player can clearly grasp that the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first long open jackpot before the jackpot game is executed. Is only when the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with a specific design of a double-eyed eye. However, when in the promotion mode, the special display lottery processing result is displayed even if the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with a specific design of a double eye, or is stopped and displayed with a semi-specific design of a double design. The player can clearly grasp that the first long open jackpot is executed before the jackpot game is executed. That is, if the promotion mode is in progress, the promotion mode (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B) is executed again after the jackpot game is executed even if the effect display device 115 is stopped and displayed with the semi-specific symbols. It becomes. Therefore, for the player, among the decorative symbols 1 to 8, not only “3” and “7” as specific symbols but also “1”, “2”, “5” and “ The promotion mode is continued even when the display is stopped at any of the decorative symbols of “6”. In this way, once entering the promotion mode, a loop state occurs in which it is easy to enter the promotion mode again after the jackpot game has been executed, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the promotion mode. In addition, once entering the promotion mode, it has a very large explosive power, so the player will play with the expectation to enter the promotion mode even in the normal gaming state, and only in the promotion mode In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the normal gaming state.

  In the “elevation mode”, internally, the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, and the number of random numbers per third long open jackpot for the random number width of the above-described design random numbers Based on the number of random numbers per first short-open big jackpot and the number of random numbers per second short-open big jackpot, the probability that the “promotion mode” will continue after the jackpot game ends is approximately three-fifths. In this sense, the second long open jackpot has a function (in this way) in the external normal game state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the external normal game state becomes the highest per-share distribution rate. While maintaining the specifications as a gaming machine), in the external advantageous gaming state, the function is set so that the per-share distribution ratio that triggers the transition to the external advantageous gaming state becomes the highest per-share distribution ratio. It can also be said that the reinforcement is to increase the continuity of the chance gaming state advantageous to the player.

  By the way, also in this “promotion mode”, when the third long open jackpot is won, after the jackpot game corresponding to the third long open jackpot is over, the above-mentioned external normal game state A is entered. Will be migrated. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, prior to the transition to the external normal gaming state A, the second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probability variation jackpot (awakening gaming state), and a so-called probability variation function and a so-called time reduction. The function is shifted to the “retraction mode” in which only the short-time function is activated among the functions for a predetermined retraction period. In other words, in this case, even if the third long open jackpot is won in the “promotion mode”, the predetermined pullback period after the jackpot game corresponding to the selection is performed is a so-called probability variable jackpot (so-called probability fluctuation jackpot). If it is only the winning probability of the function and the so-called short-time function, and the winning value of the highest value for the player), it has a probability that is more advantageous to the player than when it is in the above-mentioned external normal gaming state A The lottery process for the jackpot is performed. Therefore, when the “promotion mode” ends, it is suitably suppressed that the interest of the game is suddenly lowered. In addition, the “retraction mode” of this embodiment is configured as an external advantageous game state A with the operation of the opening extension function (the probability changing function is not activated). Further, in this “retraction mode”, the number of symbols constituting each symbol row 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbol 1153 is eight, whereas the specific symbol (3, 7) and the quasi-specific symbol (1, 2, Since the number of 5 and 6) is 6, the visual probability that the “promotion mode” will continue is 3/4. Thereby, it can have a big expectation with respect to continuing "elevation mode", and can suppress the fall of interest.

  In this way, while in the external normal gaming state, the expectation to enter the “elevation mode” is relatively low, but once entering the “elevation mode”, the so-called continuous change in the expectation increases and the interest is great. Enhanced. Moreover, in terms of probability, if you win three times in the jackpot in the special symbol lottery in the external normal gaming state A, one of them will be a jackpot to enter the “promotion mode” (however, in the visual one quarter), The conditions for entering the “promotion mode” are not so severe for the player. In other words, if the conditions for entering the “elevation mode” are severe, the “elevation mode” is far away unless the player is a high-skilled so-called advanced player. Some players feel that way. However, if it is possible to enter the “promotion mode” with a probability of one out of three times, anyone will feel that there is an opportunity to enter the “promotion mode”, and the “promotion mode” will be familiar Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the conventional short opening with probability variation (so-called sudden probability variation), the prize ball is not paid out and only the function of the probability variation function is provided, but rather, the player can obtain a lot of prize balls. I sometimes felt disappointed that I failed to win. In that regard, in the first short opening jackpot of the present embodiment, after the short opening jackpot game based on the first short opening jackpot is completed, the mode shifts to the “promotion mode”. In the “promotion mode”, not only the operation of the probability changing function is given, but also when the second long opening jackpot is won, the external advantageous gaming state B is executed after the jackpot game ends (that is, the second long opening) The jackpot is given the same benefits as the first long open jackpot). In other words, the first short opening jackpot of this embodiment functions as a “perception awakening” that transforms the second long opening jackpot into a first long opening jackpot that has a greater benefit to the player. Therefore, the player can expect a large profit when winning the first short opening jackpot, and does not feel the disappointment as when winning per conventional short opening with probability change.

[Retraction mode]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the “promotion mode” is finished, the “promotion mode” can be pulled back with a high probability until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a specified value. Mode "exists. The specified value is the number of times the opening extension function is activated (for example, 100 times).

  Specifically, in the case of the external advantageous gaming state A, in the special symbol lottery process, if one of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit is won, The “elevation mode” can be pulled back again. That is, in this embodiment, the state in which the opening extension function is activated is a state (awakening gaming state) in which the gaming value as the second long opening jackpot is different. And based on the number of random numbers per first long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per second long open jackpot, the number of random numbers per first short open jackpot, and the number of second short open jackpots for the random number width of the design random number described above In this “Pullback Mode”, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery process, the probability that you can pull back the “Promotion Mode” is about three times if the jackpot game is executed five times. It is. That is, the lottery process for the jackpot so as to be more advantageous to the player than when in the external normal gaming state (in this embodiment, a series of processes including the process of determining the winning type according to the design random number) Will be done.

  In this embodiment, when the third long open jackpot is won as a result of the lottery process for the jackpot during the “retraction mode”, a special symbol is played after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed. The “elevation mode” is again shifted (extended) to the “retraction mode” in which the “elevation mode” can be pulled back with a high probability until the number of fluctuations reaches a specified value. Also at this time, the specified value is, for example, 100 times.

  Here, FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device in the “retraction mode”. In this “retraction mode”, the stage space is displayed as a background image on the effect display device 115, as shown in FIG. In addition, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is displayed on a card-like display on which a character is drawn, as in the promotion mode. As a result, even in this pull-back mode, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there is a special state unlike the external normal gaming state. Note that the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 (symbol sequence 1153a to 1153c) is scrolled differently from the promotion mode.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is externally played as a single external normal game state both in the external normal game state A and in the external normal game state B. It is grasped by the person. In other words, if the jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state A, it is certain that the probability changing function will be activated after the jackpot game is over. Only when winning short open jackpot. Therefore, in the external normal gaming state, it seems that the probability of winning the jackpot with the activation of the probability variation function is relatively low, but once entering the “elevation mode”, the probability of winning the jackpot with the operation of the probability variation function is increased. I can feel it. Therefore, in the external normal gaming state, the game is played with expectation for the “promotion mode” that can give a large profit to the player, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, when winning the first short open jackpot or the second short open jackpot, the game balls given as prize balls to the player while winning the big jackpot in the special symbol lottery process The amount is extremely small as compared to the case where the first long opening jackpot, the second long opening jackpot or the third long opening jackpot is won. Accordingly, when winning the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot, the probability changing function is activated after the short opening jackpot game based on the winning of the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot ends. Even if you are convinced, the player will feel lost.

  However, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when winning the first short opening jackpot that can be convinced that it is the first short opening jackpot in the special symbol lottery process (that is, it can be sure that the specific condition is not satisfied) The second long open jackpot functions as a so-called probability change jackpot (awakening gaming state), and enters a “promotion mode” in which both a so-called probability change function and a so-called time-shortening function are activated. Therefore, even if the player wins the jackpot type (first short-open jackpot) with a small amount of game balls given to the player as a prize ball, a large number of game balls are subsequently awarded to the player as a prize ball. Since it can be granted, rather than the feeling that winning the first short open jackpot is a loss, the expectation that the jackpot game continues to change will exceed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the “elevation mode”, the “elevation mode” continues even if the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153 a to 1153 c) displayed on the effect display device 115 are not only specific symbols but also quasi-specific symbols. It seems that “promotion mode” continues with a probability of three quarters. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the feeling that it is a loss to win the first short open jackpot, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the result of the special symbol lottery process in the “promotion mode” after the first short open jackpot game is ended is the third long open jackpot game, the long open jackpot game based on the third long open jackpot game ends. After that, it enters the “retraction mode”. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol lottery process is the first short-open big hit game, the probability that the game ball as the award ball is returned to the external normal game state A is hardly given to the player. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the feeling that winning the 1st short open jackpot is a loss, and to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot game will continue, suppressing the decrease in interest it can.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment wins any of the first long open big hit, the second long open big hit, the first short open big hit, and the second short open big hit in the “elevation mode”, After the jackpot game based on is completed, the gaming state becomes the “promotion mode” again (that is, both the probability changing function and the opening extension function are activated). Further, in the “pulling back mode”, if the winning combination of the first long opening jackpot, the second long opening jackpot, the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot is won, the “promotion mode” can be pulled back again. This is to confirm whether or not the opening extension function is activated when the jackpot is won, and if the opening extension function is activated, the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is determined regardless of the type of the winning jackpot. This is because an internal control process such as activating the open extension function is performed after the execution. That is, the CPU 711 mounted on the main control board 710 can provide the “elevation mode” and the “retraction mode” only by confirming whether or not the opening extension function is activated when the big win is won. Thus, it is possible to provide an “elevation mode” and a “retraction mode” while suppressing an increase in the load on the CPU 711, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in variations. On the other hand, if the opening extension function is not activated when winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery process, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, in the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the winning jackpot is executed It is determined whether the open extension function is activated.

[Variation time of special symbols]
By the way, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different variation times depending on whether or not the opening extension function is activated. In addition, when the opening extension function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed depends on the counter value (the so-called first reserved number) by the first special symbol hold counter 903. Similarly, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the second special symbol differs depending on the counter value (so-called second reserved number) by the second special symbol hold counter 913.

  Specifically, in the external normal game state in which the release extension function does not operate, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is the counter value (first special symbol hold counter 903 at the start of variation) If the counter value after the counter value is subtracted with the start of the change) is 3, it is 3000 msec. If the counter value is 2, it is 7000 msec, and if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 11000 msec. In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is also the counter value (the variation is started by the second special symbol hold counter 913 at the start of the variation, similarly to the variation time of the first special symbol. Accordingly, if the counter value after subtraction of the counter value is 3, it is 3000 msec. If the counter value is 2, it is 7000 msec, and if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 11000 msec. Note that the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case where the high expectation effect is performed is determined by the mode (type) of the high expectation effect.

  On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state A, external advantageous gaming state B) in which the opening extension function is activated, the variation time of the first special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is the first variation time at the beginning of the variation. If the counter value by the 1 special symbol hold counter 903 (the counter value after the counter value is subtracted as the change starts) is 2 or 3, it is 2000 msec. If the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 7000 msec. In addition, the variation time of the second special symbol when the high expectation effect is not performed is also the counter value (the variation is started by the second special symbol hold counter 913 at the start of the variation, similarly to the variation time of the first special symbol. Accordingly, if the counter value after the counter value is subtracted is 2 or 3, it is 2000 msec. If the counter value is 0 or 1, it is 7000 msec.

  Thus, the special symbol variation time is significantly different between when the open extension function is activated and when it is not activated. Further, since the variation time of the special symbol can be grasped externally, the player determines whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to himself / herself based on the variation time of the special symbol. Accordingly, the player's willingness to continue the game is improved in the external advantageous gaming state, while the willingness to continue the game may be lost in the external normal gaming state. In addition, there are cases where the player is in an external normal game state and an internal advantageous game state as in the external normal game state B. Even in such a game state, the player is not advantageous to himself / herself. It will be judged that it is a gaming state. At this time, an unexpected jackpot can occur, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol-corresponding symbol corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153, the variation time of the special symbol-corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002, the variation time of the special symbol, Is about the same time.

  In other words, in the external advantageous game state in which the opening extension function is activated, when the high expectation effect is not performed, the variation time of the decorative symbol 1153 is also determined by the number of lottery processes that are put on hold. More specifically, when the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is large, the time required for the variable display effect for the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is small (7000 ms). Thus, the variable display effect of the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is performed in a shortened variable display mode of less than “½” (2000 ms). When such a shortened variation display mode is employed, even if the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to variation display effects, for example, twice, when the number of lottery processes is small (counter value is 0 or 1) It is possible to shorten the time required for the first variation display effect for one time (7000 ms). In addition, if the player is informed that a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to variable display effects in the above-described shortened variable display mode, the player is expected to have a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. It is also possible.

[Direction display mode]
Next, representative ones of the effect display modes (including the variation pattern of the decorative symbols 1153) according to the lottery result of the special symbols executed in the effect display device 115 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to the drawings.

  In the “effect display mode”, an effect in which a character imitating a person sings music (hereinafter referred to as a character singing effect) may be executed. In the “character singing effect”, an image (including a moving image) representing the singing operation of the character is displayed on the effect display device 115 and various music pieces (here, music A to music G) are displayed from the speakers 144 and 341. Is output as audio.

  In addition, the “music piece” in the present embodiment includes three parts of an introduction part (intro part), a first half part, and a second half part, and one piece of music is configured as a whole by combining the parts. Specifically, the “introduction section (intro section)” is a musical tone at the beginning of a song, and makes the player conceive the title of the song and the subsequent musical tone. The “first half” is the musical sound of the part following the intro part of the music, and includes at least the first half of the main part (so-called rust part) of the music. The “second half” is the musical sound of the part following the first half of the music, and includes at least the second half of the main part (so-called chorus part) of the music.

  In the present embodiment, the “music piece” is composed of an introduction part (intro part) and a main part (rust part), but may be a series of music from the introduction part to the end of the song. In addition, “musical sound” means a part of music. Accordingly, only the introduction part (intro part), only the first half part, and only the second half part correspond to musical sounds. Further, the musical sound is not limited to one phrase, and may be a plurality of phrases.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an external normal game state (external normal game state A or external normal game state B) in which the release extension function is not activated, and an external advantageous game state (external advantage game) in which the release extension function is activated. In the state A or the external advantageous game state B), the effect display mode (including the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153) accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is greatly different. Therefore, hereinafter, the external normal gaming state and the external advantageous gaming state are divided and each effect display mode will be specifically described.

[Variation pattern table]
The effect display mode based on the lottery result of special symbols (pending lottery) is a variation pattern (specifically, determined in the above-described variation pattern setting process (see FIGS. 67, 68, 70 and 72). The variation pattern determined based on the selected variation pattern table is executed. Therefore, in the following, details of the effect display mode based on each variation pattern will be described with reference to the variation pattern name and variation number defined in each variation pattern table shown in FIG. 69, FIG. 71 and FIG. I will explain it.

  By the way, as apparent from the respective variation pattern setting processes shown in FIGS. 68, 70 and 72 and the respective variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 69, 71 and 73, the operation of the internal probability variation function is performed. Regardless of the presence or absence, each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table depending on whether or not the external open extension function is activated. That is, even if the internal probability changing function is activated, the variation pattern that can be selected differs depending on whether the external open / extend function is activated. Specifically, even in the external normal gaming state A in which the probability changing function is activated, the opening extension function is not activated, and therefore, the same variation pattern as that in the external normal gaming state B in which the probability varying function is not activated is selected. Further, in the external advantageous game state A in which the probability changing function is activated, since the open extension function is in operation, the same variation pattern as that in the external advantageous game state B in which the probability changing function is not activated is selected.

  In addition to the presence / absence of the opening extension function (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state), the winning types (first long opening big hit, second long opening big hit, third long opening big hit, first short Each table (each variation pattern) is selected from each variation pattern table, depending on whether the opening big hit, the second short opening big hit, or the specific condition is satisfied. For this reason, an optimum variation pattern corresponding to the winning type is selected from each variation pattern table.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 70, in the external advantageous gaming state, when the winning type is the second long open big hit, the variation pattern is selected in the same manner as the first long open big hit, so the second long open Even if it is a big hit, the probability variation confirmation table (A5) can be selected. On the other hand, in the external normal gaming state, when the winning type is the second long open jackpot, the variation pattern is selected differently from the first long open jackpot. That is, the probability variation confirmation table (A3) is not selected for the second long open jackpot. Note that the probability variation confirmation table (A3) and the probability variation confirmation table (A5) are tables in which only a variation pattern for deriving the confirmation of the first long open jackpot is selected. In other words, as described above, in the external advantageous gaming state (promotion mode and pullback mode), the second long open jackpot is handled as being promoted to the first long open jackpot, so such table configuration and variation pattern selection are adopted. ing.

[Low expectation fluctuation when the open extension function is not activated]
First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “low expectation variation” that is the most basic effect display mode in the external normal gaming state in which the opening extension function does not operate will be described. This “low-expectation deviating fluctuation” is a mode in which a deviation is derived as a lottery result without a high-expected production such as the occurrence of reach.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an effect display mode when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device in the external normal gaming state. That is, FIG. 85 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative pattern 1153 before the start of variation, FIG. 85 (B) is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during variation, and FIG. 85 (C) is a variation number. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a stop mode of the decorative symbol 1153 based on “normal variation”, “shortening variation 1”, or “shortening variation 2” of 1 to 3, FIG. 85D is a diagram showing a screen for deriving the establishment of reach; FIG. 85 (E) is a diagram illustrating a variation of the decorative symbol 1153 in a state where reach has been established.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (A), the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the change starts. Further, for example, in the hold display area 1150, the hold storage display portions 1151a to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b are in the second display mode or the third display mode, and the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (first It is shown that the sum of the counter value by one special symbol hold counter 903) and the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (count value by the second special symbol hold counter 913) is six. In the following, according to the holding order by each special symbol lottery means 900, 910, the symbol variation based on the lottery suspension by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (variation display of the first special symbol) and the second special symbol lottery means 910 Symbol variation based on the lottery suspension (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), when the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol In the column 1153c, the symbols are changed in a manner that scrolls in the vertical direction (more specifically, in the direction from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player), and in the middle symbol column 1153b, the symbols are switched on the spot. Variations are made in the manner. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b. If the variation corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding symbol 1000 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation. On the other hand, if the variation corresponds to the second special symbol, the second special symbol corresponding symbol 1002 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation.

  Note that the number of holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is decremented by 1 due to the start of the change of the special symbol. Here, each display mode in each of the hold storage display units 1151b to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b is the previous one. The on-hold storage display units 1151a to 1151d and 1152a are shifted and displayed. Further, the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is set to the first display mode or non-display. As a result, in the hold display area 1150, it is shown that the hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or the hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is digested to be a total of five.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the stop symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are stopped at different symbols that are completely unrelated, and an “out” is derived. The display mode is “low-expected fluctuation” in the present embodiment. This “low-expected fluctuation” corresponds to any one of “normal fluctuation” of fluctuation number 1, “shortening fluctuation 1” of fluctuation number 2, and “shortening fluctuation 2” of fluctuation number 3.

  As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not the high-expected effect is performed when the result of the special symbol lottery process is out of order and the specific condition is not satisfied when the opening extension function is inactive. Is drawn (high-expected production lottery). Next, when the high-expected production lottery is not won (in other words, when “execution of a normal off-effect” is selected), a “continuous production twice out” of a variation number 24 described later is executed. Whether or not is drawn (continuous production lottery). Then, when the continuous production lottery is not won, the “low expectation fluctuation” is executed for the fluctuation time determined according to the number of the lottery holds.

  More specifically, when “decrease in low expectation” is performed for the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the first special symbol, the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (counter by the first special symbol hold counter 903) If the value) is 0 or 1 after the pending digestion, the “normal fluctuation (variation time: 12000 ms)” of the variation number 1 is selected and executed, and if it is 2 after the suspended digestion, the variation number 2 “Shortened fluctuation 1 (fluctuation time: 7000 ms)” is selected and executed, and if there are three after the suspended digestion, “shortened fluctuation 2 (fluctuation time: 3000 ms)” is selected and executed. Even when the “decreased low expectation variation” is performed on the decorative symbol 1153 corresponding to the second special symbol, the lottery holding number by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (count value by the second special symbol holding counter 913) is used. Similarly, the variation pattern is selected and executed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, in the external normal game state where the opening extension function does not operate, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play, if you win the continuous production lottery without winning the high expectation production lottery, As the “normally off effect”, “continuous effect twice off” of the variation number 24 is executed. Further, when the lottery for the continuous effect is not won, any one of “normal fluctuation” with a variation number 1, “shortening variation 1” with a variation number 2 and “shortening variation 2” with a variation number 3 is selected as the “unusual effect”. Is executed according to the number of reserved special symbols. As the number of reserved special symbols increases, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected, which suppresses the generation of so-called invalid spheres and prevents the occurrence of a state in which all of the special symbol reservations are digested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern of variation numbers 4 to 23 is selected and executed in the external normal game state in which the release extension function does not operate, the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same. 85D, the effect display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach. And in the state where reach is established as shown in FIG. 85 (E), only the middle symbol row 1153b of the decorative symbols 1153 fluctuates, and the symbol variation also continues in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Executed. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

[Music reach production when the open extension function is not activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a “music reach effect” that is an effect display mode with reach when the external normal gaming state is executed will be described. This “music reach production” is a mode in which a win or miss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach production using a part or all of a predetermined music.

  After the reach notification is made as described above (see FIG. 85D), the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the A song (see FIG. 85E) and the speaker 144. From 341, the introduction section of the A musical piece is output by voice. After the singing effect using the introduction section of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “off” is derived. The aspect corresponds to the variation number 4 “A music reach short out”. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in the same symbols as the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “big hit” (in detail, The effect display mode derived from winning the first to third long open big hits) corresponds to “A music reach / short hit” of the variation number 5. As described above, when the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped, the symbol variation in the special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002 is also stopped, and the lottery result of the special symbol indicated by the decorative symbol 1153 is the special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002. It is also notified by the stop symbol at.

  Here, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed, the middle symbol row 1153b is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, and “disconnection” is derived. However, when the symbol variation in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 is continuously performed, the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped. Then, the variation of the middle symbol row 1153b is resumed from the state in which the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, and the singing effect of the character is continuously executed in the effect display device 115, and the first half of the A musical piece is output from the speakers 144 and 341. Are continuously output from the introduction unit. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the A music piece is executed corresponds to “A music reach long out” of the variation number 6. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the A music piece is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is equivalent to the “A music reach long win” of the variation number 7. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music piece is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the performance is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output audio from the introduction unit so that the main part (first half part and second half part) of the A musical piece is continuous from the introduction part. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the main part of the A music piece is executed corresponds to “A music reach / super long out” of the variation number 8. On the other hand, after the singing production using the main part of the A music piece is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is equivalent to the variation number 9 “A music reach / very long” To do.

  Next, during the performance of the singing using the A-music introduction section, the effect display device 115 switches to and displays the introduction screen for B-music without stopping the symbol variation in the middle symbol row 1153b. At the same time, there is a case where the introduction section of the B music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 instead of the A music (music switching effect to the B music). Further, after the music switching effect using the B music introduction section is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to execute the singing effect of the character unique to the B music, and the speakers 144 and 341 transmit the B music. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the B music is executed corresponds to “B music reach / normal out” of the variation number 10. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the B music is performed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “B music reach / normal win” of the variation number 11. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the B music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the performance is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output sound so that the latter half of the B music is continued from the first half. An effect display mode in which “delay” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the B music is executed corresponds to “B music reach / development failure” of the variation number 12. On the other hand, after the singing production using the second half of the B music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “B music reach / per development” of the variation number 13. .

  Next, while the music switching effect using the introduction part of the B music is being executed, the effect display device 115 switches and displays the introduction screen to the C music without stopping the symbol variation of the middle symbol row 1153b. In addition, there is a case where the introduction part of the C music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 instead of the B music (music switching effect to the C music). Furthermore, after the music switching effect using the C music introduction unit is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to execute the singing effect of the character unique to the C music, and the speakers 144 and 341 generate the C music effect. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the C music is executed corresponds to “C music reach / normal out” of the variation number 14. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the C music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “C music reach / normal win” of the variation number 15. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the C music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the effect is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output the sound so that the latter half of the C music continues from the first half. The effect display mode in which “disappear” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the C music is executed corresponds to “C music reach / development failure” of the variation number 16. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the latter half of the C music is performed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “C music reach / per development” of the variation number 17. .

  Next, while the music switching effect using the introduction unit of the C music is being executed, the effect display device 115 switches and displays the introduction screen to the D music without stopping the symbol variation of the middle symbol row 1153b. In addition, there is a case where the introduction portion of D music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 instead of C music (music switching effect to D music). Further, after the music switching effect using the D music introduction unit is executed, the effect display device 115 continues to perform the character singing effect unique to the D music, and the speakers 144 and 341 transmit the D music. Audio may be output so that the first half part is continuous from the introduction part. Then, the effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the D music is executed corresponds to “D music reach / normal out” of the variation number 18. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the D music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to the “D music reach / normal win” of the variation number 19. .

  On the other hand, after the singing effect using the first half of the D music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the change of the middle symbol sequence 1153b is resumed, and the effect display device 115 sings the character. While the effect is continuously executed, the speakers 144 and 341 may output sound so that the latter half of the D music is continued from the first half. The effect display mode in which “depart” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the D music is executed corresponds to “D music reach / development failure” of the variation number 20. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of the D music is executed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” corresponds to “D music reach / per development” of the variable number 21. .

  After the reach notification (see FIG. 85D), the singing effect of the character unique to the G music is suddenly displayed on the effect display device 115 without performing the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music. As a result, the G music may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 as sound. Then, the effect display mode in which “off” is derived after the singing effect using the G music is executed corresponds to “G music reach out” of the variation number 22. On the other hand, after the singing effect using the G music is executed, scroll fluctuations (so-called full rotation fluctuations) are performed in a so-called double-eyed state in which the symbols in the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c are all in the same symbol. The effect display mode from which it is derived that “big hit” is won later corresponds to “G music reach / per full rotation” of the variation number 23.

  In this way, in the “music reach production” when the open extension function of the present embodiment is not operated, each reach production develops in stages (specifically, the variation time of special symbols is extended). Thus, each of the A to D music pieces can be output as a part continuous with the introduction part, the first half part, and the second half part. And as each part of A to D music is continuously output (that is, the singing effect of each music continues), the degree of expectation of winning the “big hit” is increased. Yes. Therefore, the player can enjoy the reach production while thinking that the singing production of each of the A to D music pieces is continued for a longer time, and the decrease in the interest is suppressed.

  In addition, in the “music reach production” when the open extension function is not activated according to the present embodiment, the degree of expectation that the “big hit” is won in the order of A song, B song, C song, and D song among the songs. It is configured to be high. Therefore, the player can perform the music switching effect to the B music when the reach occurs or the singing effect using the introduction part of the A music is performed, and further the music to the C music or the D music. Since the reach effect is watched while expecting the switching effect to be performed, a decrease in interest is suppressed.

[Continuous production n times when the open extension function is not activated]
Here, as described above, the continuous effect is that the special symbol display 84 and 86 is variably displayed only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. In other words, it is an effect that appears as if the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 have been subjected to a variable display effect multiple times. In other words, the effect lottery means 960 of the peripheral control board 810 suggests the result of the lottery process to the player by performing the effect control related to the continuous effect. It should be noted that after the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a variable manner over a plurality of times, it is suggested that the winning symbol is hit or missed by a combination of stop symbols.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external normal gaming state is executed, the effect display that seems to have been derived from the winning or coming off after the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in multiple variations. The “continuous production n times production” which is an aspect will be described.

  First, similarly to the above description, the decoration symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of variation (see FIG. 85A). From this state, the variation display effect for the decoration symbol 1153 is assigned to the variation number 2 described above. The simulation is executed by simulating “shortening variation 1” (7000 ms) (see FIG. 85B). Then, each symbol row 1153a to 1153c is stopped and displayed with a different symbol, and "displacement" is derived. However, the stop display at this time is in a temporary stop (interval) state, and the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 continue to display the variable symbols for the special symbol. And the fluctuation | variation of each symbol row | line | column 1153a-1153c is restarted from the state which this decoration symbol 1153 stopped temporarily. At this time, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is maintained without being subtracted. In the present embodiment, the temporary stop (interval) of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed for 1000 ms.

  Then, after the variation display effect for the decorative symbol 1153 is simulated again with the variation number 2 of “shortening variation 1” (7000 ms), each stop of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c is stopped. The variation in which the symbol stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated is equivalent to the above-described variation number 24 of “continuous effect twice off” (15000 ms). On the other hand, when the variation pattern of variation numbers 25-39 is selected and executed in the external normal gaming state where the release extension function does not operate, the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are the same. The effect display device 115 displays a screen for deriving reach (see FIG. 85D). Thereafter, a reach effect similar to the above-described “music reach effect” is executed based on various variation patterns.

  Thus, based on one hold related to the lottery result of the special symbol, the effect display mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is continuously performed twice is “continuous rendering”. It's called “Twice production”. In other words, during one variation of the special symbol based on one hold, the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed pseudo twice. Similarly, based on one hold related to the special symbol lottery result, the effect display mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 based on the “shortening variation 1” of the variation number 2 is performed three times in succession is “continuous production 3 "Direction".

  Specifically, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 6 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” is equivalent to the variable number 25 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / long miss” The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 7 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” corresponds to the variable number 26 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / long”. The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 9 is performed after the “continuous effect twice effect” corresponds to the variable number 27 “continuous effect twice / A music reach / super long hit”. Similarly, the effect display modes in which the reach effect similar to the change numbers 10 to 21 after the “continuous effect twice effect” is performed correspond to the change patterns of the change numbers 28 to 39, respectively. Further, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variation number 9 is performed after the “continuous effect 3 times effect” corresponds to the variation number 40 of “3 times continuous effect / A music reach / very long”. Similarly, the effect display modes in which the reach effect similar to the change numbers 10 to 21 is performed after the “continuous effect 3 times effect” correspond to the change patterns of the change numbers 41 to 52, respectively.

[Specific conditions when opening extension function is not activated, special effect per short hit]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect display mode that is executed when a specific condition is established in the external normal gaming state or when a short win (first short open big hit and second short open big hit) is won. The “specific condition establishment / short win special effect” will be described. The “special effect” is an effect display mode for deriving that a specific “win” is won in a special mode without going through the derivation of reach establishment by the decorative symbol 1153.

  86 and 87 are diagrams showing an effect display mode derived to the effect display device when a specific condition is established in the external normal game state or when a short open jackpot is won. That is, FIG. 86 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of variation of the decorative symbol, FIG. 86 (B) is a diagram illustrating an aspect during the variation of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 86 (C) is a diagram illustrating the ranking board. FIG. 86D is a diagram showing a branch effect using the image, and FIG. 86D is a diagram showing a branch effect in which a character's costume is converted. FIG. 87 (A) is a diagram showing a branching effect in which the character's costume is converted following FIG. 86 (D), and FIG. 87 (B) is an effect in which the character's costume is converted into a dress (white). 87 is a diagram illustrating an example, FIG. 87C is a diagram illustrating an effect screen in the time limit mode, and FIG. 87D is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a character's costume is converted into a dress (red). (E) is a diagram showing an effect screen in the promotion mode, FIG. 87 (F) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a character's costume is converted into a space suit, and FIG. 87 (G) is a winner of the jackpot. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation screen to derive.

  First, similarly to the above description, the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the start of the change (see FIG. 86A), and the change of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed from this state (see FIG. 86B). . Then, while the decoration symbol 1153 is changing, the effect display device 115 displays an image imitating the ranking board by switching to the normal background image, as shown in FIG. 86 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 86 (D) and 87 (A), the effect display device 115 provides an effect display in which the character's costume is converted into one of a plurality of patterns of costumes on the stage, After that, the decorative symbol 1153 (special symbol-corresponding symbol 1000, 1002) is stopped and displayed in the form of “out”. Then, the subsequent mode is derived by the costume finally worn by the character by the effect display shown in FIGS. 86 (D) and 87 (A).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), when the character's costume is converted into a dress (white) by the effects shown in FIG. 86 (D) and FIG. Corresponds to “specific conditions established / per special variation”. This “specific condition establishment / per special variation” is an effect display mode that is selected and executed when the special condition is established in the special symbol lottery process or when the second short-open big win is won. Therefore, after the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 based on the establishment of the specific condition or the winning of the second short opening jackpot, as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), when the costume of the character is converted into a dress (red) by the effects shown in FIG. 86 (D) and FIG. 87 (A), “2R jackpot / It corresponds to “per special variation”. The “2R jackpot / special variation hit” is an effect display mode that is selected and executed when the first short opening jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery process. Therefore, after the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 500 based on the first short open jackpot, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the gaming state shifts to the above-described “promotion mode”.

  As described above, in the “specific condition establishment / short hit special effect” at the time of opening extension non-operation of the present embodiment, an effect display in a special mode different from the above-described normal variation, reach effect, and the like is performed. Then, the player can grasp that the specific condition is established or wins the short opening jackpot without depending on the stop symbol of the decorative design 1153, while the specific condition is fulfilled or the second short opening jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the “time limit mode” by not knowing which one has been won.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, “15R big hit / special change re-variation per” of the variation number 55 is provided as “special effect” different from other variation patterns other than “specific condition establishment / short hit special effect”. Yes. This "15R jackpot / special change per change" is a variation pattern that is determined to be won for the first long open jackpot, and has significance as a premier performance with a very low appearance rate.

  In the effect display mode based on the variation number 55 “15R big hit / special variation re-variation”, the same effect (see FIG. 69) as the variation number 53 “specific condition establishment / special variation re-variation per” is performed. In the effect display device 115, “off” is once derived by the decorative symbol 1153. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), when the costume of the character is converted into a space suit after the re-variation by the decorative design 1153, after the “big hit” is derived by the specific design, As shown in FIG. 87 (G), an effect screen for deriving winning of “big hit” is displayed.

  Thus, the variation number 55 “15R jackpot / special variation per variation” has the following significance as well as a mere premier effect. In other words, the variation modes of hits having the greatest value for the player (first long open big hit) and deviations (specific condition establishment) are very similar or identical to each other, so that they are once out ( The player can be given great surprise and joy by deriving that the first long open jackpot has been won by re-variation while discouraging the player that the specific condition was satisfied.

[Low-expectation fluctuation and double fluctuation effect when opening extension function is activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external advantageous gaming state is being executed, it is an effect display mode for deriving a disengagement as a lottery result without accompanying a high expectation effect. An explanation will be given of “off-change” and “twice-change effect” which is an effect display mode in which the “open extension extended / low expected off-change” is executed twice in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an effect display mode when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means or the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device in the external advantageous gaming state. That is, FIG. 88 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of variation, FIG. 88 (B) is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during variation, and FIG. 88 (C) is a variation number. FIG. 88 (D) is a diagram showing a stop mode or a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 1153 based on “Opening extension / normal fluctuation” and “Opening extension / shortening fluctuation” of FIGS. FIG. 88 (E) is a diagram showing the second mode), FIG. 88 (E) is a diagram showing a stop mode based on “during extended extension / twice out of fluctuation” of the decorative design 1153, and FIG. 88 (F) shows a special light emission effect. Figure.

  As described above, in the external advantageous game state (when the extended extension function is activated), the effect display device 115 displays the silhouette of the character on the dark background image and configures the decorative symbols 1153 (symbol columns 1153a to 1153c). Each symbol to be displayed is attached to a card-like display on which a character is drawn, and changes so that the front and back of the character appear alternately (however, scrolling changes in the pull-back mode). Thus, by adopting a display mode in which the decorative symbol 1153 and the background image are greatly different from the external normal game state (when the open extension function is not activated), the player can play the external advantageous game state (when the open extension function is activated). It is possible to clearly grasp that and to give a sense of superiority.

  First, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed before the change starts. Further, for example, in the hold display area 1150, the hold storage display portions 1151a to 1151d and 1152a to 1152b are in the second display mode or the third display mode, and the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (first It is shown that the total of the number of lots to be held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 913) is six. In the following, according to the holding order by each special symbol lottery means 900, 910, the symbol variation based on the lottery suspension by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (variation display of the first special symbol) and the second special symbol lottery means 910 Symbol variation based on the lottery suspension (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), when the variation of the decoration symbol 1153 is started in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the symbol columns 1153a to 1153c The variable display effect is performed in such a manner that each symbol is switched on the spot. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the stop symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are different symbols that are completely unrelated and stop at substantially the same timing, and “disconnect” occurs. The derived effect display form is “during extended opening / low expected fluctuation”. The “open extension / low expected deviation fluctuation” corresponds to the fluctuation number 56 “open extension extension / normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation number 57 “open extension extension / shortening fluctuation”. In the same way as described above, the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 are also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol 1153 after the symbol variation, and the lottery result of each special symbol is derived.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery process is not performed when the opening extension function is activated, whether or not to execute the effect display mode with the reach effect is selected (high expectation effect lottery). . Next, when the lottery is not won in the high expectation effect lottery, “open extension extended / low expectation fluctuation” is selected and executed according to the number of pending lotteries.

  More specifically, in the case of performing “open extension extended / low expected deviation fluctuation” for the first special symbol, the number of lottery holds by the first special symbol lottery means 900 (count value by the first special symbol hold counter 903) However, if it is 0 or 1 based on the post-pending digestion, the variable number 56 “During open extension / normal fluctuation” is selected and executed, and if it is 2 or 3 based on the post-pending digestion, the variation number 57 is selected. “Opening extended / shortening fluctuation” is selected and executed. The same applies to the case of performing “low-expected fluctuation when the opening extension function is activated” for the second special symbol based on the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 910 (counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 913). The variation pattern is selected and executed. Note that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter than that of the fluctuation number 56 “opening extension / shortening fluctuation” than the fluctuation number 56 “opening extension / normal fluctuation”. In addition, the variation number 56 “opening extension / normal variation” and the variation number 57 “opening extension / shortening variation” are both places where each symbol row 1153a to 1153c stops after the decorative symbol 1153 changes. In the variation number 56 of “open extension extended / normal variation”, the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b stop in this order, while the variation number 57 “open extension extended / shortening variation” 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b are different in that they stop almost simultaneously.

  As in the case of the external normal gaming state, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is decremented by 1 due to the start of the change of the special symbol. Each display mode is shift-displayed on each previous storage storage display unit 1151a to 1151d, 1152a. Further, the display mode of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is set to the first display mode or non-display. Thereby, in the hold display area 1150, one lottery hold by the first special symbol lottery means 900 or one lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 910 is digested, and the total number of these holds is five. Is shown.

  On the other hand, after the variation display of the decoration symbol 1153 based on the variation number 57 “during open extension / shortening variation” is performed (see FIG. 88 (B)), the symbol columns 1153a to 1153c are stopped and displayed with different symbols. Although “displacement” is derived (see FIG. 88 (C)), the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped (interval) in which the symbol variation in the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002 is continuously performed. (Such as “Opening extended, twice off”). In this case, as shown in FIG. 88D, the decoration pattern 1153 is changed again based on the “opening extended / shortening fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 57 from the state where the decoration symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the number of lottery holds shown in the hold display area 1150 is maintained without being subtracted. In the present embodiment, the temporary stop (interval) of the decorative symbol 1153 is executed for 1000 msec.

  Then, after the decoration pattern 1153 for the second time shown in FIG. 88 (D) is changed, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated. The fluctuation corresponds to the fluctuation number 58 “During opening extension / off twice fluctuation”. On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the opening extension function is activated, when the variation pattern with the variation numbers 59 to 96 is selected and executed, the “special light emission effect” shown in FIG. Is executed. This “special light emission effect” is an effect for deriving the occurrence of reach when the open extension function is activated, and in the effect display device 115, an image effect in which a plurality of lights extend radially from the center of the screen toward the outer edge. At the same time, various illuminations provided in the game effect unit 4 are controlled to emit light in conjunction with the image effect.

  Note that the variation number 58 “extended extension / twenty variation out” is a variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the external advantageous gaming state and the lottery of the high expectation effect lottery is won. It is. In other words, in the external advantageous game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out and the high-expected production lottery is won, the variation number 58 “Extended opening extended / Fluctuated twice” is selected. If it is done, reach will not be established and “displacement” will be derived.

  By the way, in the external normal game state in which the opening extension function does not operate, the probability that a continuous effect is performed when the jackpot is not won is set to be very low, as described above, 40/10500 to 40/15000. . On the other hand, in the external advantageous gaming state, the probability that a continuous effect (two-time fluctuation deviation) is performed when the jackpot is not won is set relatively high as 752/14000 as described above. In this way, by providing “twice out of fluctuation”, the continuous fluctuation of “out” is frequently performed in the external advantageous gaming state, and it seems that the fluctuation is performed without interruption of the lottery hold. it can. In particular, as shown in FIG. 73, the variation time when the result of the special symbol lottery in the external advantageous gaming state is out of range is greater than the variation time when the result of the special symbol lottery in the external normal gaming state is out of range. Short (assuming the number of holds is the same). Therefore, by increasing the frequency at which the continuous performance is performed in the external advantageous gaming state, compared to the frequency at which the continuous performance is performed in the external normal gaming state, it is possible to prevent the suspension from being interrupted and the variable display from being interrupted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the advantageous gaming state.

  By the way, in the external advantageous gaming state, every time a high-expected production lottery is won even though the special symbol lottery result is out, an effect display mode based on a variation pattern with a long variation time, such as establishment of reach, was performed. In such a case, the time required for the next lottery process after the lottery process is performed cannot be shortened, and the player can fully enjoy the merit (such as high lottery efficiency) in the external advantageous gaming state. It becomes impossible to feel (enjoy). In this regard, the possibility that the decorative display 1153 may be a continuous effect as if the variable display effect of the decorative symbol 1153 is performed a plurality of times during the period from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped is displayed. If so, it is possible to suggest that the player has a high expectation for the jackpot, even though it is a short time. In this way, if the direct performance is performed in such a way as to positively suggest the player with a high expectation degree to the jackpot, many lotteries will be made before the jackpot is won in the external advantageous game state. Even if processing must be performed, the interest of the game can be suitably maintained while maintaining the lottery efficiency. In other words, even if the high-expectation effect lottery is won, it is possible to make it appear that the shortening variation is being performed smoothly and quickly by making it possible to frequently select “twice out of fluctuation”.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (B) and 88 (D), a character imitating a UFO is approached from the back side of the screen by the effect display device 115 while the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a variable manner. It may be displayed in an enlarged manner (UFO effect). In FIG. 88B (first pseudo variation), it is suggested that the UFO effect is highly expected that the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 is continuously performed again without stopping the variation display of the special symbol. (That is, the degree of expectation that the “twice fluctuation effect” is performed increases). It should be noted that this UFO effect may be performed even though the above-described continuous effect is not performed (so-called “gase effect”). Further, in FIG. 88D (second pseudo variation), when this UFO effect is performed, it is shown that the degree of expectation that the “special light emission effect” will be executed thereafter is high (that is, reach occurs). Expectation increases). In other words, in the external advantageous gaming state of the present embodiment (when the extended extension function is activated), it is necessary that the “special light emission effect” is always performed via the “twice fluctuation effect” (and the jackpot is further increased). Derived condition). Therefore, when UFO effects are continuously generated, the degree of expectation that a jackpot is derived is increased, and the excitement of the player can be suppressed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the above-mentioned continuous effect may be performed without going through the UFO effect. That is, when continuous display is performed in such a manner, it can be difficult to detect that the “twice variation effect” is being performed as viewed from the player, and based on the “twice variation effect”. It becomes possible to make the pseudo two-time fluctuation appear to be different independent fluctuations (that is, fluctuations based on different lottery suspensions), so that the lottery efficiency can be improved. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect display mode with the reach effect is not selected by the lottery in the external advantageous game state (when the extension extension function is activated), “Open extension underway / low expected disappointment” As the “variation”, variation number 56 of “opening extension / normal variation” or variation number 57 of “opening extension / shortening variation” is executed according to the number of reserved special symbols. In view of the fact that the lottery hold tends to increase in the external advantageous game state, if the number of held balls for each special symbol is large, a variation pattern with a very short variation time will be selected. This can suppress the decrease in interest.

  On the other hand, if the suspension of the special symbol is promoted in the external advantageous gaming state, the suspension of each special symbol is completely digested, resulting in a period in which the decorative symbol 1153 is not displayed in a variable manner, leading to a decrease in interest. There is a fear. Therefore, by increasing the rate at which “Extended Opening / Twice Fluctuation” is selected and executed, it is possible to make the decorative symbol 1153 easily changeable regardless of the number of lottery reservations. The decrease can be suppressed.

  When the variation patterns with the variation numbers 59 to 96 are selected and executed, after the “special lighting effect”, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop at the same symbol and only the middle symbol row 1153b changes. At the same time, the symbol variation is continuously executed in each of the special symbol corresponding symbols 1000 and 1002. Then, as described below, reach effects based on various variation patterns are executed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the external advantageous gaming state is being executed, it is an effect display mode in which “open extension extended / low expected deviation fluctuation” is executed in a pseudo manner twice continuously. The description will be given below with reference to FIG. 89 regarding “extended extension and deviation twice fluctuation” (variation number 58). FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing the control mode when the effect control related to the above-mentioned “during opening extension / deviating twice fluctuation” is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), at the timing t1, the number of lottery processes in which the hold is released and put on hold is, for example, “4” to “3”. If it becomes, in the special symbol indicators 84 and 86, the variable display about a special symbol is started. The variation display of the special symbol is continuously performed until the timing t4 when 5000 ms elapses after the variation display is started. At this timing t4, the special symbol variation display is stopped so that it can be recognized that it is out of place.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 115, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the variable display effect for a plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is started at the timing t1. However, at the timing t2 when 2000 ms has elapsed since the start of the variable display effect, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 subjected to the variable display effect are temporarily stopped (although the variable symbol effect display is continued). (Display mode that makes it appear as if it has completely stopped) (simulated first variation display effect). Further, at the timing t3 when the temporary stop state (interval) is maintained for “1000 ms”, the variable display effect of the plurality of temporarily stopped decorative symbols 1153 is resumed even though the hold is not released. (2nd variation display effect). Then, at a timing t4 when 2000 ms has elapsed since the restart of the variable display effect, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are stopped (completely stopped) in such a manner that it is suggested to the player that they are out of place ( Second variation display effect simulated). As described above, both the simulated first and second variation display effects are performed for the same time as the time (2000 ms) required for the “opening extension / shortening variation” (variation number 57). .

  As described above, in the case of “open extension extended / off twice fluctuation” (variation number 58), the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 display the special symbol during the period from when the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. However, the effect control is performed so that the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are subjected to the variable display effect in the shortened variable display mode twice. Therefore, for example, when the player is made aware that such a continuous effect is being performed by a notice effect such as the UFO effect, the “opening extension / normal” It is possible to indicate to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than “During extended opening / normal fluctuation”, while the time (5000 ms) is shorter than the time required for “variation” (7000 ms). Become. And when a highly anticipated performance is performed in an external advantageous game state, this “extended extension, twice fluctuation deviation” (variation number 58) should be actively adopted with a probability (752/1000) exceeding 50%. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the time required for the next lottery process to be performed after the lottery process is performed while performing highly anticipated performances at a high frequency. The above-described lottery efficiency in the gaming state can be appropriately improved. In other words, by proactively adopting such “during open extension / deviating twice fluctuation” (variation number 58), high-expected performances are played at the same frequency in the external advantageous game state and the external normal game state. Even if a lot of lottery processes have to be performed before the jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game suitably.

  In addition, the first (and second) variable display effect that is simulated is the time (2000 ms) required for “opening extended / shortening fluctuation” (variation number 57) that is actually performed when the number of holds is large. It was done over the same amount of time. For this reason, for example, when the player does not appeal to the player that such a continuous effect is being performed, such as when the UFO effect is not performed, the player may perform the lottery process in the hold state. Even when the number of processes (the number of holdings) is small, the illusion is that a variable display effect is being executed in a situation where the number of holdings is large. In other words, even if there is a situation in which a game ball is not easily entered into the start opening 600, 602, 604 in spite of being in an external advantageous game state, such a continuous production is performed. The player feels as if the game balls are successively inserted into the start ports 600, 602, and 604, and a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

[Reach production when the open extension function is activated]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a music reach effect that is an effect display mode with reach when the external advantageous game state is executed will be described. This music reach effect is a mode in which a win or miss is derived as a lottery result after performing a reach effect using a part or all of a predetermined music.

  After the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” (see FIG. 88 (F)), the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 6 is performed is “ Equivalent to “Extended Opening / A Music Reach / Long”, and the effect display mode in which the same reach effect as the change number 7 is performed corresponds to “Open Extension Extended / A Song Reach / Long”, The effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to that of the variable number 8 is performed corresponds to the variable number 63 “opening extension / A music reach / extra-long out”, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 9 is performed. Corresponds to the variable number 64 “Opening extended, A music reach, per super long”.

  In addition, a reach production similar to “Opening extension / A music reach / long” is performed, and after “decreased” is derived in a manner in which the symbol is shifted by one frame by the decorative symbol 1153, the frame is shifted by one frame. The effect display mode in which the symbol is reverse-scrolled by one frame and “big hit” (so-called “return return”) is derived corresponds to the variation number 61 “opening extension / A music reach / long return”. In addition, the same reach production as “Opening extension / A music reach / long” is performed, and after the “decreased” is derived once by the decorative symbol 1153, the decorative symbol 1153 is re-varied, The so-called effect display mode from which “so-called per change” is derived corresponds to the change number 62 “opening extended / A music reach / per long change”. In addition, a reach production similar to “Opening extension / A music reach / Super-long” is performed, and an effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 65 “Opening extension”・ Equivalent to “A song reach / per-long change”.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the E music, and from the speakers 144 and 341, E The first half of the music may be output as audio. The effect display mode in which “off” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the E music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended, E music reach, short out” of the variation number 66. On the other hand, after the singing performance using the first half of the E music is executed, the effect display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variation number 67 “Opening extension / E music reach / short hits” Is equivalent to. Furthermore, after the singing effect using the first half of the E music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is resumed, and the effect display device 115 performs the singing effect of the character. Is continuously executed, and audio may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the second half of the E music is continuous from the first half. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the latter half of the E music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended / E music reach / developed out” of the variation number 68. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of this E music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 69 “Opening extended, E music reach, per development” Is equivalent to.

  Here, in the reach effect in which the singing effect using the E music is executed, unlike the reach effect in which the singing effect using the other music is executed, the symbols constituting the decorative pattern 1153 are “3” and It is limited to the specific symbol “5”. That is, the “big hit” derived after the reach effect is executed is limited to the first long open big hit. In other words, when the “big hit” is derived by the reach effect in which the singing effect using the E music is executed, the first long open jackpot that is most advantageous to the player is determined, and therefore the reach effect is executed. And the player's expectations are greatly increased, and the interest is improved.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153, and the effect display device 115 displays the singing effect of the character unique to the F music, and the speakers 144, 341 The first half of the music may be output as audio. The effect display mode in which “out” is derived after the singing effect using the first half of the F music is executed corresponds to “open extension extended, F music reach, normal out” of the variation number 70. On the other hand, after the singing production using the first half of the F music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 71 “Opening extension / F music reach / normal winning” Is equivalent to. In addition, while the reach production similar to “Opening extension / F music reach / normal” is performed, the effect display mode in which “Big jackpot” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 72 “Opening extension / It corresponds to “per F music reach normal re-variation”.

  Further, after the singing effect using the first half of the F music is executed and the decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily stopped, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is resumed, and the effect display device 115 performs the singing effect of the character. Is continuously executed, and audio may be output from the speakers 144 and 341 so that the second half of the F music is continuous from the first half. After the singing production using the latter half of this F-music is performed, the production display mode from which “out” is derived is “various open 76, F music reach, development outage 2 (double only)” Also, the variable number 78 corresponds to “Opening extension, F music reach, development failure 3”. On the other hand, after the singing production using the latter half of this F-music is performed, the production display mode derived from winning the “big hit” is the variable number 73 “Opening extension, F-music reach, per development” It corresponds to “1”, variable number 75 “2 during extension extension / F music reach / development (only for triple)” and variable number 77 “3 during extension extension / F music reach / development”. In addition, while the reach production similar to “Opening extension / F music reach / development” is performed, the effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of return is the variation number 74 “Opening extension / F Equivalent to 1 ”per song reach / return.

  Here, in the reach effect in which the singing effect using the F music is executed, unlike the reach effect in which the singing effect using another music is executed, the reach arrangement (line) by the decorative design 1153 is 2 May be line (double) or 3 lines (triple). Thus, by arranging a plurality of reach arrangements (lines) based on the decorative symbols 1153, it is possible to give the player an impression that “big hit” is easily derived. In other words, in the reach production in which the singing production using the F music is executed, the player's expectation for the “big hit” is greatly increased, compared to the reach production in which the singing production using the other music is executed. Will improve.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 49 is performed is “Open extension extended / D music” The effect display mode corresponding to “Reach / Normal Out” and the same reach effect as the variation number 50 corresponds to the variation number 80 “During extension extended / D music reach / long” and the same as the variation number 51 The effect display mode in which the reach effect is performed corresponds to the variable number 82 “Opening extension / D music reach / development failure”, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 52 is performed is “Open” Equivalent to “Extended, D Music Reach, Per Development”. In addition, while the same reach production as “During extension open / D music reach / normal” is performed, the effect display mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the “open extension extension / This corresponds to “per D music reach / normal re-variation”. In addition, the same reach production as “Opening extension / D music reach / development” is performed, and the effect display mode in which “Big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation is the variation number 84 “Opening extension / D music reach / per-developed change.

  Here, as described above, in the external normal game state (when the opening extension function is not activated), the reach effect in which the singing effect using the D music is executed among the A music to the D music is the most “big hit”. Expectation is high. Therefore, even in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), when the reach effect is performed in which the singing effect using the D music is performed, the expectation to “big hit” is high, In the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the player can give an impression that the D music is a music having a special value. Furthermore, the above-described “elevation mode” is also a game mode in which the D music is used as a motif, so that the D music can further have significance as a special music that improves the player's expectation.

  In addition, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, the reach is derived by the decorative pattern 1153, and the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the variable number 22 is performed is the variable number 85 “Opening extended / G music” An effect display mode in which a reach effect similar to the variation number 23 is performed corresponds to “reach out of reach” and a variation number 86 “opening extension / G music reach / per full rotation”.

  Here, there is “medley reach” which performs a singing effect using a plurality of music pieces as a special music reach effect when the open extension function is activated. Hereinafter, “medley reach” will be described.

  First, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, the effect display device 115 displays an introduction image to “medley reach”, and the reach is derived by the decorative symbol 1153. Furthermore, in the effect display device 115, after the introduction image to the A song is displayed, the singing effect of the character unique to the A song is displayed, and the introduction or first half of the A song is displayed from the speakers 144 and 341. Sound is output. An effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing production using the introduction part or the first half of this A music piece is executed is “various open 87, medley reach, short hit (A music piece)” ”Or the variable number 88“ Opening extension, Medley reach, Winning (A music) ”.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the A music is immediately interrupted, and the display is switched from the introduction image to the A music to the introduction image to the B music, and the A music is changed from the speakers 144 and 341. B music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the B music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the B music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 as audio. After the singing production using the introduction part or the first half part of the B music is performed, the production display mode in which “winning” is derived is “various opening 89, medley reach, short per (B music) "Or" No. 90 during opening extension, medley reach, hit (B music) ".

  In addition, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the B music is immediately interrupted and switched from the introduction image to the B music to the introduction image to the C music, and the B music is replaced from the speakers 144 and 341. C music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the C music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the C music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 by voice. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing production using the introduction part or the first half part of the C music is executed is the variable number 91 “opening extended / medley reach / short (C music) ”Or the variable number 92“ Opening extension / medley reach / win (C music) ”.

  In addition, in the effect display device 115, the reach effect using the C music is immediately interrupted and switched from the introduction image to the C music to the introduction image to the D music, and the C music is changed from the speakers 144 and 341. D music may be output as audio. Then, in the effect display device 115, the singing effect of the character unique to the D music is displayed, and the introduction part or the first half of the D music is output from the speakers 144 and 341 as audio. The effect display mode in which “winning” is derived after the singing effect using the introduction part or the first half part of the D music is executed is the variable number 93 “During opening extension / medley reach / short (D music) ”Or the variable number 94“ Opening extension / medley reach / win (D music) ”.

  It should be noted that after the above “medley reach” is performed, the effect display mode in which “out” is finally derived corresponds to the variable number 95 “during open extension / medley reach / off”. In addition, after the above-mentioned “medley reach” is performed, the effect display mode in which “big hit” is derived in the form of re-variation corresponds to the change number 96 “during open extension / medley reach / per change”. .

  Thus, in the external advantageous gaming state, the reach effect is always displayed on the special symbol indicators 84 and 86 only once after the special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped. Nevertheless, the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 are performed after the variable display effect is performed twice in the shortened variable display mode. In particular, the time required for the “change during opening / shortening variation” (variation number 57) that is actually performed when the number of holdings is large (first variation display effect before the second reach effect is simulated) (variation number 57) 2000 ms) for the same amount of time. For this reason, for example, when the UFO effect is not performed, and when such a continuous effect is performed without appealing to the player, the player receives 2 on the basis of one hold. It seems that the variable display effects are performed separately. In addition, when a highly variable display effect such as a reach effect is performed, the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in a pseudo manner continuously several times based on one hold, so at the time of the reach effect, The variation time of the decorative pattern 1153 becomes longer, and the occurrence of a state in which there is no lottery hold can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the external advantageous gaming state (when the opening extension function is activated), the opening / closing device 500 opens and closes even if a specific condition is satisfied in the special symbol lottery process or the first short opening big hit or the second short opening big hit is won. The game state after being operated is maintained in the external advantageous game state (when the open extension function is activated). Therefore, even if the specific condition is satisfied or the first short opening jackpot or the second short opening jackpot is won, a substantially similar effect display mode is derived without distinguishing the winning type. In other words, after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” has been made, an effect screen showing that the specific condition is established in the effect display device 115 or that the first short open big hit or the second short open big win is won. In addition to being displayed, the effect display mode from which “displacement” is derived is the variable number 97 “opening extension / specific condition established / per normal fluctuation” or the fluctuation number 98 “opening extension / 2R big hit / per normal fluctuation” Is equivalent to.

  In addition, the effect display mode in which the reach effect similar to the change number 55 is performed after the above-mentioned “special light emission effect” is performed corresponds to the change number 99 “open extension extended, 15R big hit, normal change per change” To do.

[Special lighting effects]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the details of the above-described “special light emission effect” executed as a part of the effect display mode based on a predetermined variation pattern will be described. As described above, the “special light emission effect” is obtained when the effect display mode is executed based on the variation pattern (specifically, the variation patterns 59 to 99) for performing the reach effect when the open extension function is activated. Always executed as part. The “special light emission effect” is executed by the effect control means 962 included in the peripheral control board 810 described above, similarly to the effect display mode based on each variation pattern.

  In this embodiment, in the external advantageous gaming state (when the extended extension function is activated), if this “special lighting effect” is executed during the special symbol variation display, the expectation of “big hit” is always high. It develops into a unique reach production (so-called super reach). That is, since the “special light emission effect” functions as an effect for notifying that the so-called super reach is executed, when the “special light emission effect” is executed, the player's interest in the lottery result is greatly increased.

  Similarly, even in the external normal game state (when the opening extension function is not activated), when the effect display mode based on the variation pattern (specifically, the variation patterns 24 to 52) with the n-times continuous effect is executed, It may be executed as a part of the effect display mode. In this case, when this “special light emission effect” is executed during the special symbol variation display, it is preferable that the degree of expectation to develop into the above-described super reach increases. As a result, when the “special lighting effect” is executed, the fun of the game is enhanced, but even if the “special lighting effect” is executed, the “big hit” is derived so that it may not be developed into a super reach. There is no random reach production.

  In the following, the “special light emission effect” executed using substantially the entire front of the game effect unit 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be concretely focused on the relationship with the structure of the pachinko machine 1 (particularly, the game effect unit 4). Explained. 90 and 91 are front views of the game effect unit when the “special light emission effect” is being executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, at a position that can be viewed from the front side of the game effect unit 4, there are an effect display device 115 that executes a “special light emission effect” and a plurality of illumination devices (that is, LED boards 535). The game panel 409 is arranged behind the game panel 409. In detail, the effect display device 115 is provided so as to be displayed at the center in a size that occupies almost the entire game area 20 when viewed from the player (that is, in front view). In addition to the plurality of LED substrates 535a to 535j, other electrical decoration devices, decorative accessories, and the like are disposed on the outer peripheral side of the effect display device 115.

  Here, the LED boards 535a, 535k, 535b, 535c, and 535d are arranged at substantially equal intervals along the effect display apparatus 115 in the counterclockwise direction from the top of the effect display apparatus 115, and the LED boards (not shown) ) Having light-like decorative bodies 520a, 520b, 520c, 520d, and 520e. Behind the game panel 409, blade-type decorative bodies 530a, 530b, 530c, and 530d are provided as the blade-type decorative bodies 530 that cover the LED substrates 535a, 535b, 535c, and 535d, respectively. On the other hand, on the front side of the game panel 409, a feather-shaped decorative body 632 that covers the LED substrate 535k is provided.

  In addition, LED boards 535e, 535f, 535g, 535h, 535i, and 535j are arranged at substantially equal intervals along the effect display device 115 from above the effect display device 115, and the LED substrate (not shown). ) Having light-like decorative bodies 520g and 520f are sequentially arranged. In addition, on the front side of the game panel 409, as the blade-type decorative body 630 that covers the LED substrates 535e, 535f, 535g, 535h, 535i, and 535j, the blade-type decorative bodies 630a, 630b, 630c, 630d, 630e, and 630f Are provided.

  Further, on the front side of the gaming panel 409, a large decorative accessory is placed behind the gaming panel 409 so as to be exposed to the gaming area 20 from between the feather-shaped decorative body 630a and the feather-shaped decorative body 630b. A disk-like accessory 590 is provided. This disk-like accessory 590 also includes various electric decorations 592, 594, 596 having LED substrates (not shown). As described above, the game effect unit 4 according to the present embodiment, when viewed from the player (that is, in front view), includes various electric decoration devices and decorative functions so as to surround the periphery of the effect display device 115 occupying the center. A structure in which an object or the like is displayed in the game area 20 is formed, and the following “special light emission effect” is executed using the substantially entire front surface of the game effect unit 4.

  First, in the “special lighting effect”, in the display area of the effect display device 115, while the special symbol variation display (decoration variation of the decorative symbol 1153) is being performed, the display region is in a non-display state (dark state). The display is controlled. At the same time, various illumination devices (that is, the LED board 535) provided in the game effect unit 4 are also controlled to be turned off. As a result, almost the entire front area (that is, the game area 20) of the game effect unit 4 is in a dark state, and the player is strongly impressed by the image as if the game area 20 is in outer space.

  90 and 91, display control of a predetermined optical vortex image 1160 is performed in the darkened display area of the effect display device 115. This optical vortex image 1160 is an effect image in a form in which a plurality of light bands extend radially from the substantially central position of the display area of the effect display device 115 toward the outer edge. More specifically, in the optical vortex image 1160, a plurality of light bands extending from the center of the screen to the outer edge are sequentially displayed so as to appear to rotate counterclockwise. Then, the optical vortex image 1160 in which a plurality of light bands rotate in a spiral shape gives the player an impression as if warping the outer space imitated by the game area 20.

  Here, when the optical vortex image 1160 is controlled to be displayed in the effect display device 115, at least the LED substrate 535 that can be visually recognized in front view of the game effect unit 4 in conjunction with the optical vortex image 1160. Lighting control is performed on the LED board 535 that is substantially positioned in the direction in which the plurality of light bands in the optical vortex image 1160 extend. In the optical vortex image 1160 of this embodiment, a band of light that does not correspond to any of the plurality of LED substrates 535 is also displayed.

  Specifically, in the state in which the optical vortex image 1160 shown in FIG. 90 is displayed, the extension direction of the light band corresponding to a plurality of light bands extending to the outer edge of the display area of the effect display device 115. The LED boards 535a, 535d, 535f, 535j, and 535k located in the are controlled to be turned on. And the lighting aspect of each of these LED boards 535 becomes visible via the blade-type decorative bodies 530, 630, and 632 which are electric decoration covers that respectively cover the LED boards 535. That is, here, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530 a, 530 d, 630 b, 630 f, and 632 become light emission modes by the lighting control of the LED substrates 535.

  In a state where the optical vortex image 1160 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed following FIG. 90, the same as described above, corresponding to a plurality of light bands extending to the outer edge of the display area of the effect display device 115, The LED substrates 535b, 535c, 535e, 535g, 535h, and 535i positioned in the extending direction of the light band are controlled to be turned on. Then, the feather-shaped decorative bodies 530b, 530c, 630a, 630c, 630d, and 630e become light emission modes by the lighting control of the LED substrates 535.

  In the present embodiment, a door lens that includes a lens cover 140 and various reflectors 122, 130a, and 130b is formed on the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and has a gaming window 101 that allows the game area 20 to be viewed. A unit 120 is provided around the gaming window 101. When executing the “special light emission effect”, the illumination control in the door lens unit 120 is executed in conjunction with the effect display device 115 and the plurality of LED substrates 535. For example, the light emission / extinction control of the door lens unit 120 is performed at the timing synchronized with the light vortex image 1160 of the effect display device 115 or the blinking mode of the LED substrate 535.

  As described above, the “special light emission effect” is obtained by continuously expressing the plurality of light bands expressed in the optical vortex image 1160 beyond the display area of the effect display device 115 by the plurality of LED substrates 535. In addition, the entire front of the game effect unit 4 is assumed to be an integrated effect area, and one continuous effect is realized in the effect area. In other words, in the “special light emission effect”, the LED board 535 corresponding to a plurality of light bands in the light vortex image 1160 is controlled to be lighted, so that the light band is viewed from the player's perspective (that is, in front view). Since the lighting state of the LED board 535 provides a continuous and integrated effect display, it is grasped in appearance that the integrated effect display is executed beyond the display area of the effect display device 115. In this way, the “special light emission effect” is performed over substantially the entire front surface of the game effect unit 4 beyond the display area of the effect display device 115, and expresses a planar spread of the effect that could not be realized in the past. Can give a strong impression to the player's vision and suppress the decrease in interest.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a main game effect is performed with a liquid crystal display provided in the approximate center of the game area. Even if a plurality of illumination lamps are provided in the game area, these illumination lamps only provide auxiliary illumination effects, and are directly related to the display effects on the liquid crystal display. In general, it was carried out in a non-sexual manner. On the other hand, in the “special light emission effect” in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 115 and the plurality of LED substrates 535 are interlocked to simulate the entire entire front of the game effect unit 4 into an integrated effect region. The production is performed. Therefore, the “special light emission effect” is performed almost over the entire front of the game effect unit 4, which can express a two-dimensional spread of the effect that could not be realized in the past, and has a strong impression on the player's vision Can suppress the decline of interest.

  In particular, in the “special lighting effect”, the display area of the effect display device 115 is darkened to display the light vortex image 1160 and the plurality of LED boards 535 are controlled to be turned on, so that the player warps the outer space. You will have the illusion of being. Furthermore, if the effect images such as the background and the character displayed on the effect display device 115 are different from each other before and after the execution of the “special light emission effect”, the warp is given to the player. You can give the impression of moving to a different place. In this way, by changing the display mode triggered by the “special lighting effect”, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation and achievement rather than simply switching the display mode as in conventional gaming machines. Can do.

  When executing the “special light emission effect”, it is preferable that the LED board (not shown) covered with the light-like decorative bodies 520a to 520g is also subjected to the electric decoration control different from that during the normal special symbol variation. For example, during normal special symbol changes, the red lens body and the blue lens body of each of the light-like decorative bodies 520a to 520g are alternately blinked at a predetermined interval. The red lens body and the blue lens body of each light-like decorative body 520a to 520g are simultaneously blinked at an extremely short interval, or each light-like decorative body 520a to 520g is bent in response to the rotation of the light band in the optical vortex image 1160. For example, light is emitted sequentially in the clockwise direction. As described above, when the “special light emission effect” is executed, the light-emitting modes of the respective light-like decorative bodies 520a to 520g are also changed, so that the player can have a stronger impact and improve the interest.

  By the way, as described above, when the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process (S150) includes the “special light emission effect”, it is executed as a part of the effect display mode based on the variation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to transmit a command for instructing the “special light emission effect” each time to execute the “special light emission effect” from the main control board 710 to the peripheral control board 810, thereby reducing the processing burden.

  Further, if the command for executing the “special lighting effect” is a dedicated command different from the command corresponding to the various variation patterns, the effect display mode based on the variation pattern is being executed (specifically, the decorative pattern 1153 When the “special lighting effect” is executed during the fluctuation), a command for executing the “special lighting effect” needs to be transmitted separately at a predetermined timing separately from the command based on the fluctuation pattern. It becomes complicated. On that point, if “special light emission effect” is executed as part of the effect display mode based on the variation pattern, both various effect display modes and “special light emission effect” can be executed only with commands based on the variation pattern. In addition, it is easy to execute the “special light emission effect” during execution of the effect display mode, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is accompanied by “special lighting effect”, after the variation display of the decoration pattern 1153 is interrupted and the “special lighting effect” is executed, the decoration pattern 1153 is displayed. The lottery result is derived by the stop display. That is, since the “special light emission effect” is executed before the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped and displayed, it is possible to surprise the player with “Ah!” And attract interest. In particular, if the super reach is performed after the “special light effect” is executed, the “special light effect” is a notice to the super reach, and the player's interest is further attracted. ”Is executed, and the development of the production can be watched.

  Furthermore, the variation display of the decorative pattern 1153 before the “special lighting effect” is executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol 1153 after the “special lighting effect” is executed are compared and displayed on the effect display device 115. If the effect images such as the background and characters to be displayed are different, the player can feel as if he / she has moved to a different place after warping, and the development of super reach is expected. Can be further improved.

  Next, the physical structure of various effect devices (effect display device 115, LED board 535, etc.) used for the “special light emission effect” in the game effect unit 4 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 45 to FIG. 49, the game effect unit 4 has almost the entire area relative to the game area 20 (preferably about 2/3 to 3/4 of the game area 20) in the center of the front. An effect display device 115 having such a size as to occupy is provided, and a plurality of LED substrates 535 are provided along the outer edge of the effect display device 115 on the front surface thereof. The effect display device 115 and the LED board 535 are both arranged behind the game panel 409 so that a predetermined effect can be executed.

  That is, when viewed from the player (ie, front view), the visible range (display area) of the effect display device 115 that is visible in the game area 20 via the game panel 409 is at least 2 / with respect to the game area 20. 3 or more. Further, a plurality of LED boards 535 are provided adjacent to the effect display device 115 and on the outer peripheral side when viewed from the effect display device 115, and when viewed from the player (that is, when viewed from the front), each LED substrate 535 is a game panel. Through 409, the game area 20 is displayed so as not to overlap with the effect display device 115.

  With such a structure, various parts to be placed in the game area 20 including the center role 620, a plurality of obstacle nails, a windmill, the receiving ports 600, 602, 604, the out port 471, the opening and closing device 500, etc. The arrangement member) can be appropriately arranged in the game area 20 by providing the effect display device 115 and the LED board 535 on the rear side of the game panel 409. That is, these front arrangement members are not limited to various members (the effect display device 115 and the LED board 535) arranged on the back side of the game panel 409, and any position, shape, size, etc. in the game area 20 Can be arranged. Then, regardless of the arrangement mode of the front arrangement member in the game area 20, the “special light emission effect” using the substantially entire front of the game effect unit 4 can be executed. That is, it has a structure that does not affect the “special light emission effect” executed on the back side of the game panel 409 no matter what position, shape, size, etc., the front arrangement member is arranged in the game area 20.

  By the way, there has been conventionally known a gaming machine in which a game effect unit is provided with a liquid crystal display and an electric lamp, and an effect in which these are linked is performed. However, in such a gaming machine, the game area is inevitably narrowed as it is provided with a large liquid crystal display and a large number of illumination lamps. And while providing other parts (equivalent to a front arrangement member), such as an obstruction nail and a windmill, in a game field is restricted, a field where a game ball can flow down is limited. As a result, free design of the game production unit (game area) is hindered, and there is a problem that a gaming machine with high designability and high gameability cannot be realized. On the other hand, when the liquid crystal display is made smaller or the number of installation points of the illumination lamp is reduced, not only the display effect on the liquid crystal display and the illumination effect on the illumination lamp, , The visual impression given to the player was weak, and there was a problem that interest was lowered.

  In this pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 115 for executing the “special light emission effect” and the LED board 535 are arranged behind the game panel 409, so it is necessary to provide these effect devices directly in the game area 20. There is no. Therefore, even if the effect display device 115 is enlarged or many LED boards 535 are installed, the game area 20 on the front side of the game panel 409 is not narrowed. And it can restrict | limit the area | region where a game ball can flow down, without providing other parts, such as an obstruction nail and a windmill, in the game area 20. As a result, it is possible to secure a free design of the game effect unit 4 (game area 20), to realize a gaming machine excellent in design and game characteristics, and to use the substantially entire front of the game effect unit 4. The player's interest can be further improved by the “special lighting effect”.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a large effect item (for example, a movable liquid crystal display or a doll imitating a character) is provided in a game effect unit, and various effects are performed using this accessory. Are known. However, in such a gaming machine, the game area becomes narrower as the size of an accessory increases, and not only a liquid crystal display and an electric lamp but also other parts such as obstacle nails and a windmill are arranged in the game area. Then, the size, position, quantity, etc. of each will be limited. On the other hand, there is a problem that the impact of the bonus on the player becomes weaker as the bonus becomes smaller.

  Here, the pachinko machine 1 also includes a disk-like accessory 590 in which the game effect unit 4 is a large accessory. However, in the game effect unit 4, the effect display device 115 for executing the “special light emission effect” and the LED board 535 are arranged behind the game panel 409, while other parts such as obstacle nails and windmills are arranged on the game panel 409. Since they are arranged on the front side, various parts to be arranged on the surface of the game panel 409 are distributed before and after the game panel 409. Therefore, even if the disk-shaped accessory 590 is made as large as possible, the “special light emission effect” can be executed without narrowing the game area 20. As described above, a free design of the game presentation unit 4 (game area 20) can be secured, and a gaming machine excellent in design and game performance can be realized, and the game presentation unit 4 can be substantially in front. The player's interest can be further improved by the “special light emission effect” using the whole. In particular, since the disc-shaped accessory 590 is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the effect display device 115 and the LED substrate 535 behind the game panel 409, the disc-shaped accessory 590 is provided with the effect display device 115 and the LED substrate. Without covering 535, even if the disk-like accessory 590 is large, the “special light emission effect” can be made visible to the player.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 115 is arranged behind the game effect unit 4, so the depth of the “special light emission effect” is emphasized by the display effect on the effect display device 115. At the same time, since a plurality of LED boards 535 are distributed around the effect display device 115 in the front view of the game effect unit 4, the “special light emission effect” is spread in a plane by the electric effect effects on each LED board 535. To be emphasized. The term “planar spread” as used herein refers to extending in a direction that easily enters the player's field of view, and more specifically, extending from the front to the outside as viewed from the player.

  Then, by emphasizing the depth of the “special light emission effect”, the player can clearly grasp that the “special light emission effect” is being executed at a separated position. Further, by emphasizing the planar spread of the “special light emission effect”, the player can clearly grasp that the “special light emission effect” is executed over a wider range. More specifically, while the effect display device 115 provided in the approximate center of the game effect unit 4 in the front view is separated from the player, the plurality of LED boards 535 provided around the effect display device 115 are more game than the effect display device 115. The LED boards 535 are arranged over substantially the entire front view of the game effect unit 4.

  Under such a configuration, the “special light emission effect” is executed in such a manner as to wrap around the approximate center of the game area 20 as a whole. You will feel like you are wrapped up. In conventional gaming machines, only two-dimensional effects are performed, but in the “special light emission effects”, three-dimensional effects are realized by emphasizing the depth and spread of the effects. Then, the player can experience an unprecedented three-dimensional effect, and the interest is more attracted to the game and the interest is improved.

  Furthermore, when executing the “special light emission effect”, not only effect control in the game effect unit 4 (display control in the effect display device 115 and lighting control in the plurality of LED boards 535) but also light emission control in the door frame 5 are linked. And executed. Thereby, the two-dimensional spread of the “special light emission effect” is expressed in the door frame 5 beyond the game effect unit 4. More specifically, the door lens unit 120 provided around the gaming window 101 is closer to the player than the plurality of LED boards 535, and the door lens unit 120 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the gaming panel 409. It is installed.

  Under such a configuration, if the door lens unit 120 is controlled to emit light when the “special light effect” is executed, the “special light effect” is expressed in the door frame 5 beyond the game effect unit 4. The two-dimensional spread of the “special light emission effect” will be further emphasized. Furthermore, the door lens unit 120 is disposed at a position close to the player, and the effect display device 115 is greatly separated from the player, so that the depth of the “special light emission effect” is further increased. It will be emphasized. As a result, the depth and spread of the “special light emission effect” can be further emphasized, and the player can be strongly experienced in the three-dimensional effect.

  By the way, as described above, to cover the plurality of LED boards 535 disposed behind the game panel 409 in front view, the lighting / flashing mode is visibly covered. 520, a feather-shaped decorative body 530, and a blade-shaped decorative body 630, 632). Specifically, the light-shaped decorative body 520 and the feather-shaped decorative body 530 (rear electric decoration cover) cover each LED substrate 535 on the rear side of the game panel 409, while the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 (the front electric decoration cover). ) Covers each LED board 535 on the front side of the game panel 409.

  Here, the LED board 535 covered with each electric decoration cover cannot be visually recognized by the player (that is, in front view), and only the lighting / flashing mode of the LED board 535 can be visually recognized. Therefore, for the player, it is understood that the LED board 535 is built in each electric decoration cover. In particular, the LED board 535 covered with the feather-shaped decorative bodies 630 and 632 is actually disposed on the rear side of the game panel 409, although the LED board 535 is actually disposed on the front side of the game panel 409. It will be grasped as if they were built in the bodies 630 and 632.

  With such a configuration, the player recognizes that the LED board 535 covered with the light decorative body 520 and the feather-shaped decorative body 530 is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409, while the blade The LED board 535 covered with the mold decorations 630 and 632 has an illusion that it is disposed on the front side of the game panel 409. In this manner, it is grasped that the plurality of LED boards 535 actually disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 409 are distributed and disposed before and after the gaming panel 409. Therefore, the LED board 535 having an arbitrary shape or size can be arranged (or shown to be arranged) at various positions in the game effect unit 4 (game area 20). It is possible to design a highly effective game production unit 4 (game area 20).

  By the way, if the LED board 535 is provided on the front side of the game panel 409 (that is, the game area 20), it is considered that the wiring structure to the LED board 535 becomes complicated. However, in this pachinko machine 1, even if the LED board 535 is not actually arranged in the game area 20, the blade-type decorative body 630, at the position corresponding to the LED board 535 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 409, If 632 is provided, it can be seen that the LED board 535 is disposed in the game area 20, so that the structure of the game effect unit 4 can be simplified.

  Note that a slit-shaped window 632a is formed in the vane-shaped decorative body 632 positioned in the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area 20 so that the player can visually recognize the game ball passing behind it. doing. Thereby, the player can prevent the situation where the behavior of the game ball cannot be seen by the feather-shaped decorative body 632, and can play the game with confidence without losing sight of the game ball. Furthermore, since the lighting / flashing mode of the LED board 535 can be visually recognized when the game ball does not pass behind the feather-shaped decorative body 632, the interest is maintained.

[About decorative designs]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative design 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described in detail. FIG. 92A is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in the external normal gaming state, and FIG. 92B is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in the external advantageous gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the embodiment, the opportunity to shift to the external normal gaming state (such as the third long-opening jackpot), and the trigger to shift to the external advantageous gaming state (such as the first long-opening jackpot) In addition, in the external normal gaming state, it functions as a trigger for shifting to the external normal gaming state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the external normal gaming state is the highest per-share distribution rate. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state, it functions as a trigger to shift to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state so that the per-share distribution rate that triggers the transition to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state becomes the highest per-share distribution rate The second long open jackpot is prepared as one of the winning types of jackpot. Therefore, as the decorative symbol 1153 for suggesting the winning type of jackpot, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the blue decorative symbols (“4”, “ 8 ”) 1153 and the red decorative symbols (“ 3 ”,“ 7 ”) 1153 indicating that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state, and the external normal game state is controlled when the game is in the external normal game state. On the other hand, when the player is in the external advantageous gaming state, the pink decorative symbols (“1”, “2”, “5”, “ 6)) 1153 can be prepared without any sense of incongruity. That is, by performing a variable display effect using three types of decorative symbols 1153 including such a pink decorative symbol 1153, any of the game states of the external normal game state and the external advantageous game state Even if there is, the above-mentioned effect display indicates that the continuation rate (red decoration pattern and pink decoration pattern) is higher than the rate of entry into the external advantageous gaming state (red decoration pattern only) The player can be recognized through the device 115.

  Moreover, the pink decoration pattern 1153 is different from the decoration pattern (blue decoration pattern, red decoration pattern) 1153 having the value alone as information indicating the gaming state after the jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot It has no value as information indicating That is, such a pink decorative pattern 1153 itself has a value as a mere presentation pattern used for the above-described variable display presentation to suggest whether or not the jackpot has been won. Only when combined with information capable of recognizing the gaming state (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state), it has value as information (information indicating the winning type) indicating the gaming state after the jackpot. Therefore, when the pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed when the jackpot is won, the player is forced to be aware of the current gaming state if he / she wants to know the winning type of the jackpot, As a result, the merit in the external advantageous gaming state can be felt with a higher probability. For example, when the pink decoration symbol 1153 is displayed while in the external normal gaming state, it becomes easier to feel “if the current gaming state was the external advantageous gaming state”, and the external advantageous gaming state is entered. When the pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed at a certain time, it becomes easy to feel that “the current gaming state was good in the external advantageous gaming state”.

  That is, since the blue decorative design 1153 has a value alone as information that suggests that it is not advantageous to the player, the player tends to dislike the blue decorative design 1153 itself. For this reason, if the blue decorative pattern 1153 appears when the jackpot is won, the interest of the game may be lowered even though the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the pink decorative symbol 1153 is information (the winning type) indicating the gaming state after the big hit only when the current gaming state (external normal gaming state or external advantageous gaming state) is combined with information that can be recognized. Therefore, it can be said that the player is prevented from hating the pink decorative pattern 1153 itself. And, as will be described later, such a pink decorative pattern not only when winning the opportunity to enter the external advantageous gaming state is won, but also when winning the opportunity to enter the external normal gaming state is won 1153 is displayed on the effect display device 115. Thus, it is necessary to display the blue decorative design 1153 on the effect display device 115 by the amount that the pink decorative design 1153 is displayed when the win that triggers the transition to the external normal gaming state is won. Disappear. As a result, even if the total number of types of blue decorative symbols 1153 that alone has value as information that suggests that the player is not a winning hit is less than half the total number of types of all decorative symbols 1153, It is preferably avoided that the player feels uncomfortable with such a symbol display mode. In this embodiment, eight decorative patterns 1153 “1” to “8” are prepared, whereas only two of the blue decorative patterns 1153 “2” and “4” are prepared. ing.

  In the external advantageous gaming state, the pink decorative pattern 1153 suggests that the external decorative gaming state is controlled in the external advantageous gaming state, but the second long opening is provided. With the jackpot function, the probability of being assigned to the winning type that triggers the transition to the above-mentioned external normal gaming state is set to be lower than “50%” (probability “1/3” in this embodiment). Therefore, the discomfort caused by the low display probability of the blue decorative pattern 1153 does not occur in the first place. In addition, with the above-described function based on the second long open jackpot, even if the continuation rate in the external advantageous gaming state is set so high, the winning probability of jackpot, the total amount of game balls to be paid out during the jackpot game, etc. The specifications as a gaming machine are not greatly sacrificed.

  By the way, such a pink decorative pattern 1153 is a decorative pattern that appears not only when controlled in the external normal gaming state but also when controlled in the external advantageous gaming state. By simply displaying 1153 on the effect display device 115, it is difficult to appropriately suggest the gaming state after the jackpot game is played to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the external advantageous gaming state, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), a predetermined decoration image 1153d (character image KG) is added to each of the three types of decoration symbols 1153. These display modes are made different with respect to the external normal game state. Thus, the player can recognize whether the game state is the external normal game state or the external advantageous game state only by looking at the decorative symbol 1153. As described above, since the decoration image 1153a capable of recognizing the current gaming state is added to the pink decoration pattern 1153, the pink decoration pattern 1153 is displayed on the effect display device 115. The game state after the jackpot game is performed on the player, although it is a pink decorative pattern 1153 that does not have value alone as information indicating the game state after the jackpot game is performed. Will be able to suggest properly

  In particular, in this embodiment, by adding a decoration image 1153d (character image KG) common to the red decoration pattern 1153 and the pink decoration pattern 1153 among the three types of decoration patterns 1153, The red decorative pattern 1153, the pink decorative pattern 1153, and the blue decorative pattern 1153 are different from each other. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that the pink decorative symbol 1153 in the external advantageous gaming state is a symbol having the same advantage as the red decorative symbol 1153, and the jackpot game is given to the player. The game state after being played can be suggested more appropriately.

[Display control for reach production]
Next, the display control for the reach effect performed by the effect display device 115 will be described in detail.

  As described above, assuming that the variation pattern is determined in the process of step S1560 (FIG. 67), a command indicating the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 (steps S260 and S270). . Then, the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 810 is subjected to processing such as effect lottery by the effect lottery means 960 through the command receiving means 950 in the peripheral control board 810.

  In other words, in the effect lottery means 960, effect information indicating various effect patterns related to the variable display effect of the decorative design 1153 is stored in the form corresponding to the commands from the main control board 710, respectively. It has a storage means. Therefore, when a command indicating the variation pattern is received through the command receiving means 950, the effect lottery means 960 first determines the type of effect pattern corresponding to the command based on the effect pattern storage means. As a result, when the effect pattern corresponding to the command is a reach effect pattern, among the decorative symbols 1153 variably displayed in three columns on the effect display device 115, the “left Reach symbol determination processing is performed in which the type (number) of decorative symbols 1153 to be finally stopped (before the jackpot game is performed) is determined in the two columns “column” and “right column”. In this reach symbol determination process, the types of decorative symbols 1153 that are finally stopped (until the jackpot game is played) in the two columns “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are as follows. Once determined, as the next process (middle symbol determination process), the type of decorative symbol 1153 (finally before the jackpot game is played) at the “middle row” in the effect display device 115 ( Number). The effect pattern storage means is composed of, for example, a backup RAM in the peripheral control board 810.

  Next, the processing procedure of the reach symbol determination process in which the type (number) of the decoration symbol 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 is determined will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows a table (reach symbol determination table) used for reach symbol determination processing.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the reach symbol determination table, the types of reach effects are classified according to the result of the lottery processing for the jackpot and the current game state. In this embodiment,
Loss of reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is a loss (losing) and the current gaming state is in the external normal gaming state.
Specific 1 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the first long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external normal gaming state.
Specific 2 reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the second long open jackpot and the current gaming state is the external normal gaming state.
Non-specific reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the third long open jackpot and the current gaming state is the external normal gaming state.
An open change lose reach that is performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is disapproval (losing) and the current gaming state is an external advantageous gaming state.
-Open change specific 1 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the first long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state.
-Open change specific 2 reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the second long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state.
-Open change non-specific reach performed when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is the third long open jackpot and the current gaming state is in the external advantageous gaming state.
Are classified into eight types of reach production. In addition to the eight types of reach production, the total number of reach determination random numbers “100” is “1, 1”, “2, 2”,..., “7, 7”, “8.8”. Are assigned to one of the eight number combinations (the combination of two numbers employed in the “left column” and “right column”). That is, as is apparent from FIG. 93, the reach design random numbers have different distribution modes according to the above 8 types of reach production, and thereby the selection rate of the type of the decorative design 1153 is set to 8 above. Different types of reach production are used.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect lottery means 960 first receives the information indicating the result of the lottery process for the jackpot and the information indicating the current game state in the reach design determination process. Acquired from 710 side. Next, based on the acquired information, the type of the corresponding reach effect among the 8 types of reach effects is determined, and one of the total number “100” of reach design determining random numbers is acquired. Then, referring to the reach symbol determination table, by selecting one of the eight number combinations based on the determined reach effect type and the acquired reach symbol determination random number, The types of decorative symbols 1153 of “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are determined.

  For example, when the type of reach effect determined is “losing reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 13/100. It is a number combination of “1 · 1”, a number combination of “2 · 2” with a probability of 14/100, and a number combination of “3 · 3” with a probability of 8/100, A probability combination of “4 · 4” with a probability of 15 and a combination of numbers “5 · 5” with a probability of 13/100 and a combination of numbers “6 · 6” with a probability of 14/100 Then, the number combination of “7 · 7” is set to the probability of 8/100, and the number combination of “8 · 8” is set to the probability of 15/100.

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “specific 1 reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 5/100. The number combination is “1 · 1”, the probability is 5/2/100, the number is 2/2, the probability is 38/100, the number is 3/3, and 100 minutes. A probability combination of “4 · 4” with a probability of 2, a probability combination of “5 · 5” with a probability of 5/100, and a number combination of “6 · 6” with a probability of 5/100 Then, the number combination of “7 · 7” is obtained with a probability of 38/100, and the number combination of “8.8” is obtained with a probability of 2/100.

  That is, when the type of reach production determined is “specific 1 reach”, the game after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game is performed because the first long open jackpot is won. The state is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, in order to suggest that it is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state, in the reach design determination table, the selection rate of “3.3” or “7/7”, which is a combination of the red decorative design 1153, It is set to be significantly higher than the selection rate of other number combinations.

  However, in this embodiment, when the first long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the promotion effect during the so-called jackpot game is performed with a certain probability. That is, in the reach design determination table, the “specific 1 reach” includes “3.3” and “7.7”, which are combinations of red decorative symbols 1153, and pink decorative symbols 1153. Combinations such as “1, 1”, “2, 2”, “5, 5”, “6, 6”, and combinations of blue decorative patterns 1153 such as “4, 4”, “8, 8”, etc. The reach design random numbers are also assigned to the number combinations. Therefore, when the combination of the pink and blue decorative symbols 1153 is selected, it is controlled to the external normal game state before the jackpot game corresponding to the first long open jackpot is performed. First, it is falsely suggested by a display such as a pink or blue decorative pattern 1153 (display mode in which the numbers of decorative patterns 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped together). After that, during the period in which the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information suggesting that the false information is controlled in the form of the above-described external advantageous gaming state is derived ( Promotional promotion during the jackpot game).

  In this embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 93, the combination of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is more than that when the combination of the blue decorative pattern 1153 is selected (2/100). When selected (5/100), the probability that information indicating that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous gaming state is derived during the period when the jackpot game is played (the promotion effect during the jackpot game is performed) (Probability) is set to be high. Thereby, even in the external normal game state, the pink decorative pattern 1153 can be present as an advantageous pattern rather than blue.

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “specific 2 reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 20/100. Is a number combination of “1 · 1”, a probability of 20/100 is a combination of numbers “2 · 2”, a probability of 0/100 is a combination of numbers “3 · 3”, and 100 minutes With a probability of 10 and a number combination of “4 · 4”, a probability of 20/100 with a number combination of “5 · 5”, a probability of 20/100 with a number combination of “6.6” The number combination of “7 · 7” is set to a probability of 0/100, and the number combination of “8 · 8” is set to a probability of 10/100.

  In other words, when the type of reach effect determined is “special 2 reach”, since the second long open jackpot is won when in the external normal gaming state, the jackpot according to the jackpot The game state after the game is played is controlled to the above-mentioned external normal game state. Therefore, in order to suggest that the game is controlled to the external normal gaming state, in the reach design determination table, “1.1”, which is a combination of pink decorative symbols 1153 out of the eight types of numeric combinations, Only “6, 2”, “5, 5”, “6, 6”, and the combination of numbers of “4, 4” and “8, 8”, which are combinations of blue decorative design 1153, can be selected. Yes.

  However, in this embodiment, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external normal gaming state, the selection of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is more than the selection rate (20/100) of the blue decorative pattern 1153. The rate (80/100) is set to be several times higher. That is, for a predetermined period after winning the second long open jackpot, the winning probability B, which is higher than the winning probability A employed at the initial stage, is adopted as the winning probability for the jackpot. Therefore, according to such a selection ratio setting mode, the pink decorative design 1153 can be present as a more advantageous symbol for the player than the blue decorative design 1153.

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “non-specific reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 have a probability of 15/100. Is a number combination of “1 · 1”, a probability of 20/100 is a combination of numbers “2 · 2”, a probability of 0/100 is a combination of numbers “3 · 3”, and 100 minutes With a probability of 15 and a number combination of “4 · 4”, a probability of 15/100 with a number combination of “5 · 5” and a probability of 20/100 with a combination of numbers of “6 · 6” The number combination of “7 · 7” is set to the probability of 0/100, and the number combination of “8 · 8” is set to the probability of 15/100.

  In other words, when the type of reach effect determined is “non-specific reach”, the third long open jackpot is won when the player is in the normal external gaming state, and therefore the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot The game state after the game is played is controlled to the above-mentioned external normal game state. Therefore, in this case as well, in order to suggest that the game is controlled to the external normal gaming state, in the reach design determination table, among the eight types of numeric combinations, the combination of the pink decorative design 1153 is “1 · 1 ”,“ 2 ・ 2 ”,“ 5 ・ 5 ”,“ 6 ・ 6 ”, and the combination of blue decoration pattern 1153“ 4 ・ 4 ”and“ 8 ・ 8 ” Selectable.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even when the third long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the selection of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is more than the selection rate (30/100) of the blue decorative pattern 1153. The rate (70/100) is set to be more than doubled. As a result, the display rate of the blue decorative symbol 1153 suggesting that the game is controlled to the external normal game state can be lowered, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. In addition, since the selection rate of the pink decorative pattern 1153 is set low compared with the case where the second long open jackpot is won in the external normal game state, the pink color for the blue decorative pattern 1153 is set. The superiority of the decorative design 1153 is suitably maintained.

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “open change losing reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 12/100. The probability is a number combination of “1 · 1”, the probability of 13/100 is the number combination of “2 · 2”, the probability of 15/100 is the number combination of “3 · 3”, and 100 The probability is a combination of numbers “4 · 4” with a probability of 10 / minute, a number combination of “5 · 5” with a probability of 12/100, and a number of “6.6” with a probability of 13/100 The number is a combination of numbers “7 · 7” with a probability of 15/100 and a number combination of “8.8” with a probability of 10/100.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, the winning probability (1/3) at the time of rushing (transition) to the external advantageous gaming state by winning the big winning in the external normal gaming state, and the big winning in the external advantageous gaming state This is very different from the continuation probability (3/5) at the time of shifting (continuing) again to the above-mentioned external advantageous gaming state by winning, and the merit in the external advantageous gaming state is extremely large. In this respect, in this embodiment, in the “open change lost reach” when the result of the lottery process for the jackpot performed in the external advantageous gaming state is a loss (out), in the external normal gaming state The combination of “3.3” and “7.7”, which is a combination of red decorative symbols 1153, rather than “open change loss reach” when the result of the lottery process performed for the jackpot is a loss. In addition to increasing the selection rate, the selection rates of “4 · 4” and “8.8”, which are combinations of the blue decorative pattern 1153, are set to be low. As a result, when the game is in an external advantageous game state, even if the result of the lottery process for the jackpot is a loss, it is possible to actively appeal the high continuation rate to the player. , A decrease in the interest of the game in the chance game state is suppressed.

  When the determined reach effect type is “open change specific 1 reach”, the “left column” and “right column” decorative symbols 1153 in the effect display device 115 are 5/100. With a probability of “1 · 1”, with a probability of 3/100 as a combination of numbers with “2 · 2”, with a probability of 40/100 as a combination of numbers with “3 · 3”, It is a combination of numbers “4 · 4” with a probability of 2/100, a combination of numbers “5 · 5” with a probability of 5/100, and a number “6.6” with a probability of 3/100 It is a combination, a number combination of “7 · 7” with a probability of 40/100, and a number combination of “8.8” with a probability of 2/100.

  In addition, in this “open change specific 1 reach”, when any of “4 · 4” and “8 · 8”, which is a combination of numbers of the blue decorative design 1153, is selected, the first long open big hit Before the big hit game corresponding to the game is performed, the display of the blue decorative symbols 1153 and the like (the “left column”, “middle column”, “right column”) First, it is falsely suggested by the display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together. After that, during the period in which the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information suggesting that the false information is controlled in the form of the above-described external advantageous gaming state is derived ( Promotional promotion during the jackpot game). However, on the other hand, when any one of “1.1”, “2-2”, “5.5”, “6.6”, which is a combination of numbers of the pink decorative pattern 1153, is selected, Promotion promotions during such jackpot games are not performed. As a result, in the external advantageous gaming state, it can be made clear that the pink decorative symbol 1153 has been upgraded to the same level of superiority as the red decorative symbol 1153.

  When the type of reach effect determined is “open change specific 2 reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 20/100. With a probability of “1 · 1”, a probability of 15/100 with a number of “2 · 2”, a probability of 0/100 with a number of “3 · 3”, It is a number combination of “4 · 4” with a probability of 15/100, a number combination of “5 · 5” with a probability of 20/100, and a number of “6.6” with a probability of 15/100 The combination is a number combination of “7 · 7” with a probability of 0/100, and a number combination of “8.8” with a probability of 15/100.

  That is, as described above, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is also set to the external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the determined reach production type is “open change specific 2 reach”, not only the combination of the pink decorative pattern 1153 but also the combination of the red decorative pattern 1153 is selected. You may do it. However, in this embodiment, when the second long open jackpot is won in the external advantageous gaming state, the combination of the red decorative symbols 1153 is not selected in performing the “open change specific 2 reach” (100 0), by selecting the combination of the pink decorative pattern 1153, it is suggested that the game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state. This makes it easier for the player to feel that “the game state when the pink decorative pattern 1153 appears was good in the external advantageous game state” and proactively appealed to the player about the merits of being in the chance game state. Will be able to.

  In addition, in this “open change specific 2 reach”, when any of “4 · 4” and “8 · 8”, which is a combination of numbers of the blue decorative design 1153, is selected, the second long open big hit Before the big hit game corresponding to the game is performed, the display of the blue decorative symbols 1153 and the like (the “left column”, “middle column”, “right column”) First, it is falsely suggested by the display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together. After that, during the period in which the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is performed, information suggesting that the false information is controlled in the form of the above-described external advantageous gaming state is derived ( Promotional promotion during the jackpot game).

  Further, when the type of reach effect determined is “open change non-specific reach”, the decorative symbols 1153 of “left column” and “right column” in the effect display device 115 are 50/100. With a probability of “4 · 4” and a probability of 50/100 with a number combination of “8.8”.

  Next, the middle symbol determination process in which the type of the “middle row” decorative symbol 1153 in the effect display device 115 is determined will be described in detail.

  In the middle symbol determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the “middle row” in the effect display device 115 is the same symbol as the determined “left column” and “right column”. That is, in the above reach symbol determination process, “specific 1 reach”, “specific 2 reach”, “non-specific reach”, “open change specific 1 reach”, “open change specific 2 reach”, “open change nonspecific reach” When it is determined that any one of the above should be performed, the same symbol (number) as the number combination determined in the processing is adopted as the symbol of the “middle row”. As a result, in the effect display device 115, a display mode in which the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped together appears, indicating that the game has been won. It will be suggested to the person.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the above reach design determination process that either “hasle reach” or “open change husle reach” should be performed, how many symbols are determined from the symbols (number combinations) determined in the process? It is determined whether to display a pattern (number) that is shifted by a certain amount, and the pattern corresponding to the determination is adopted as the “middle row” symbol. That is, in this case, the effect display device 115 has only the numbers of the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column” and the “right column” among the decorative symbols 1153 of the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”. Thus, the irregularity of the numbers in the “middle row” decoration symbol 1153 suggests to the player that the jackpot was not won.

  By the way, in this embodiment, when the type (number) of the “middle row” decorative symbols 1153 is the same decorative symbol 1153 as the “left column” and “right column”, these decorative symbols 1153 are jackpots. When displaying (decision stop) on the effect display device 115 in the display mode at the time, a decoration symbol 1153 that is not necessarily the same as the determined decorative symbol 1153 is temporarily displayed on the effect display device 115 (temporary stop). Whether or not a re-lottery effect is to be performed is determined. When it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be performed, the following re-lottery effect is performed. As for this re-lottery effect, when the type (number) of the “middle row” decorative symbol 1153 is the same decorative symbol 1153 as the “left column” and “right column”, the re-lottery effect is performed. You may make it surely perform without determining whether or not.

  Next, processing relating to such a re-lottery effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 shows a table (re-lottery symbol determination table) used for processing relating to the re-lottery effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b), the re-lottery symbol determination table is in a first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1 used in the external normal gaming state and in the external advantageous gaming state. And a second re-lottery symbol determination table ST2 that is sometimes used. In these re-lottery symbol determination tables ST1 and ST2, a total of “100” is re-established for each type determined as the decorative symbol 1153 to be determined and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”. The random number for determining the lottery symbol is one of the eight number combinations of “1, 1, 1”, “2, 2, 2,”, “7, 7, 7”, “8, 8, 8” Are associated with each other.

  For example, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “1 · 1 · 1” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays a numerical combination of “1 · 1 · 1” with a probability of 70/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “4/4/4” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8/8/8” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop). Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “1, 1, 1” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “1, 1, 1” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the combination of numbers “4, 4, 4” and “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “1.1” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect is displayed in which the number combination of “1” is displayed (determination is stopped). In this way, when the pink decorative pattern 1153 is displayed in a form that is changed from the blue decorative pattern 1153, the player may see the second long open jackpot as viewed from the player, or during the jackpot game Since the possibility of performing the promotion promotion is increased, a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed.

  Further, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “2.2.2” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays a numerical combination of “2.2-2.2” with a probability of 60/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “4/4/4” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8/8/8” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop). Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “2, 2, 2” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “2, 2, 2” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-described “2. 2” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “2” is displayed (determination is stopped) is performed.

  Similarly, in the external normal gaming state, “3, 3. 3” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”. When it is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays the number combination of “1 · 1 · 1” with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop). ), The number combination of “2, 2, 2” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “3, 3, 3” is displayed once with a probability of 70/100 ( (Temporary stop), the number combination of “4/4/4” is displayed once (provisional stop) with a probability of 5/100, and the number combination of “5/5/5” is once displayed with a probability of 5/100 It is displayed (temporary stop), and “6/6. Number combination of "is once displayed (temporarily stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “3, 3, 3” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “3, 3, 3” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, combination of numbers such as “1 ・ 1 ・ 1”, “2 ・ 2 ・ 2”, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4”, “5 ・ 5 ・ 5” and “6 ・ 6 ・ 6” is temporarily displayed. ), A re-lottery effect is performed in which the number combination of “3, 3 and 3” is displayed (determination is stopped) in a manner changed from the displayed number combination.

  Further, in the above-mentioned external normal gaming state, when “4/4/4” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 always displays the number combination “4 · 4 · 4” once. Then, a re-lottery effect is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination is maintained.

  In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “5, 5, 5” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 once displays a numerical combination of “4/4/4” with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “5 · 5 · 5” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 70/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8 · 8 · 8” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 15/100 (temporary stop). Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “5, 5, 5” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “5, 5, 5” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-described “5.5” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect is displayed in which the number combination “5” is displayed (determination is stopped).

  In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “6, 6. 6” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays a numerical combination of “4/4/4” with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop). The number combination of “6, 6, 6” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 60/100 (temporary stop), and the number combination of “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed with a probability of 20/100 (temporary stop). Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “6, 6, 6” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “6, 6, 6” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the numerical combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is once displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “6.6” is changed from the displayed numerical combination. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “6” is displayed (determination stop) is performed.

  Further, in the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “7/7/7” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be fixed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is clear from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 temporarily displays the number combination of “4 · 4 · 4” with a probability of 5/100 (temporary stop). The number combination “7/7/7” is displayed once (provisionally stopped) with a probability of 90/100, and the number combination “8/8/8” is displayed once (provisional) with a probability of 5/100. Is stopped). Of these, if the number combination of “7, 7, 7” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the lottery is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination of “7, 7, 7” is maintained. Production will be performed. On the other hand, when the number combination of “4, 4, 4” or “8, 8, 8” is temporarily displayed (temporarily stopped), the above-mentioned “7.7” is changed from the displayed number combination. A re-lottery effect in which the number combination of “7” is displayed (determination is stopped) is performed.

  In the above-mentioned external normal game state, when “8, 8, 8” is determined as the type of the decorative symbol 1153 to be confirmed and stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column”, respectively. As is apparent from the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST1, the effect display device 115 always displays the number combination “8, 8, 8” once. Then, a re-lottery effect is performed in such a way that the displayed number combination is maintained.

  On the other hand, the details of the re-lottery effect in the external advantageous game state are omitted, but basically, the re-lottery effect in the external normal game state is performed in a manner corresponding to the above-described re-lottery effect. However, in this external advantageous game state, as shown in the first re-lottery symbol determination table ST2, the blue symbols ("4 / 4.4", "8.8. 8 ”), the probability that a re-lottery effect in which the pink symbol is displayed (determination is stopped) is higher than that in the external normal gaming state. As a result, it is possible to actively appeal to the player the merit in the external advantageous gaming state. Furthermore, in this external advantageous game state, the type of the decorative symbol 1153 that is fixedly stopped in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” is a red symbol (“3.3.3”). , “7 · 7 · 7”), the pink design is not displayed once when the red design is displayed (determination stop). As a result, it is possible to clarify that the pink decorative pattern 1153 has been upgraded to the same level of superiority as the red decorative pattern 1153.

  Hereinafter, a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device 115 when the reach effect is performed with the pink decorative pattern 1153 will be described in order. 95 to 97 are effect images showing a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device in the external normal gaming state, and FIG. 98 is an effect image showing a series of effect contents appearing on the effect display device in the external advantageous game state. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (A), during the variable display effect in the external normal gaming state, the same decorative symbol (here, the pink decorative symbol “here” in the “left column” and “right column”). 5 ") If 1153 is stopped, a reach effect that is an effect until the decorative symbol 1153 that is variably displayed in the remaining column (middle column) is stopped and displayed is performed. As a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), when the same decorative design is not stopped in the “middle row” (when other decorative design is stopped). Because the decorative symbols 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped because they are not aligned (display mode at the time of losing), the result of the lottery processing for the jackpot is losing. It will be suggested.

  On the other hand, as a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 95C, when the same decorative design is stopped in the “middle row”, the “left column”, “middle row” ”And“ right row ”decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together (display mode at the time of jackpot), it is suggested that the jackpot has been won. In particular, the pink decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in the display mode of the jackpot in combination with the background image HG1 that suggests that the game is in the external normal gaming state. It is suggested that the game state after the big hit game is controlled is controlled to the external normal game state.

  However, as described above, in FIG. 95C, the decorative symbols 1153 appearing in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” may be temporarily stopped. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the decorative symbol 1153 in the temporarily stopped state is variably displayed again (re-lottery effect). As a result, when the pink decorative pattern 1153 that appears in the temporary stop state appears again, as shown in FIG. Thus, it is suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is controlled to the external normal gaming state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96A, an effect image such as “big hit” is displayed on the effect display device 115. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1, a big hit game is started.

  Here, during the execution period of the jackpot game, as described above, a promotion effect during the jackpot game may be performed. As an example, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), in this embodiment, a plurality of predetermined songs (here, “3”) are displayed on the effect display device 115, and the plurality of songs are displayed. The promotion effect is performed by causing the player to select one of them.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), one of the plurality of music pieces is not displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 96 (C) and 97 (C), when this hidden song is selected by the player, a specific song (here, “D song”) is selected at the selected location. If appears, an effect image such as “UFO mode” suggesting that the game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state is displayed on the upper left in the screen of the effect display device 115 (promotion effect). Then, when the jackpot game is ended while the effect image such as “UFO mode” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the “UFO mode” suggests that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state. Immediately after the image such as "" is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115, the player enters the external advantageous gaming state.

  However, when the non-displayed music is selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 96D, a music (here, “D music”) different from the specific music (here “D music”) is selected. Then, "F music") may appear. In this case, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), an effect image such as “UFO mode” suggesting that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 115. The effect image during the jackpot game is displayed lightly. When the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 96F, an image such as “medley chance” indicating that the game is controlled to the external normal game state is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115. Immediately after being played, the game is shifted to the external normal gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the above-described promotion effect may not be performed. In such a case, the effect image shown in FIG. 96 (D) appears directly from the effect image shown in FIG. 96 (A). That is, also in this case, after the effect images shown in FIGS. 96 (E) and 96 (F) appear, the state is shifted to the external normal gaming state.

  Further, as a result of the re-drawing effect, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), a red decorative pattern 1153 is displayed in a form changed from the pink decorative pattern 1153 that appears in the temporary stop state. The red decorative pattern 115 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of the jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is thereby performed is the external advantageous gaming state. It is suggested to be controlled. After that, as shown in FIG. 97A, an effect image such as “super big hit” more advantageous than the effect image shown in FIG. 96A is displayed on the effect display device 115. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1, a big hit game is started.

  After that, an effect image during the jackpot game appears. However, when the red decorative pattern 115 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of the jackpot, a so-called promotion effect during the jackpot game is not performed. That is, an effect image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous game state is displayed on the upper left in the screen of the effect display device 115 from the beginning. In this state, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), a plurality of predetermined songs (here, “3”) are displayed on the effect display device 115, and among the plurality of songs. A selection effect that allows the player to select one is performed. As a result, when one of the songs is selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), music corresponding to the selected music is output through the speaker, and the music is associated. The effect image to be made appears. When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), an image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115. Immediately after that, the player enters the external advantageous gaming state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), during the variable display effect in the external advantageous gaming state, the same “left column” and “right column” have the same decorative symbol (here, the pink decorative symbol “ 5 ") When 1153 is stopped, a reach effect which is an effect until the decorative symbol 1153 variably displayed in the remaining column (middle column) is stopped and displayed is performed. As a result of the reach production, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), when the same decorative design is not stopped in the “middle row” (when other decorative design is stopped). Because the decorative symbols 1153 in the “left column”, “middle column”, and “right column” are stopped because they are not aligned (display mode at the time of losing), the result of the lottery processing for the jackpot is losing. It will be suggested.

  On the other hand, as a result of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 98C, when the same decorative design is stopped in the “middle row”, the “left row”, “middle row” ”And“ right row ”decorative symbols 1153 are stopped together (display mode at the time of jackpot), it is suggested that the jackpot has been won. In particular, the pink decorative symbol 1153 is displayed in the display mode at the time of the jackpot together with the background image HG2 that suggests that the game is in the external advantageous gaming state, so that the winning of the jackpot is met. It is suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, of the three types of decorative symbols 1153, the character image (character character body) is a decorative image common to the red decorative symbol 1153 and the pink decorative symbol 1153. The drawn decorative image (KG) is added so that the red decorative pattern 1153, the pink decorative pattern 1153, and the blue decorative pattern 1153 have different decorative forms. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that the pink decorative symbol 1153 in the external advantageous gaming state is a symbol having the same advantage as the red decorative symbol 1153, and the jackpot game is given to the player. The game state after being played can be suggested more appropriately. In this embodiment, unlike the character image KG, a character image MG on which the characters “PINKLADY” are drawn is added to the blue decorative pattern 1153.

  After that, in the external advantageous gaming state, as shown in FIG. 97A, the red decorative pattern 1153 is displayed in the display mode of the big hit (FIG. 95 (F)). An effect image such as “super jackpot” more advantageous than the effect image shown in FIG. An effect image during the jackpot game will appear, but when the pink decorative pattern 115 is confirmed and stopped in the display mode at the time of the jackpot in the external advantageous game state, a so-called promotion effect during the jackpot game is performed. Absent. That is, an effect image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the above-described external advantageous game state is displayed on the upper left in the screen of the effect display device 115 from the beginning. In this state, the above-described selection effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), music corresponding to the music selected in the selection process is acoustically output through the speaker, and an effect image reminiscent of the music appears. When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), an image such as “UFO mode” indicating that the game is controlled to the external advantageous game state is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 115. Immediately after that, the player enters the external advantageous gaming state.

  Note that the above-described re-lottery effect may also be performed when the pink decorative pattern 1153 appears as a big hit display mode in this external advantageous gaming state. However, in this external advantageous game state, as shown in FIGS. 98 (D) and 98 (E), only the re-lottery effect is performed in the form that the pink decorative pattern 1153 is maintained.

[Protection circuit against inrush current]
By the way, as described above, in this embodiment, the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is only stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. The unit-side main drawer connector 2000a on the game effect control unit 99 side and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b on the main body frame 3 side are electrically connected. However, in such a structure in which the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are easily connected, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000 with the power switch turned on. A situation where the drawer connector 2000b is erroneously connected is also assumed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine, the main control board 710 is usually provided on the upstream side of the power supply line with respect to the peripheral board and various sensors including the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment. Therefore, power is supplied to other electrical components. Also, pachinko machines are equipped with various electrical components such as MPU that performs control related to effect display, actuators such as motors, etc., and these electrical components require voltage values for power supply required depending on the type and the like. Therefore, for the main control board 710 provided on the upstream side of the power supply line, a plurality of types of power supply lines such as “+ 34V”, “+ 18V”, and “+ 9V” are relatively large. It is structured to be supplied via the connector 2000. Accordingly, if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected with the power switch turned on, the terminal 2001a in the main drawer connector 2000 may be connected. When a large current (inrush current described later) flows through the contact point between the contact point 2001b and the contact point 2001b, they may be welded to supply power to the main control board 710 and electric parts downstream from the main control board 710. Such reliability is significantly reduced.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, as shown in the circuit diagram of the hot-wire failure prevention circuit of FIG. 99, the hot-wire failure prevention that protects various electrical components below the main control board 710 from such inrush current. A circuit 2100 is provided in the main control board 710. That is, in the main control board 710, although not shown in the figure, it is determined whether or not a power failure occurs through a constant voltage circuit that generates “5 V”, which is the operating voltage of the CPU 711, or by monitoring a voltage drop in the power supply line. The internal circuit including the CPU 711 is protected from the inrush current by supplying power to the internal circuit such as a power failure monitoring circuit to be performed via the live line failure prevention circuit 2100. Further, power is supplied from the main control board 710 to the electrical components on the downstream side of the main control board 710 via the live line failure prevention circuit 2100.

Hereinafter, such a hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG.
As described above, in the main control board 710 according to this embodiment, the three types of DC power supplies “+ 34V”, “+ 18V”, and “+ 9V” are first subjected to the hot line failure as shown in FIG. Input to the prevention circuit 2100. On the other hand, in the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100, the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for "+ 34V", the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for "+ 18V", and the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100c for "+ 9V". It is configured with. However, among these, in the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for "+ 18V", the voltage input as the DC power supply "+ 18V" is firstly converted into its ripple component (voltage) by the CR filter comprising the resistor R100 and the electrolytic capacitor C100. The superimposed alternating current component) is removed and smoothed. The smoothed voltage of “+ 18V” is the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for “+ 34V”, the hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for “+ 18V”, and the hot line failure prevention circuit for “+ 9V”. It is used for on / off control in relay switch circuits RL1 to RL3 described later provided in 2100c.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of these three types of hot-wire failure prevention circuits 2100 will be described separately.

[Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 34V”]
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100a for “+ 34V” includes a relay switch circuit RL1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH1 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C101 and a capacitor C102. The relay switch circuit RL1 includes a coil, an iron piece, a switch, and the like. When a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (turned on). The circuit between the side input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH1, and + 34V from the payout control board 720 is electrically connected to one of these connected in parallel. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C101. By this electrolytic capacitor C101, ripples (AC components convolved with voltage) are removed and smoothed. Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C102 grounded to the ground.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C101 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is the thermistor TH1. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C101. As a result, welding due to the inrush current between the + 34V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 34V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is suppressed, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, in a state where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so that the switch in the relay switch circuit RL1 is turned on to avoid the thermistor TH1. Since the circuit structure is adopted, it is possible to suitably suppress power consumption during normal use while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 34V voltage supply line. The characteristics of the thermistor TH1 in this embodiment are an initial resistance value of 5 ohms (Ω), a maximum capacity current of 4A, and a residual resistance value of 0.35Ω. When a current flows through the thermistor TH1, the thermistor TH1 generates heat. The resistance value changes. As a result, even if the relay switch circuit RL1 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH1 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH1 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change is used as a protective resistance against an inrush current, for example, a cement resistance, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component that malfunctions under the influence of heat near the fixed resistor, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH1 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as the protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH1 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, an electronic component can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH1, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH1. Note that the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL1 in this embodiment are an on-voltage of 13.5 V and an off-voltage of 0.9 V, and the on / off time of the switch built in the relay switch circuit RL1 is the resistance R100 described above. The relay is preset from the time constant of the capacitor C100, and when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL1 is turned on, the inrush current is already lowered, and the resistance value is extremely small compared to the thermistor TH1. It flows to the switch of the switch circuit RL1.

[Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 18V”]
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100b for “+ 18V” includes a relay switch circuit RL2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH2 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C103 and a capacitor C104. The relay switch circuit RL2 has the same configuration as the relay switch circuit RL1, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current flows through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (turned on), and the switch side A circuit between input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The 2nd and 3rd pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH2, and one of these connected in parallel is electrically connected to “+ 18V” from the dispensing control board 720. The other is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C103. The electrolytic capacitor C103 removes and smoothes ripples (alternating current component convolved with voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C104 grounded.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C103 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is not affected by the thermistor TH2. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C103. As a result, welding due to the inrush current between the + 18V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 18V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b is suppressed, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, in a state where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH2 by turning on the switch in the relay switch circuit RL2. Since the circuit structure is adopted, it is possible to suitably suppress power consumption during normal use while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 18V voltage supply line. The characteristic of the thermistor TH2 in this embodiment is the same as the characteristic of the thermistor TH1 described above. When a current flows through the thermistor TH2, its resistance value changes as the thermistor TH2 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay switch circuit RL2 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value thereof decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed, thereby preventing the thermistor TH2 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change is used as a protective resistance against an inrush current, for example, a cement resistance, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component that malfunctions under the influence of heat near the fixed resistor, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH2, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH2 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, an electronic component can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH2, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 with respect to the heat generated by the thermistor TH2. Note that the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL2 in the present embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL1 described above, and the inrush current has already decreased when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL2 is turned on. Therefore, the resistance value is much smaller than that of the thermistor TH2 and flows through the switch of the relay switch circuit RL2.

[Hot-line failure prevention circuit for “+ 9V”]
The hot line failure prevention circuit 2100c for “+9 V” includes a relay switch circuit RL3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Fujitsu Takamizawa: JV-18S-KT), and a thermistor TH3 (in this embodiment, manufactured by Ishizuka Electronics: 5D2-11LC). And an electrolytic capacitor C1 and a capacitor C2. The relay switch circuit RL3 has the same configuration as the relay switch circuits RL1 and RL2, and when a voltage is applied between the coil side input pins and a current is passed through the coil, the iron piece moves and the switch is turned on (ON). A circuit between switch side input pins is connected. The first pin as the coil side input pin is grounded and the fourth pin as the coil side input pin is electrically connected to the above-mentioned smoothed “+ 18V”. As a result, a current flows through the coil and the switch is turned on. The second and third pins as the switch side input pins are electrically connected in parallel with the thermistor TH3, and one of the parallel connections is electrically connected to “+ 9V” from the dispensing control board 715. The other side is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded electrolytic capacitor C1. The electrolytic capacitor C1 removes and smoothes the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage). Further, noise is removed by the capacitor C2 grounded.

  Here, when the game effect control unit 99 (the game effect unit 4 and various control boards attached thereto) is stored in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor in the main control board 710 is stored. C1 is already discharged. According to such a configuration, even if the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected in a state where the power switch is turned on, the inrush current described above is the thermistor TH3. And is charged by the electrolytic capacitor C1. This suppresses welding due to the inrush current between the + 9V voltage supply line of the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the + 9V voltage supply line of the frame side main drawer connector 2000b, and the main control board 710, And the reliability concerning the power supply of the electrical components and the like downstream of the main control board 710 is preferably maintained.

  In addition, in a state where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are properly connected, a current flows so as to avoid the thermistor TH2 by turning on the switch in the relay switch circuit RL2. Since the circuit structure is adopted, the power consumption during normal use can be suitably suppressed while suppressing welding due to the inrush current of the + 9V voltage supply line. The characteristics of the thermistor TH3 in the present embodiment are the same as those of the thermistors TH1 and TH2, and when a current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value thereof changes as the thermistor TH3 generates heat. As a result, even when the relay switch circuit RL3 does not operate, for example, when an inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the thermistor TH3 itself is prevented from generating heat, thereby preventing the thermistor TH3 from being damaged. be able to.

  Incidentally, when a fixed resistance whose resistance value does not change is used as a protective resistance against an inrush current, for example, a cement resistance, it is necessary to use a large type of high power capable of withstanding heat generation. For this reason, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component that malfunctions under the influence of heat near the fixed resistor, and it is necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710. On the other hand, when the thermistor TH2 whose resistance value changes with temperature is used as a protective resistance against the inrush current, when the inrush current flows through the thermistor TH3, the resistance value decreases and the heat generation of the thermistor TH3 itself is suppressed. . For this reason, an electronic component can be disposed in the vicinity of the thermistor TH3, and it is not necessary to increase the board size of the main control board 710 against the heat generated by the thermistor TH3. Note that the characteristics of the relay switch circuit RL3 in this embodiment are the same as the characteristics of the relay switch circuits RL1 and RL2 described above, and when the switch of the relay switch circuit RL3 is turned on, the inrush current has already decreased. Thus, the resistance value is much smaller than that of the thermistor TH3 and flows through the switch of the relay switch circuit RL3.

  In the above embodiment, the unit-side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame-side main drawer connector 2000b are electrically connected only by housing the game effect control unit 99 in the game effect unit installation recess 30 of the main body frame 3. The main control board 710 is provided with a hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 under the background that the power supply is supplied to the electrical components below the main control board 710. That is, in this case, the live line failure prevention circuit 2100 is provided on the power line immediately below where the unit side main drawer connector 2000a and the frame side main drawer connector 2000b are erroneously connected with the power switch turned on. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately ensure the reliability related to the power supply of the electrical components below the main control board 710. However, in terms of protection from the inrush current, the board (discharging control board 720) provided on the upstream side of the main control board 710 or downstream of the main control board 710 is inferior to the case of the above embodiment. A hot-wire failure prevention circuit 2100 may be provided on a power supply line of a substrate provided on the side.

  In the above embodiment, the thermistors TH1, TH2, and TH3 are used as the resistance for protection from the inrush current. However, an appropriate resistance may be used. That is, in this case, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 are electrically connected in series with the resistors and the relays RL1, RL2, and RL3. When an inrush current flows, the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 flow to the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 via the resistors. . For this reason, the inrush current which flows into electrolytic capacitor C1, C101, C103 can be reduced by converting inrush current into heat with resistance. On the other hand, after the inrush current flows, current is passed through the electrolytic capacitors C1, C101, and C103 through the relays RL1, RL2, and RL3 without passing through the resistors. Thereby, destruction of resistance can be prevented.

  By the way, the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above has the following technical idea. The following technical ideas are provided alone or in appropriate combination.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
An outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape;
A main body frame that is pivotally supported on one side of the front surface of the outer frame and is freely opened and closed;
A game production unit having a game area accommodated in the body frame and allowing a game ball to flow down;
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means for receiving the command from the main control means and managing the production control,
The main body frame includes a pair of thin-walled main body frame side walls provided in proximity to the inner walls on both the left and right sides of the outer frame and a thin-walled main body frame upper wall provided in the vicinity of the upper surface inner wall of the outer frame. Have
The main body frame side wall portion and the main body frame upper wall portion are substantially erected from the front surface of the outer frame to a rear position beyond the rear surface, thereby forming an enclosure by the main body frame side wall portion and the main body frame upper wall portion. Is configured as a wall that forms a large storage space inside,
The game production unit is
A transparent game board portion in which the game area is formed;
An opening is formed substantially at the center, and a three-dimensional wide area effect area is formed between the game board part and the game board part on the back side of the game board part. A back unit on which a luminous decoration is placed,
An effect image display device that is arranged substantially in parallel with the game board portion in the opening located at a rear distance from the game board portion and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image design,
And can be accommodated only from the front surface in the large accommodation space,
The game board part is
A discharge port formed on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area, and capable of discharging the game ball driven into the game area;
A flow mode changing means for irregularly changing the flow mode of the game ball flowing down toward the discharge port;
A first receiving port that can receive a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area one by one by the flow mode changing means;
A second receiving port capable of accepting a game ball driven toward the game area;
A closed state provided in the vicinity of the second receiving port, in which it is impossible or difficult to receive a game ball into the second receiving port, and an open state in which the game ball can be received into the second receiving port; A movable member capable of opening and closing between,
In the gaming area,
The main control means includes
An acceptance detection means for detecting acceptance of a game ball at the first acceptance port or the second acceptance port;
Movable control means for controlling the opening and closing operation of the movable member;
A winning determination process for determining whether or not to win based on the first probability in accordance with the detection of the reception of the game ball at the first receiving port or the second receiving port by the receiving detecting means, and the winning determination When the process is determined to be a win, the prize includes at least a grand prize that can be awarded to a player with a large number of game balls as prizes and a small prize that has less game balls that can be given to players as prizes than the prizes. A lottery means for performing a winning type determination process for determining which of the winners is won,
When it is determined that the winning determination process is won, a game per prize based on the prize or a game per prize based on the prize can be executed according to the winning type determined in the winning type determination process Na hit game execution means,
Usually, the second receiving port is controlled to a normal gaming state in which the movable member is controlled in a normal state in which there is little expectation that the game ball will be received at the second entrance, or the expectation is not given to the player, and a predetermined condition is satisfied In such a case, the movable member is controlled in a promotion mode in which the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port is promoted more than in the normal mode, and is won more than the first probability instead of the first probability. Gaming state control means capable of controlling to the first advantageous gaming state in which the winning determination process is performed based on a second probability having a high probability;
Specific condition establishment determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that can be satisfied with a predetermined probability is satisfied when it is determined that the winning determination is made in the winning determination process;
At least,
The sub-control means is
Effect image display control means capable of performing display control of effect image symbols displayed on the effect image display device based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
A light emission control means for controlling the lighting decoration body to be turned on and / or turned off in a mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means;
And at least
In the effect image design displayed on the effect image display device,
A first effect image design that suggests that the gaming state after the game per grand prize or the game per small prize is controlled to the first advantageous gaming state;
And a second effect image design that suggests that the game state after the game per grand prize or the game per prize can be controlled to the normal game state,
And at least two types of effect image designs are included,
In the normal gaming state that can be controlled by the gaming state control means,
A first normal gaming state in which the winning determination process is performed based on the first probability;
And a second normal gaming state in which the winning determination process is performed based on the second probability instead of the first probability,
Is included at least,
When it is determined that the winning determination process is won,
When the winning type determined in the winning type determining process is per special grand prize among the grand prizes,
The first effect image symbol can be displayed on the effect image display device by the effect image display control means, and a gaming state after a game per winning a prize based on the special grand prize is executed is the gaming state control means. Is controlled to the first advantageous gaming state by
When the winning type determined in the winning type determining process is the first normal grand prize per the grand prize,
The first effect image design can be displayed on the effect image display device by the effect image display control means without displaying the first effect image symbol on the effect image display device, and the normal grand prize award. The gaming state after the game based on the grand prize is executed is controlled to the first normal gaming state by the gaming state control means,
Further, when the winning type determined in the winning type determining process is a normal small prize among the small prizes,
The effect display control means displays an effect image suggesting that the player has won the normal prize, and the game after the game per prize based on the normal prize is executed. The state is controlled to the second normal gaming state by the gaming state control means,
In the case where it is determined that the winning determination process is lost,
When it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition establishment determination means, a similar effect image that is very similar to the effect image that suggests that the normal prize is won by the effect display control means. A game state that is displayed on the effect image display device and is very similar to the game per prize is performed, and the game state after the very similar game is performed is the game state when the specific condition is satisfied Regardless of whether or not the gaming state control means is controlled to the gaming state when the specific condition is satisfied,
Furthermore, in a gaming state controlled after the game per prize or the very similar game is executed,
Although the game state is controlled to the normal game state by the game state control means, the time during which the effect image indicating a command to achieve a specific condition is displayed on the effect image display device for a predetermined period only. In addition to display control indicating the limit mode,
When winning the grand prize during the time limit mode, an effect image indicating that the specific condition has been achieved is displayed on the effect image display device,
When the predetermined period has passed without winning the winning prize during the time limit mode, an effect image indicating that the specific condition has been achieved is not displayed on the effect image display device. The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control in the time limit mode ends.

  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes an outer frame 2 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a main body frame 3, a game effect unit 4 having a game area 20, a main control means (main control board 710) that controls the progress of the game, In addition, sub-control means (peripheral control board 810, display device control board 816) that receives a command from the main control means and controls production control is provided.

  The main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on one side of the front surface of the outer frame 2 and is provided so as to be openable / closable with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 has a pair of thin main body frame side wall portions and a thin main body frame upper wall portion. The pair of main body frame side wall portions are provided in proximity to the inner walls of the left and right side surfaces of the outer frame 2. Thereby, the distance between a pair of main body frame side wall parts can be enlarged. Further, the main body frame upper wall portion is provided close to the upper surface inner wall of the outer frame 2. Thereby, the height direction length of a main-body-frame upper wall part can be enlarged.

  The main body frame side wall portion and the main body frame upper wall portion are configured as wall bodies that are substantially erected from the front surface of the outer frame 2 to a rear position beyond the rear surface of the outer frame 2. A space surrounded by the main body frame side wall and the main body frame upper wall is formed inside the wall. In addition, the wall body has the maximum distance between the distance between the side walls of the main body frame and the length in the height direction of the upper wall of the main body frame (as long as the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2) While maintaining, it extends to the rear of the outer frame 2. That is, the wall body (that is, the main body frame 3) extends in the depth direction while maintaining the length in the left-right direction and the height direction, and is surrounded by the distance between the side walls of the main body frame and the upper wall portion of the main body frame. The above-described space functions as a large storage space. In this large accommodation space, the game effect unit 4 can be accommodated only from the front.

  The “body frame side wall portion” of the above technical idea extends from the peripheral wall 290 to 293 to the peripheral wall 290 to 293 adjacent to the side frame plates 12 and 13 (that is, from the inner surface on the shaft support side toward the rear). Corresponds to the peripheral wall 290-293) and the peripheral wall 290-293) extending rearward from the inner surface on the open side. Further, the “main body frame upper wall portion” of the above technical idea is extended from the peripheral wall 290 to 293 of the peripheral wall 290 to 293 to the rear of the upper frame plate 10 (that is, from the flange portion of the upper side toward the rear. It corresponds to the peripheral wall 290-293).

  As described above, the game effect unit 4 is accommodated in the large accommodation space from the front surface of the large accommodation space. In this way, the game effect unit 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Further, the game effect unit 4 includes a game board portion (configured by a front component member 680, a center accessory 620, a game panel 409 and a panel holder 540), a back unit 510, and an effect image display device (effect display device 115). At least. The game panel 409 having the center accessory 620 attached to the substantially central opening is sandwiched between the panel holder 540 and the front component member 680 corresponds to the “game board”.

  The game board part (specifically, the game panel 409 constituting the game board part) is made of a transparent plate made of resin, and a game area 20 in which a game ball can flow down is formed in the game board part. As described above, since both the distance between the side walls of the main body frame and the length in the height direction of the upper wall portion of the main body frame are maximized, the game area 20 can be enlarged. . Moreover, since both the length in the left-right direction and the length in the height direction can be increased, it is possible to increase the game area 20 while maintaining a substantially perfect circle similar to the conventional one.

  Further, the back unit 510 has an opening at the substantially center where the display surface of the effect image display device faces. When attached to the rear surface of the game board portion, an effect space 510G is formed between the game board portion (specifically, the game panel 409 constituting the game board portion) and the back unit 510. This production space 510G is formed over substantially the entire back surface side of the game panel 409, and the game area 20 is enlarged as described above, so it has been enlarged both in the horizontal direction and in the vertical direction. It becomes a wide space. Furthermore, since the game effect unit 4 is accommodated in a large accommodation space having a sufficient depth, the above-described wide area space can function as a three-dimensional wide area effect area. As a result, it is possible to produce a powerful and realistic presentation.

  Further, the effect image display device is arranged so that the display surface of the effect image display device faces the opening formed in the back unit 510. This effect image display device is a liquid crystal display capable of displaying a predetermined effect image design (decorative design 1153), and a game board part (specifically, a game board part is provided so that the effect image design can be visually recognized from the front). It is arranged substantially in parallel with the gaming panel 409) that constitutes it.

  The back unit 510 includes a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies (light-like decorative bodies 520), and the light-emitting decorative bodies are within the above-described effect space 510G and the outer periphery of the effect image display device (in front view). That is, it is disposed along the outer edge of the opening formed in the back unit 510. Thereby, the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body can be grasped via the transparent game panel 409. In addition, since the light emitting decorative body is disposed on the back side of the gaming panel 409 in which the gaming area 20 is formed (it is not necessary to be disposed in the gaming area 20), it can obstruct the flow space of the gaming ball. The game area 20 can be arranged uniformly throughout the entire back surface. Thereby, it is possible not only to employ a plurality of or relatively large light emitting decorations, but also to employ a large effect image display device as long as it is not wasted. In addition, it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

  By the way, if the effect image display device is made larger than necessary, not only the useless display area increases, but also the cost increases. In other words, since the human eye cannot gaze at all of the large area screen, even if the production image display device is enlarged more than necessary, it is the specific area of the large area screen that is being watched during the game. This is the only area. Therefore, even if an effect or the like is performed in an area where the player can watch, the player hardly notices it. Therefore, in the present invention, it is preferable to employ a light emitting decorative body having a higher luminance than a liquid crystal display, such as a lamp or LED. As a result, even if the light emitting decorative body is arranged on the outer periphery of the effect image display device in front view (that is, the region where the player cannot gaze or is difficult), the light emitting aspect such as turning on, flashing, and / or turning off the light emitting decorative body Can be grasped.

  In addition, the game board portion is provided in the game area 20 with a discharge port (out port 471), a flow mode changing means (failure nail 410), a first receiving port (first starting port 600), and a second receiving port (second starting). And a movable member (a pair of movable pieces 606).

  The discharge port is formed on the most downstream side in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area 20, and is not received by any of the ports that can receive the game ball, such as the first receiving port and the second receiving port. The game balls are collected from the outlet and discharged out of the pachinko machine 1.

  The flow-down mode changing means irregularly changes the flow mode of the game balls flowing down toward the discharge port. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are first received one by one by the flow-down mode changing means. Acceptable at the entrance.

  In addition, game balls flowing down the game area can be received at the second receiving port.

  The movable member is a so-called “electric chew” and is provided in the vicinity of the second receiving port (third starting port 604). Then, an opening / closing operation can be performed between a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to receive the game ball at the second receiving port and an open state where the game ball can be received at the second receiving port. The movable member is not limited to the electric chew, and may be any member that can be displaced between a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball into the second receiving port and a state where it is possible.

  The main control means includes acceptance detection means, movable control means (movable piece opening / closing control means 928), lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 900, second special symbol lottery means 910), winning game execution means (big hit game execution means) 715), at least a gaming state control means 934 and a specific condition establishment judging means.

  The acceptance detection means detects acceptance of a game ball at the first acceptance port or acceptance of a game ball at the second acceptance port (step S110). Specifically, when a game ball is received at the first receiving port, the first starting port sensor 780 detects the game ball, and the detection by the first starting port sensor 780 is detected by the CPU 711. Further, when the game ball is received at the second receiving port, it is detected by the second start port sensor 782, and the detection by the second start port sensor 782 is detected by the CPU 711. In the present embodiment, a second start port 602 is also provided in addition to the first start port 600 corresponding to the first receiving port and the third start port 604 corresponding to the second receiving port. When a game ball is received at the second starting port, it is detected by the acceptance detection means, and a winning determination process and a winning type determination process are performed by the lottery means.

  The movable control means controls the opening / closing operation of the movable member (the pair of movable pieces 606).

  The lottery means performs a winning determination process and a winning type determination process. The winning determination process is a process that always makes a determination of winning with a first winning probability in response to detection of acceptance of a game ball at the first receiving port or the second receiving port by the receiving detecting means ( Step S1311). Since the first winning probability is a probability in a gaming state (external normal gaming state A) in which the probability variation function does not operate, the winning determination process is always performed based on the first winning probability. The winning type determination process is a process of determining the winning type only when it is determined that the winning determination process is won (step S1312). The winning category includes at least a grand prize and a small prize. As will be described in detail later, per grand prize includes special grand prizes and regular grand prizes. The big prize is equivalent to the “long open big hit” in the present embodiment, and the small prize is equivalent to the “short open big hit” in the present embodiment.

  The lottery performed when detected by the first acceptance detection means and the lottery performed when detected by the second acceptance detection means may be the same process or different processes. good. In the case of different processing, for example, determination regarding winning in the first winning determination process is performed in accordance with detection of the reception of gaming balls at the first receiving port, and detection of receiving of gaming balls at the second receiving port is performed. Accordingly, determination regarding winning is performed in the second winning determination process. In this case, for example, a random number generator for generating a random number used for determination of winning or / and a table used for determination of winning are different in the first winning determination process and the second winning determination process. In addition, the winning type determination process includes a winning type determining process that is performed when the winning determination is determined in the first winning determining process, and a winning type determining process that is performed when the winning determination is determined in the second winning determining process. The processes may be the same or different. In the case of different processing, for example, when it is determined that the winning is determined in the first winning determination process, the winning type is determined in the first winning type determining process, and when it is determined that the winning is determined in the second winning determination process. In the second winning type determination process, the winning type is determined.

  In addition, “always make a determination on winning based on the first probability” always means that the winning determination is based on the first probability (unless it is won when controlled to the first advantageous gaming state). This means that the game state (external normal game state A) is controlled.

  The winning game executing means executes a winning game according to the winning type determined in the winning type determining process when it is determined that the winning determination process is won. Specifically, when it is determined that the winning type in the winning type determination process is per grand prize, the winning game executing means executes a game per grand prize that can be given to the player as a large amount of game balls as a prize. To do. In addition, when it is determined that the winning type in the winning type determination process is per small prize, the winning game execution means has less game balls that can be given to the player as a prize than the prize per game. Run a game.

  The gaming state control means 934 always controls to the normal gaming state, and controls to the first advantageous gaming state only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. “When the predetermined condition is satisfied” is, for example, a case where a so-called probability variation symbol is won in the lottery by the lottery means.

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the movable member is controlled in a normal manner by the movable control means. The “normal time mode” is a mode in which there is less expectation that a game ball is received in the second reception port or a mode in which the player is not expected to receive game balls in the second reception port. This means a mode in which the frequency of accepting game balls to the movable member is almost the same as in the closed state even when the movable member is in the open state, or a mode in which the movable member is always maintained in the closed state. “A mode in which the reception frequency of the game ball to the movable member is almost the same as that in the closed state” means, for example, that the game ball is opened for a moment so that the game ball cannot be won. It means an aspect that is open to the extent that it does not affect the winning frequency. This normal game state corresponds to the external normal game state of the present embodiment.

  The first advantageous gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to a player who is controlled when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the movable member is controlled to the promotion mode by the movable control means, and the first winning probability is Instead of this, it is a gaming state in which a winning determination process is performed based on a second winning probability (probability when the probability variation function is activated) higher than the first winning probability. The “promotion mode” is a mode in which the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port is promoted more than the normal mode, for example, the frequency of receiving the game ball at the second port is higher than that in the normal mode. As described above, the movable member is maintained in an open state for a certain period of time, or the movable member is opened and closed multiple times. This first advantageous game state corresponds to the external advantageous game state B of the present embodiment.

  The second winning probability is preferably at least twice as high as the first winning probability. Thereby, when the winning determination process is performed with the second winning probability, it is clearly advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the winning determination process is performed with the first winning probability. In other words, the winning frequency will eventually converge to the winning probability, but generally will be biased when viewed in a short cycle. In consideration of such a bias, it is preferable that the second winning probability is two times higher than the first winning probability.

  The specific condition establishment determination means is a process of determining whether or not a specific condition that can be satisfied with a predetermined probability is satisfied only when it is determined that the winning determination is made in the winning determination process (step S1314).

  The sub-control means has at least an effect image display control means and a light emission control means.

  The effect image display control means can perform display control of the effect image symbol displayed on the effect image display device based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The effect image symbol includes at least two types of effect image symbols, a first effect image symbol and a second effect image symbol.

  The first effect image symbol is a symbol that suggests being controlled to the first advantageous gaming state, and the second effect image symbol is a symbol that suggests being controlled to the normal gaming state. Specifically, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win and the game state after the winning game based on the win is executed is controlled to the first advantageous game state, the first effect image The winning can be indicated by the symbol (for example, a doublet of the first effect image symbol can be displayed on the effect image display device). On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a win and the game state after the winning game based on the win is executed is controlled to the normal game state, the win is indicated by the second effect image design. (For example, a doublet of the second effect image design is displayed on the effect image display device). Even when the gaming state after the winning game is executed is controlled to the first advantageous gaming state, the second effect image design may be displayed on the effect image display device. However, when the gaming state after the winning game is executed is controlled to the normal gaming state, the first effect image design is not displayed on the effect image display device. In other words, when the first effect image symbol is displayed on the effect image display device, the subsequent game state is always the first advantageous game state, while the second effect image symbol is displayed on the effect image display device. However, the subsequent gaming state is not necessarily the normal gaming state (there may be the first advantageous gaming state). Note that the first effect image symbol corresponds to the specific symbol of the present embodiment, and the second effect image symbol corresponds to the semi-specific symbol of the present embodiment.

  Further, the normal game state that can be controlled by the game state control means includes a first normal game state and a second normal game state.

  The first normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the movable member is controlled in a normal manner by the movable control means and the winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability. On the other hand, in the second normal gaming state, the winning determination process is performed based on the second winning probability instead of the first winning probability even though the movable member is controlled in the normal state by the movement control means. The game state.

  The first normal gaming state corresponds to “external normal gaming state A” in the present embodiment, and the second normal gaming state corresponds to “external normal gaming state B” in the present embodiment.

  By the way, when it is determined that the winning determination process is won while being controlled in the normal gaming state, it is controlled as follows by each control means (gaming state control means, effect image display control means, light emission control means). The

  When the winning type determined in the winning type determination process is per special grand prize (first long open big hit) among the big prizes (long open big hit), the first effect image design (specific design) in the effect image display device ), For example, when the blue eyes are stopped and displayed or the like (for example, it is not always indicated that the first effect image design is successful). When the effect image display device indicates that the first effect image symbol is a winning game, a game per grand prize (first long open big game) based on the special grand prize is executed. Then, the gaming state after the game per winning prize is finished is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 to the first advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state B). In the first advantageous gaming state, it is preferable that the light emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520) is in an advantageous mode and a flashy light effect is performed. This is because the player can confirm that the flashy performance is performed without gazing at the light emitting decorative body. Moreover, this flashy production is performed in a wide-area production area using almost the entire area on the back side of the game board part (specifically, the game panel 409 constituting the game board part), so a three-dimensional deep aura is provided. It can be brewed from the entire pachinko machine 1 and can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since this light emission effect is performed around the effect image display device (that is, the part where the player is difficult to watch), the flashy light effect can be performed without adversely affecting the player's eyes. The “flashy light emission effect” is an effect that enhances the player's mood, such as an effect of performing illumination with a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies.

  In addition, when the winning type determined in the winning type determining process is the first normal grand prize (the third long open big hit) out of the big prize (the long open big hit), the first effect is displayed in the effect image display device. An image symbol is not displayed on the effect image display device, and it can be shown that the second effect image symbol (semi-specific symbol) is a win by, for example, a stoppage display of the second effect image symbol (semi-specific symbol). The effect image design does not indicate that it is a win, and for example, if there is a third effect image symbol, the third effect image symbol may indicate that it is a win). When the effect image display device indicates that the win is indicated by the second effect image symbol, a game per winning prize based on the first normal winning a prize (third long open winning game) is executed. Then, the gaming state after the game per winning prize is finished is controlled by the gaming state control means 934 to the first normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A). In the first normal game state, it is preferable that the light emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520) is controlled in the normal mode. This normal mode is a modest mode than the advantageous mode, and corresponds to, for example, light extinction or dark lighting. This is because the player can grasp that the gaming state is not advantageous to the player. Note that “without the first effect image symbol being displayed on the effect image display device” means that the first effect image symbol is not displayed on the effect image display device as a stop symbol indicating a win. This does not mean that the first effect image symbol is not included in the effect image symbol (decoration symbol 1153) that is variably displayed.

  Further, when the winning type determined in the winning type determining process is a normal prize per second prize (second short open jackpot), an effect image indicating that the player has won the normal prize is displayed on the effect image display device. Is done. The “effect image that suggests that the player has won the normal prize” may be displayed by a combination of effect image designs (decorative designs 1153), or may be displayed according to the form of the background image displayed on the background of the effect image designs. May be. Then, when the effect image indicating that the player has won the normal prize is displayed on the effect image display device, the winning game execution means executes the game per prize. Then, the gaming state after the game per prize is executed is controlled to the second normal gaming state (external normal gaming state B) by the gaming state control means.

  Next, when it is determined that the winning determination process is made when the normal gaming state is controlled, the following control is performed by each control means (game state control means, effect image display control means, light emission control means). Is done. In addition, when it is determined that the winning determination is made in the winning determination process, the winning type determining process is naturally not performed, and it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition establishment determining means. .

  When it is determined that the specific condition is established by the specific condition establishment determining means, the effect image display control means produces an effect image that is very similar to the effect image that suggests that the player has won the normal prize. It is displayed on the display device. In addition, a very similar game that is very similar to the game per prize is executed. Even if a very similar game is executed, the game state does not change, and the game state when the specific condition is satisfied is continued.

  If the specific condition is not satisfied, the effect image design suggesting that the lottery result is out of place is displayed on the effect image display device.

  Note that “similar to a production image that suggests that you have won a regular prize” is very similar to a production image that suggests that you have won a regular prize, and that you have won a regular prize. It means that it is similar to the extent that the player cannot grasp whether or not it is an effect image that suggests. Also, “similar to a game per prize” means that it is very similar to a game per prize and is similar to the extent that a player cannot grasp whether or not a game per prize is executed. To do.

  As described above, both the mode displayed on the effect image display device and the game mode are very similar between the case where the prize is won per normal prize and the case where the specific condition is satisfied. Moreover, after a game per prize based on a normal prize as a game mode (referred to as a game per normal prize) is executed, the game is controlled to the second normal game state. After being executed, it is controlled to the first normal gaming state. In addition, the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state have the same aspect that can be grasped from the appearance (that is, the movable members are all in the normal state), so that it is usually small for the player. It is not possible to grasp whether a winning condition is won or a specific condition is met. However, the winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability in the first normal gaming state, whereas the winning determination process is performed based on the second winning probability in the second normal gaming state. Therefore, although the aspect grasped from the appearance is the same, the internal state (that is, the winning probability) is greatly different. Thereby, when a very similar effect image is displayed (when a very similar game is executed), the player has a sense of expectation that a winning determination process may be performed based on the second winning probability. Therefore, even if you want to quit the game, you will not be able to quit and the occupancy rate will improve.

  Furthermore, in the gaming state after the normal prize winning game or the very similar game is executed, the following control is performed by each control means (game state control means, effect image display control means, and light emission control means).

  As described above, the gaming state after the game per normal prize is executed is controlled to the second normal gaming state (external normal gaming state B), and the gaming state after the very similar game is executed is the first gaming state. It is controlled to the normal game state (external normal game state A). However, as described above, regardless of whether the game per normal prize or the very similar game is executed, the normal game state is controlled in spite of the fact that the subsequent game state is controlled to the normal game state. An effect image indicating the time limit mode is displayed only for a predetermined period. The effect image in the time limit mode is an effect image indicating an instruction (for example, an instruction such as “reach with a specific pattern” or “fill all alphabet colors”) that should achieve a specific condition. Then, when winning per grand prize during this time limit mode, an effect image indicating that a specific condition has been achieved is displayed on the symbol effect image display device before the lottery result is shown by the effect image. Thereby, the player can grasp that he won the grand prize even before the effect image symbol is displayed. In addition, when a predetermined period has elapsed without winning a grand prize during the time limit mode, the effect image indicating that the specific condition has been achieved is not displayed on the effect image display device, and the time limit mode Display control ends. The “predetermined period” means, for example, within a limited time such as 3 minutes or 5 minutes, or until a predetermined condition such as 30 times or 50 times the number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations in special symbols) is satisfied Corresponds.

  In addition, while the effect image indicating the time limit mode is displayed on the effect image display device, the light emission control unit controls the light emission decorative body (light-like decorative body 520) to be at least a flashy aspect than the normal aspect. It is preferable to do. This is because it is possible to make the player think that the player is in an advantageous state not only by the display by the effect image display device but also by the effect over substantially the entire game area 20.

  By the way, even if the time limit mode ends due to the elapse of the predetermined period, the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means 934 does not change. In other words, when the effect image of the time limit mode is displayed by winning per prize, even if the time limit mode is ended, the second normal determination process is performed with the second winning probability. Controlled to gaming state. Therefore, even if the player is disappointed by the end of the time limit mode, the winning determination process may actually be performed based on the second winning probability. At this time, the player can win at an early stage even though the player recognizes that the game state is determined to be the winning determination process with the normal probability (that is, the first winning probability). On the contrary, it is possible to give the player a sense that the player has won the game unexpectedly (such a win is referred to as an “unexpected win”). In addition, since the player wins at a frequency higher than the first winning probability, the player assumes that “Today is a lucky day” and enjoys playing the game. Therefore, it is preferable that the light emission control means controls the light emitting decorative body to be in the normal mode after the time limit mode ends. As a result, the player can be made aware that the advantageous state for the player has ended, so that the joy of winning at an early stage is doubled.

  It should be noted that such an unexpected hit is actually a second winning prize, even though it appears to be a gaming state (first normal gaming state) in which a winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability. This is caused by the existence of a gaming state (second normal gaming state) in which a winning determination process is performed based on the probability. Therefore, the winning is intentionally performed at a relatively high frequency by using a more advantageous winning probability (second winning probability) without depending only on the standard winning probability (first winning probability) in the normal gaming state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Moreover, since the winning determination process is performed with the standard winning probability (first winning probability) even in the first normal gaming state, the number of executions of the winning determination process (in other words, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is increased. For example, it is not intentionally set to a game state that falls into the so-called humiliation of thousands of times (however, there is a possibility that it falls into the so-called hamari accidentally), so the willingness to continue the game is not lost, Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, it is possible to produce a deep effect depending on whether the light emitting decoration (light-like decoration 520) arranged in the three-dimensional space (ie, the effect space 510G) is turned on or off. For example, the game area 20 is changed by changing the duty ratio of the pulse wave transmitted to the light-emitting decorative body between when the first normal gaming state is controlled and when the second normal gaming state is controlled. The atmosphere emanating from the whole will change. In addition, since the effect space 510G is formed in substantially the entire back surface of the game area 20, by controlling the light emission mode of the light-emitting decorative body (light-like decorative object 520) arranged in the effect space 510G, the game state and the like This information can be transmitted to fuzzy. That is, even when the game state is controlled to a normal game state that is not advantageous to the player, it is possible to add interest to guessing the current game state from the aura emitted from the gaming machine, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the aspect of the effect image displayed on the effect image display device is the same or similar to each other in the case of being controlled to the first normal game state and the case of being controlled to the second normal game state. On the other hand, only the light emitting mode of the light emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520) may be different while the effect image is used. As a result, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the player is controlled to the first normal gaming state or the second gaming state, but the second ordinary It is possible to give a sense that the game state is controlled.

[Technology 2]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1,
A locking device provided on the free end side of the main body frame so as to restrict the opening of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame, and having a sliding bar which is slidable in the vertical direction;
The outer frame is
While formed by a pair of vertical plates arranged in the longitudinal direction and a pair of horizontal plates arranged in the short direction,
At least the vertical plate on the free end side has an outer wall portion formed substantially flat by a thin plate member, and a thickness portion formed by bending or standing up from the rear portion of the outer wall portion. In addition, a space in the vertical plate having the width of the thickness portion is formed inside the outer wall portion,
The sliding bar of the locking device is a gaming machine characterized in that the main body frame is accommodated in the space in the vertical plate in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

  The technical idea 2 further includes a locking device 60. The locking device 60 is provided on the free end side of the main body frame 3 (that is, the opposite side of the shaft support side) so as to restrict the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is slidable in the vertical direction ( The door frame sliding rod 971 and / or the body frame sliding rod 984).

  The outer frame 2 includes a longitudinal plate (side frame plates 12 and 13) arranged in a longitudinal direction (that is, a longitudinal direction) and a pair of left and right sides, and a horizontal plate (upper frame plate 10 and a bottom plate) arranged in a short direction and a pair of upper and lower sides. Frame plate 11).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the vertical plate of the outer frame 2 is composed of a light metal thin plate made of aluminum, for example, and due to the synergistic effect of making the vertical plate a thin plate and thinning the main body frame side wall, The distance between the pair of main body frame side wall portions can be increased to the maximum allowable level. Note that the size of the gaming machine in the left-right direction is determined by a specified value, and according to the present invention, it can be increased to the limit within the range of the specified value.

  The vertical plate (side frame plate 13) on the free end side includes an outer wall portion 13a and a thickness portion 13b. The outer wall portion 13a is substantially flat that forms the outer edge of the vertical plate. On the other hand, the thickness portion 13b is formed by being bent or standing from the rear portion of the outer wall portion 13a to the inside (that is, the shaft support side). ing. In particular, a space in the vertical plate (outer frame space 13A) having a width of the thickness portion 13b is formed inside the outer wall portion 13a. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the sliding rod of the locking device 60 is accommodated in the vertical plate space on the free end side.

  Conventionally, the sliding bowl is generally arranged inside the inner peripheral wall of the outer frame 2, and the game board is arranged further inside than the sliding bowl. In this case, the game board is designed in consideration of the positional relationship with the sliding rod, and the size of the game board is limited. In this regard, in the above technical idea, the sliding rod is accommodated in the vertical plate space in a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, the lateral width of the game board portion is substantially equal to the lateral width of the gaming machine minus the thickness of the left and right vertical plates (the width of the thickness portion). As a result, a sufficient width of the game area can be secured.

[Technology 3]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2,
A payout device for paying out game balls as the game progresses;
A payout passage for guiding game balls stored in the gaming machine to the payout device;
Further comprising
The main body frame has a rear wall portion that extends inward from the rear end of the main body frame side wall portion and is positioned on the rear surface of the game effect unit;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the payout device and the payout passage are arranged on a back side of the rear wall portion.

  The technical idea 3 further includes a payout device (ball payout device 53) and a payout passage (ball passage unit 52). The payout device pays out game balls as the game progresses, and the payout passage guides the game balls stored in the game machine (pachinko machine 1) to the payout device.

  Further, the main body frame 3 has a rear wall portion (open side rear surface wall 294) extending inwardly from the rear end of the main body frame side wall portion (that is, the shaft support side). The rear wall portion is located on the rear surface of the game effect unit 4. That is, the main body frame side wall portion extends rearward from the rear end of the game effect unit 4, and the rear wall portion is bent inward from the rear end of the main body frame side wall portion. Thereby, the cheating from the side with respect to the game production unit 4 can be suppressed. Further, the depth of the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 becomes obvious at a glance due to the rear wall portion, which greatly contributes to the simplification of the design of the game effect unit 4.

  Conventionally, the main body frame 3 is provided with a payout device for paying out game balls and a payout passage for guiding the game balls to the payout device, but the game board is designed so as not to interfere with the payout device and the payout passage. Is common. Therefore, the space behind the game board is limited. In this regard, in the above technical idea, the payout device and the payout passage are arranged on the back side of the rear wall portion of the main body frame side wall portion. That is, the technical idea here is that the storage space for the game effect unit 4 is secured first, and no other gaming machine components are arranged in this storage space. As a result, the game effect unit 4 having the back unit 510 can be accommodated in substantially the entire back side of the game board portion, the depth can be increased behind the game area 20, and the effect area can be expanded rearward. It becomes. As a result, a three-dimensional effect space 510G can be formed.

[Technology 4]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3,
It further includes a prize ball tank capable of storing game balls supplied from a game island where game machines are installed,
The main body frame is formed such that a rear end of the main body frame upper wall portion is located on a rear surface of the game effect unit,
The prize ball tank is a gaming machine provided on an upper surface of the upper wall portion of the main body frame.

  The technical idea 4 further includes a prize ball tank 50. The prize ball tank 50 stores game balls supplied from a gaming machine island where gaming machines are installed. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 50 are sequentially guided to the payout device, and are paid out as the game progresses.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is formed so that the rear end of the main body frame upper wall portion is located on the rear surface of the game effect unit 4. That is, the upper body frame wall portion is positioned on the rear surface of the game effect unit 4. Thereby, fraudulent acts from above on the game effect unit 4 can be suppressed. Further, the depth of the accommodation space of the game effect unit 4 becomes easy to understand, which contributes to the design of the game effect unit 4 with ease.

  Furthermore, a prize ball tank 50 for storing game balls is provided on the upper surface of the upper wall portion of the main body frame. As described above, since the rear end of the main body frame upper wall portion is located on the rear surface of the game effect unit 4, by making the width of the prize ball tank 50 in the front-rear direction relatively wide, even if it is in a shallow dish shape. Even if formed, the game ball can be sufficiently stored. Thereby, the height of the prize ball tank 50 can be kept low. As a result, the upper wall portion of the main body frame can be formed close to the horizontal plate (upper frame plate 10), and the game effect unit 4 having a large game plate portion in the vertical direction can be formed as a large body frame 3. It can be accommodated in the accommodation space.

  Conventionally, a game board and other gaming machine components are attached to the main body frame, but due to the balance between the gaming board and the gaming machine components, there is a limit to the production area and the game area provided on the gaming board. In this regard, in the above technical idea, the main body frame 3 is provided with the main body frame side wall portion and the main body frame upper wall portion, thereby securing a large storage space as a storage space for the game effect unit 4. As a result, a three-dimensional effect area 510G can be secured over substantially the entire back side of the game board. In addition, only the large storage space that is secured needs to be taken into consideration, and it is not necessary to consider the balance with the gaming machine components, so that the design of the game production unit becomes relatively simple.

[Technology 5]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4,
A launching device that launches a game ball from a predetermined launch position and drives the game ball into the game region from a ball slot provided at the top of the game region;
A launch rail that is provided on the main body frame adjacent to the launch device and can guide a game ball launched by the launch device obliquely upward,
A substantially arc-shaped outer rail provided on the game board portion and capable of guiding a game ball guided by the launch rail to the ball slot;
A foul port is provided between the lower end portion of the outer rail and is provided on the game board portion for receiving a foul ball that has been launched by the launching device but has not reached the ball insertion port. The outer surface of the outer rail runs backward from the lower end of the outer rail and falls into the foul mouth, and the inclined surface is inclined toward the firing rail. And a guide part having an upper surface part capable of returning the foul ball to the firing rail side.

  In the technical idea 5, the game ball launched by the launching device 57 is guided obliquely upward by the launch rail 38 provided on the main body frame 3, and is further provided with a substantially arc-shaped outer rail provided on the game board portion ( The outer rail unit 472) is guided to the ball slot in the game area 20. Here, in particular, the game board portion is provided with a guide portion (connection passage portion 477) having an outer end portion (a shaft support side upper end portion of the connection passage portion 477) and an upper surface portion (upper surface of the connection passage portion 477). Yes. The outer end forms a foul mouth for receiving a foul ball between the lower end of the outer rail. Further, the foul ball that runs backward on the outer rail and flows down from the lower end of the outer rail is dropped into the foul mouth. The upper surface portion is configured by an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the firing rail, and returns a foul ball of the inclined surface to the firing rail 38 side. That is, the foul ball is returned to the predetermined launch position by the upper surface portion.

  Conventionally, the foul mouth is provided in the main body frame below the game board, and almost all of the foul balls are collected from the foul mouth. In other words, even a foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail is recovered from the foul mouth. For this reason, the foul ball that reaches the outer rail and is not visually recognized by the player is returned to the lower plate and needs to be returned to the upper plate by the player himself. Further, if the user forgets to return the game balls from the lower plate to the upper plate, the game balls on the upper plate are insufficient, and so-called empty shots can occur. In this regard, in the above technical idea, the foul ball on the upper surface portion of the guide portion is returned to the firing rail side. In other words, the foul ball that has failed to reach the outer rail is returned to the launch position. As a result, the time required for re-strike can be reduced, and launch adjustment is easier than before.

  Further, since the foul port is provided in the game board portion, the game balls that run backward on the outer rail can be quickly collected. Moreover, the foul ball flowing down from the lower end portion of the outer rail is dropped into the foul mouth by the outer end portion of the guide portion. This makes it possible to reliably collect the game balls that run backward on the outer rail.

[Technology 6]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 5,
When it is determined that the winning determination is determined in the winning determination process and the winning type determined in the winning type determination process is the second normal grand prize per prize,
The first effect image design is displayed on the effect image display device by the effect image display control means without the first effect image design being displayed on the effect image display device. A gaming state after a game per winning a prize based on a second normal winning a prize is executed is controlled to the second normal gaming state in which the winning determination process is performed based on the second probability. This is a gaming machine.

  According to the technical idea 6, the first effect image design does not indicate the lottery result regardless of whether the first normal prize or the second normal grand prize is won, and the second effect image. In spite of being able to be shown by the symbol, the gaming state after the game per winning prize based on the second winning prize per standard is executed is controlled to the second normal gaming state (external normal gaming state B). The second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the movable member is controlled in a normal state and the winning determination process is performed based on the second winning probability. Therefore, regardless of whether the first normal jackpot or the second normal jackpot is won, the normal game state controlled after the jackpot game ends is the first normal game state and the second normal game. It cannot be distinguished in appearance from the state. Therefore, the player determines that the game state is not advantageous to him and plays the game.

  In other words, while the player is controlled in the normal gaming state, the player determines that both the probability changing function and the release extension function are not operating, and plays the game. However, even in the normal gaming state, the winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability in the first normal gaming state, while the winning determination is performed based on the second winning probability in the second normal gaming state. Processing is performed. Therefore, even if the game state is controlled to the normal game state, the game state at this time may be the second normal game state, so there is a possibility of winning a big hit unexpectedly.

  This point will be described in detail. Even if the game state is controlled to the normal game state, if the second normal game state, the winning determination process is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, several tens of times). It goes without saying that the jackpot is won very frequently. On the other hand, even if the game is in the first normal gaming state, the winning determination process is performed with the standard winning probability (first winning probability) in the gaming machine, and the predetermined number of times (for example, several tens of times) There is also a good chance of winning before the winning decision process is performed.

  On the other hand, the player plays the game on the premise that it is in a normal gaming state, and it is recognized that the winning frequency is not high in this normal gaming state, so at a relatively early stage after the winning game is over. It is unexpected for a player to win in a row. In this way, if the player is elected unexpectedly, the player can think that he / she has “luck (good luck)” and can play the game in a good mood, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, such an unexpected hit is a game state (first normal game) in which the game state after the game per grand prize based on the normal grand prize is finished is determined to be a win determination process based on the first winning probability. The game state is actually caused by the presence of a gaming state (second normal gaming state) in which a winning determination process is performed based on the second winning probability. Therefore, without relying only on the standard jackpot winning probability (first winning probability) in the normal gaming state, intentionally comparing using the more advantageous jackpot winning probability (second winning probability) Since it is possible to win a jackpot in a row with a high frequency, the decline in interest can be suppressed. Moreover, since the winning determination process is performed with the standard jackpot winning probability (first probability) even in the first normal gaming state, the number of executions of the winning determination process (in other words, the number of changes in the special symbol) ) Is not intentionally set to a game state that falls into the so-called humiliation, for example, thousands of times (however, there is a possibility that it will accidentally fall into the so-called hamari), and the willingness to continue the game may be lost It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In other words, in the normal gaming state after the game per grand prize based on the normal grand prize, the first winning probability that the probability variation function is not activated based on the first normal grand prize and the second normal prize per The winning determination process is executed with one of the two winning probabilities (double standard) of the second probability that the probability changing function is activated based on. Therefore, even if this normal gaming state is repeated, at least the first winning probability that is the standard winning probability is maintained, so that a state where the jackpot is not won over a long period of time (so-called hell mode) ) And the change in the ease of winning in the normal gaming state (so-called wave) can be given by the second winning probability that is easy to win.

  Also, if the winning probabilities for the first normal grand prize and the second normal grand prize that trigger the transition to the normal gaming state are approximately the same, the second winning probability in the normal gaming state As a result, the degree of expectation that the winning determination process is executed increases. In other words, considering the proportion of the first winning probability adopted in the normal gaming state and the proportion of the second winning probability adopted, the winning probability (average probability) expected in the normal gaming state is the first winning probability. Since it becomes much higher than the probability, it is possible to further enhance the expectation of the player in the normal gaming state.

[Technology 7]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 7 is
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6,
When it is determined that the winning determination is determined in the winning determination process and the winning type determined in the winning type determination process is per special small prize among the small prizes,
The gaming state after the game per prize based on the special prize is executed is controlled to an amplified gaming state that can amplify the value as a winning by the gaming state control means,
When being controlled to the amplified gaming state by the gaming state control means,
When the winning determination process determines that the winning type is determined and the winning type determination process determines that the winning type is per second normal grand prize, the game per grand prize based on the second normal grand prize is executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the winning value is amplified by controlling the subsequent gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state instead of the second normal gaming state.

  In the technical idea 7, when it is determined that the winning determination is made in the winning determination process and the winning type determined by the winning type determining process is the second normal grand prize (second long open big hit), the second normal grand prize The gaming state after the winning game based on winning is executed is controlled to the second normal gaming state (external normal gaming state B). The second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the movable member is controlled in the normal mode and the winning determination process is performed based on the second winning probability. Therefore, when being controlled to the second normal gaming state, the player recognizes that the normal gaming state is not advantageous to him and plays the game. In addition, when the winning type determined in the winning determination process and the winning type determined by the winning type determining process is per special prize (first short open big hit), a game per prize based on the special prize After the game is executed, the gaming state is controlled to the amplified gaming state. If it is determined that the winning determination process is won while being controlled in this amplified game control state, the winning value is amplified more than the original winning value depending on the winning type. Specifically, in the amplified gaming state, when it is determined that the winning determination is made in the winning determination process and the winning type determined by the winning type determining process is per second normal grand prize, the second normal grand prize winning After the game based on the grand prize is executed, it should be controlled to the second normal gaming state as described above, but instead, the first advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state B) is used instead. Be controlled. This amplified gaming state corresponds to the promotion mode (that is, the external advantageous gaming state B) of the present embodiment. Therefore, in the above technical idea, the first advantageous gaming state and the amplified gaming state are synonymous.

  As described above, when the game is controlled in the amplified gaming state, even if the prize is won per special prize, the value as a winning can be amplified in the subsequent gaming state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Conventionally, when winning per special small prize, even if it is per small prize, the winning probability is the same as that per big prize. In other words, despite the fact that the probability of winning per prize is the same as per prize, there was a significant difference in the number of game balls given to the player as a prize. The degree of discouragement was large. In this regard, in the above technical idea, even if the prize is won per prize, the subsequent gaming state is controlled to an amplified gaming state that can amplify the value of the winning prize. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that no game ball is awarded to a player as a prize ball.

  In addition, there is a correlation between the winning probability per winning prize in the winning determination process and the gaming ball given as a winning ball at the time of winning game per game (that is, if the winning probability is increased, the winning game is played as a winning ball at the winning game) The number of game balls given to the player must be reduced, and if the number of game balls given to the player as a prize ball at the time of the game per grand prize is increased, the winning probability needs to be lowered). In other words, the winning probability can be increased by providing a small prize per game ball that is awarded as a prize ball rather than a grand prize. On the other hand, according to the above technical idea, the winning probability can be increased by providing a small prize, while the prize ball given to the player even if the prize is won per prize in the subsequent gaming state. Can reduce discouragement caused by low Rather, what is to be controlled to the second normal gaming state in the subsequent gaming state is controlled instead to the first advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state B), so the player is expected It gives a feeling and can suppress a decrease in interest.

[Technology 8]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 8 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6 or 7,
The gaming state control means includes
When the winning type determined in the winning type determining process in the first advantageous gaming state is per the first normal grand prize, the game after the game per grand prize based on the first normal grand prize is executed The winning determination is made based on the first probability that the movable member is controlled in a promotion mode in which the acceptance of the game ball to the second receiving port is promoted more than the normal mode only for a predetermined period. Control to the second advantageous gaming state in which processing is performed,
When the winning type determined in the winning determination process and the winning type determined in the winning type determination process is per second normal grand prize during the predetermined period controlled to the second advantageous gaming state, A gaming machine that amplifies the value as a winning by controlling the gaming state after the game per winning a prize based on the second normal winning a prize to the first advantageous gaming state .

  According to the technical idea 8, when the first advantageous game state is controlled, if the winning per first normal grand prize (third long open big prize) is won, the game per grand prize based on the first normal grand prize is executed. The subsequent gaming state is controlled to the second advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state A) only for a predetermined period. The second advantageous gaming state is a game in which the movable member is controlled to an acceleration mode in which the reception of the game ball at the second receiving port is promoted more than the normal mode, and the winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability. State. Then, if a winning per second normal grand prize (second long open big prize) is won during a predetermined period controlled in the second advantageous gaming state, a game per grand prize based on the second normal grand prize is executed. The subsequent gaming state is originally controlled to the second normal gaming state (external normal gaming state B), but is controlled to the first advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state B). In this way, the winning value is amplified. As a result, even if the winning determination process is no longer performed with the second winning probability due to the winning of the first normal grand prize in the first advantageous gaming state, If the player wins, the player is again controlled to the first advantageous gaming state, so that the disappointment of the player can be reduced and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined period is, for example, until a predetermined time elapses or until a lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (a special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times).

[Technology 9]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 9 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 8,
The specific condition establishment determination means is configured to determine whether the lottery means performs the winning determination process based on which of the first probability and the second probability, Even if a game ball is accepted at any of the two reception entrances, each of them determines whether or not the specific condition is satisfied with one probability,
When the game state control means is controlled to the normal game state, the similar effect image displayed by the effect display control means is controlled to the advantageous game state by the game state control means It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed more frequently.

  In the technical idea 9, when winning in the winning determination process, the specific condition establishment determining means determines whether the winning determination process is performed based on either the first winning probability or the second winning probability. Whether or not a game ball is received at either the entrance or the second entrance, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied with one probability. In other words, when the winning acceptance process is accepted, the specific condition is always established with one probability regardless of whether the winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability or the second winning probability. It is determined whether or not. Similarly, even if the winning condition is accepted at the second reception entrance, the specific condition always has one probability regardless of whether the winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability or the second winning probability. It is determined whether it is established. Note that “It is always determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied with one probability” means that the probability that the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball is received at the first entrance and the second entrance. It does not mean that the probability of establishment of the specific condition when accepted is the same, and the probability of establishment of the specific condition when accepted at the first receiving port is always one probability, and / or This means that the probability of establishment of the specific condition is always one when it is accepted at the second receiving port. Here, “one probability” means, for example, an invariable (constant) probability that is not accompanied by a probability fluctuation.

  By the way, as described above, it is impossible to grasp whether a game per ordinary small prize has been played or whether a specific condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when a game per normal small prize is played, the subsequent game state is controlled to the second normal game state (external normal game state B), whereas when the specific condition is satisfied, the game There is no change in the state (that is, the gaming state when the specific condition is satisfied is continued).

  Further, the specific condition establishment determining means is more controlled when the normal gaming state (external normal gaming state A / B) is controlled than when the advantageous gaming state (external advantageous gaming state A / B) is controlled. The determination is made so that the probability of establishment of the specific condition increases. Specifically, the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the game ball is received at the first reception port is higher than the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the game ball is received at the second reception port. As a result, the frequency at which the effect image indicating that the normal prize is won or a similar effect image is displayed on the effect image display device is controlled in the normal gaming state than in the advantageous gaming state. If you have been higher. Therefore, in the case of being controlled in the normal gaming state, the player is given a sense of expectation that the winning determination process may be performed based on the second probability than in the case of being controlled in the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a normal gaming state that tends to be monotonous. This further increases the possibility that the game will continue to be played without getting the player bored. In addition, when controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it will be in a state of waiting for winning the lottery without reducing the so-called holding ball, so even though it is not actually won, it is usually won per prize It is not necessary to frequently display the effect image or the similar effect image on the effect image display device.

  Note that “the frequency with which the effect image is displayed on the effect image display device is increased” does not increase the display frequency of the effect image by internal control, as described above. This is because when the normal gaming state is controlled, the movable member is controlled in a normal mode in which the reception of the game ball into the second receiving port is suppressed rather than the promotion mode. That is, when the normal gaming state is controlled, since the movable member is in a normal state, the first receiving port is easier to receive the game ball than the second receiving port. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to be in an advantageous game state, the movable member is in an accelerating mode, so that the second receiving port is easier to receive the game ball than the first receiving port. Therefore, when controlled to the normal gaming state, the frequency of accepting the gaming balls to the second receiving port is suppressed compared to when controlling to the advantageous gaming state, and as a result, the gaming balls to the first receiving port are controlled. Since the relative acceptance degree of becomes higher, the probability of establishment of the specific condition becomes higher. As a result, in the normal gaming state, the frequency of displaying the similar effect image is increased as compared with the advantageous gaming state.

[Technology 10]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 10 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 8,
The specific condition establishment determination means is configured to determine whether the lottery means performs the winning determination process based on which of the first probability and the second probability, Even if a game ball is accepted at any of the two reception entrances, each of them determines whether or not the specific condition is satisfied with one probability,
When the game state control unit is controlled to the advantageous game state, the display of the similar effect image displayed by the effect display control unit is suppressed more than when the game state control unit is controlled to the normal game state. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

  In the technical idea 10, when winning in the winning determination process, the specific condition establishment determining means determines whether the winning determination process is performed based on either the first winning probability or the second winning probability. Whether or not a game ball is received at either the entrance or the second entrance, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied with one probability. In other words, when the winning acceptance process is accepted, the specific condition is always established with one probability regardless of whether the winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability or the second winning probability. It is determined whether or not. Similarly, even if the winning condition is accepted at the second reception entrance, the specific condition always has one probability regardless of whether the winning determination process is performed based on the first winning probability or the second winning probability. It is determined whether it is established. Note that “It is always determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied with one probability” means that the probability that the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball is received at the first entrance and the second entrance. It does not mean that the probability of establishment of the specific condition when accepted is the same, and the probability of establishment of the specific condition when accepted at the first receiving port is always one probability, and / or This means that the probability of establishment of the specific condition is always one when it is accepted at the second receiving port. Here, “one probability” means, for example, an invariable (constant) probability that is not accompanied by a probability fluctuation.

  In addition, if the second winning determination process is lost, the specific condition may not be satisfied. As a mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied, in the second winning determination process, when the specific condition is established, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is set to zero, for example, 0/653. Any aspect in which the establishment determination itself is not performed is included.

  Further, when the game state control means is controlled to the advantageous game state (external advantageous game state A / B), it is more similar than the case where it is controlled to the normal game state (external normal game state A / B). Image display is suppressed. Specifically, the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the game ball is received at the second reception port is lower than the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the game ball is received at the first reception port.

  Here, “the display of the similar effect image is suppressed” does not mean that the display of the similar effect image is suppressed by internal control, but when the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, This is because the movable member is controlled in a promotion mode in which the reception of the game ball at the entrance is promoted more than in the normal mode. That is, when the normal gaming state is controlled, since the movable member is in a normal state, the first receiving port is easier to receive the game ball than the second receiving port. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to be in an advantageous game state, the movable member is in an accelerating mode, so that the second receiving port is easier to receive the game ball than the first receiving port. Therefore, when controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the frequency of accepting game balls to the second receiving port is increased compared to when controlled to the normal gaming state, and as a result, the probability of establishment of the specific condition is lowered. . Thereby, in the advantageous gaming state, the frequency with which the similar effect image is displayed is suppressed as compared with the normal gaming state.

  Moreover, the fact that the frequency of displaying the similar effect image is suppressed does not mean that the number of display of the similar effect image per unit time is suppressed, but the number of lottery processes (winning determination process). This means that the number of display times of the similar effect image is suppressed. For example, in the present embodiment, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the first winning determination process is 4/653, and the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the second winning determination process is 1/653. Therefore, when controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the second winning determination process is much higher than the first winning determination process, so the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is a probability close to 1/653. On the other hand, when the normal gaming state is controlled, the first winning determination process is much higher than the second winning determination process, so the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is a probability close to 4/653. In this way, when controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the number of similar effect images displayed relative to the number of lottery processing (winning determination processing) is suppressed compared to when controlled to the commuting gaming state.

  Thereby, when controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to reduce the annoyance caused by frequent display of the similar effect image on the effect image display device, and to suppress the decrease in interest. That is, the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the movable member is in the promotion mode and the winning determination process is performed based on the second probability, so when the advantageous gaming state is controlled, so-called holding balls are reduced. Without waiting to win the lottery. In such a state, the player feels annoyed when the similar effect image is frequently displayed even though the win is not actually won in the first lottery means or the second lottery means. It will be. Therefore, by making the frequency that the specific condition is established in the advantageous gaming state lower than the frequency that the specific condition is established in the normal gaming state, it is possible to reduce such annoyance and suppress a decrease in interest. .

  In addition, if a specific condition is met, the player may have won a small prize that cannot be expected to be given a game ball as a prize, even though he / she has not actually won the prize. It will be recognized that there is. Therefore, when it is controlled in the advantageous gaming state, the possibility of winning per prize even though it was not actually won per prize is unnecessary loss due to not winning per prize. A feeling will be given to the player. Therefore, when controlled in the advantageous gaming state, the uselessness given to the player is suppressed by suppressing the frequency of displaying the effect image that is very similar to the case where the effect image indicating that the prize is won per prize is displayed. Loss can be reduced, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

[Technology 11]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 11 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 10,
The game board portion has a center accessory for supporting an electric decoration member whose light emitting surface is located in front of the game board portion at a substantially center,
The light emission control means also controls light emission control of the electrical decoration member,
The electrical decoration member is disposed in front of the game area such that a game ball flows down between the light-emitting decorative body that emits light forward from the wide-area effect area formed behind the game area. It is a gaming machine characterized by

  In the technical idea 11, the game board portion has a center accessory 620 substantially in the center. The center accessory 620 supports an electrical decoration member (center decoration lamp 853) whose light emitting surface is positioned in front of the game board portion (specifically, the game panel 409). More specifically, the electrical decoration member has a blade-shaped decorative body 632 and a LED substrate 535 on which LEDs that emit light from the rear of the blade-shaped decorative body 632 are collectively arranged, and a blade having a light emitting surface. The mold decoration body 632 is positioned in front of the game panel 409. Thereby, the player can visually recognize as emitting light ahead of the game panel 409. The center accessory 620 supports the feather-shaped decorative body 632 among the electrical decoration members. On the other hand, the LED substrate 535 is provided on the decorative plate 521. The light emission control means also performs light emission control of the electrical decoration member (LED substrate 535). The electrical decoration member (specifically, the feather-shaped decorative body 632) is provided mainly on the outside of the effect display device 115 (that is, the region facing the flow surface where the game ball flows down) and on the front side of the game region 20. ing. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area 20 emits light forward from the electric decoration member (specifically, the feather-shaped decorative body 632) and the wide-area effect area (effect space 510G) formed behind the game area 20. The light-emitting decorative body (light-like decorative body 520, etc.) that flows is allowed to flow down. As a result, the game area 20 is formed between the rear effect area (effect space 510G) and the front effect area (the area in front of the game area 20 in which the feather-shaped decorative body 632 is disposed). An overflowing production can be performed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game production | presentation unit 5 Door frame 6 Lower decoration board 6a Decoration cover board 6C Fixing protrusion 6D Fixing hole 6E Fixing screw 6F Guide board 7 Upper support metal fitting 7E Hanging piece part 8 Lower support Metal fitting 8C Mounting hole 10 Upper frame plate 10B Engagement notch 10C Insertion hole 11 Lower frame plate 11B Engagement notch 11C Insertion hole 12 Side frame plate 12a Outer wall portion 12b Thickness portion 12A Outer frame inner space 12B Installation hole 12C Installation hole 12D Mounting hole 12E Mounting hole 12F Groove portion 12G Space portion 12H Recess 13 Side frame plate 13a Outer wall portion 13b Thickness portion 13A Outer frame space 13B Mounting hole 13C Mounting hole 13D Mounting hole 13F Groove portion 13G Space portion 13H Recess 14 Connecting member 15 Connecting hole 15B Connecting screw 16 Connecting hole 16B Connecting screw 17 Mounting screw 18 Mounting screw 19 Supporting protruding piece 19A Supporting saddle hole 20 Game area 20a Image display area 20b Ball flow area 21 Support protrusion 22 Closing protrusion 22B Mounting screw 23 Closing protrusion 23B Mounting screw 24 Peripheral control board box 25 Main control board box 28 Sphere slot 29 Launch guide path 30 Game effect unit installation recess 32 Plate Section 33 Upper security double groove 34 Side security groove 35 Security recess 37 Projection 38 Launch rail 39 Prize ball paying stopper mechanism 40 Launcher mounting portion 40a Handle connection window 41 Fastening hole 42, 43 Engaging groove 44 Rail connection member 44a Upper surface Part 46 Game effect unit fixture 47 Upper shaft support bracket 48 Lower shaft support bracket 49 Shaft support side 50 Prize ball tank 51 Tank rail member 51a Order supply device 52 Ball passage unit 53 Ball delivery device 54 Board unit 55 Delivery control board box 56 Terminal board box 57 Launcher 57a Hitting ball 58 Back cover 59 Supply passage 60 Locking device 62 Power supply board box 63 Ball feed mechanism 64 Board tray 68 Door relay board 70 Rear opening 78 Guide rail 80 LED display area 82 Normal symbol display 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold indicator 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 99 Game effect control unit 100 Door frame main body 101 Game window 102 Speaker opening 103 Prize ball passing port 104 Opening 105 Lid opening 106 Lock Hole 107 Slide unit mounting recess 108 Lever 110 Mounting opening 111 Engaging projection 112 Door frame protruding piece 115 Production display device 116 Attaching projection 118 Attaching / detaching locking portion 119 Display device control board box 120 Door lens unit 121 Lens base body 122 Upper reflector 123 Cathode tube support piece 125 Electrode support part 1 27 Electrode cover 128a, 128b Speaker through hole 130a, 130b Side reflector 131a, 131b Electrode support 132 Upper cold cathode tube 133 Rubber sleeve 134a, 134b Side cold cathode tube 135a, 135b Rubber sleeve 136 Inverter substrate 137 LED substrate 138a, 138b LED board 140 Lens cover 141 Upper lens cover part 141c Front lens part 142a, 142b Side lens cover part 142c Front lens part 143a, 143b Speaker mounting holes 144a, 144b Speaker 145a Speaker cones 146a, 146b Speaker covers 147a, 147b Mesh cover 148a, 148b Decoration member attachment area 149a, 149b Decoration member 150 Red lens part 151 Cover base plate 152 LED substrate 154 Sp Frame 155 Decoration base plate 156 LED board 158 Decoration frame 159a, 159b Decoration plate 160 Reinforcement sheet metal 161 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 162 Shaft support side reinforcement sheet metal 163 Opening side reinforcement sheet metal 164 Lower reinforcement sheet metal 165 Upper bent protrusion 166 Lower bent protrusion Piece 167 Characteristic bent protrusion 172 Shaft support side short bent protrusion 173 Open side outer bent protrusion 174 Open side inner bent protrusion 175 Engagement opening 176 Hook cover 177 Prize ball passing port covering portion 178 Bending projection piece 179 Bending projection piece 180 Vertical folding projection piece 190 Glass unit 191 Unit frame 194 Stopping piece 195 Hooking projection piece 199 Security protrusion plate portion 200 Engaging groove 201 Glass plate 210 Security cover 211 Contact recess 212 Anti-crime protrusion 213 Mounting elastic piece 214 Anti-crimping protrusion 215 Anti-crime end edge protrusion 220 Mounting base 221 Prize ball passing opening 222 Mounting unit Portion 223 Lid opening 224 Standing wall 226 Unit 227 Ball flight guide surface 230 Slide unit 231 Slide engagement / disconnection piece 240 Frame decoration relay terminal plate 241 Relay board cover 280 Back cover support cylinder 290 First peripheral wall 290a Insertion hole 291 First Two peripheral wall 292 Third peripheral wall 293 Fourth peripheral wall 294 Open side rear wall 295 Upper rear wall 296 Pivot side rear wall 300 Dish unit 301 Unit frame 302 Upper surface cover portion 302a Vertical cover portion 303 Front cover portion 304 Front decorative plate 305 Dish body upper surface opening 306 Operation button unit concave space 307 Decoration space 310 Space portion forming member 310a Connector 310b Wiring storage opening 313 First ball removal button 313a First ball removal button opening 314 Sliding support member 315a, 315b Speaker openings 316a and 316b Cover 317 Handle mounting hole 318 Handle unit 318a Rotating operation member 319 Engagement cam 320 Second ball release button opening 322 Ball discharge port 323 Ball rental button unit opening 324 Ball rental unit 325 Fastener insertion hole 326 Operation button unit 327 Operation button 330 Lower speaker unit 331 Speaker box main body 337 Ball exit passage front bar 338 Guide bar 341a, 341b Speaker 350 Lock mounting hole 351 Lock locking hole 352 Door hook hole 353 Lock mounting hole 354 Cylinder lock through hole 360 Dish body 361 Storage portion 362 Guide passage portion 364 Ball extraction passage portion 365 Slide valve 366 Rotating member 367 Rotating shaft 369 Spring 375 Ball extraction valve 383 Side opening lid 388 Sphere extraction opening 395 Power supply board 400 Second ball extraction link unit 401 Second ball extraction Button 409 game 409a Fitting hole 409b Long hole 409c Engagement step portion 409d Inner rail fixing hole 409e Opening portion 409f Lower hole 410 Obstacle nail 414 First link 415 Ball removal connection passage 419 Second link 430 Dish cover body 431 Prize ball contact rod 432 Opening lid attachment window 433 Ball exit passage rear 樋 434 Upper guide 樋 435 Lower guide 樋 436 Guide hole 462 Inner rail unit 463 Backflow prevention member 464 Rail security groove 465 Security projection 466 Positioning recess 467 Game effect unit stop 468 Speaker cutout 469 Fastening portion 471 Out port 472 Outer rail unit 472a Rail surface 472b Lower end portion 473 Communication port 473a Foul ball guide passage 476 Stop portion 477 Connection passage portion 477a Upper surface 477b Stop wall portion 478 Passage notch portion 482 Guide rail 489 Foul port 500 Switchgear 500 a Grand prize opening 500b Grand prize opening / closing door 504 Panel back plate 504a Screw hole 504b Positioning hole 504c Locking claw 504d Recessed portion 504e Opening 505 Substrate holder 505a Game ball outlet 505b Bottom plate 505c Relief portion 505d Substrate support portion 505e Fixed boss 505f Through hole 505g Opening receiving portion 508 Lamp drive board box 510 Back unit 510G Production space 514 Back box 514a Opening portion 514b Fixing portion 514c Positioning projection 515 First screw 516 Removable groove 518 Removable mechanism 520 Light decorative body 521 Decoration plate 530 Blade type Decorative body 535 LED board 540 Panel holder 540a Fitting step 540b Through hole 540c Engaging protrusion 540d Engaging claw 540e Protruding pin 540f Boss insertion hole 540g Mounting support 540h Housing recess 540i Locking part 540j First mounting hole 540k Second mounting hole 540l Positioning hole 540m Thickening portion 540n Positioning portion 540o Communication hole 540p Communication hole 550 Second warp passage 554 Second warp outlet 560 Second stage 560a Front stage 560b Rear stage 562 Special receiving port 564 Normal receiving port 566 Second warp outlet side end 568 Second warp counter-exit side end 580 Rotating and distributing accessory 580a Magnetic attachment part 590 Disc-like accessory 591 Main body part 592 Lower electrical decoration body 594 Upper electrical decoration body 596 Medium Illuminated body 600 First start port 602 Second start port 604 Third start port 606 Movable piece 612 Pass gate 614 General winning port 620 Center accessory 621 Opening 621a Transparent plate 622 Frame-shaped decorative body 630 Feather-shaped decorative body 632 Feather Mold decorative body 632a Window portion 641 Substrate cover 642 Wiring opening 643 Mounting piece 644 Wiring retaining piece 645 Out ball passage 646 Fitting hole 648 Main drawer relay board 649 Sub drawer relay board 650 First warp passage 652 First warp inlet 654 First warp outlet 658 Warp guide piece 660 First stage 662 Mountain portion 664 Valley Portion 666 First warp outlet side end 668 First warp opposite outlet side end 680 Front component 680a Opening 680c Positioning fixing boss 680d Positioning protrusion 685 U-shaped base 685a Side surface 685b Side surface 700 Main board 702 First special symbol display control Means 704 Second special symbol display control means 710 Main control board 711 CPU
712 ROM
713 RAM
714 Opening / closing device operation processing means 715 Big hit game execution means 715a Long open big hit game execution means 715b Short open big hit game execution means 716 Normal symbol display control means 718 Normal symbol hold display control means 720 Discharge control board 722 CPU
724 ROM
726 RAM
730 Full switch 736 Inner frame opening switch 738 Door opening switch 750 Panel relay terminal plate 751 Fitting protrusion 753 External terminal plate 754 Opening and closing device relay terminal plate 760 Gate sensor 762 General winning opening sensor 768 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 774 Normal Electric accessory solenoid 776 Opening / closing device count sensor 778 Opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 780 First start port sensor 782 Second start port sensor 784 Third start port sensor 800 Peripheral board 810 Peripheral control board 811 CPU
812 ROM
813 RAM
816 Display Device Control Board 818 Sound Source IC
819 ROM
832 CPU
834 RAM
836 ROM
838 VDP
839 Image ROM
842 Frame decoration lamp 850 Lamp drive board 852 Panel decoration lamp 853 Center decoration lamp 854 Discharge port detection sensor 860 Hook through opening 861 Screw fixing portion 862 Locking protrusion 863 Insertion hole 864 Rivet 865 Fraud prevention notch 866 Lock attachment piece 867 Lock insertion Hole 868 Cylinder lock 869 Lock attachment board 870 Screw 871 Attachment hole 872 Lock shaft 873 Engagement cam 874 Engagement protrusion 875 Engagement protrusion 876 Screw 877 Insertion vertical opening 878 Insertion vertical opening 879 Spring locking piece 880 Horizontal hole 882 First Fraud prevention member 882a Inclined portion 883 Oscillating shaft hole 884 Projection piece insertion hole 885 Stopper piece portion 886 Guide pin 887 Pin hole 888 Connection hole 889 Restriction protrusion 890 Second fraud prevention member 892 Connection hole 893 Connection pin 894 Spring 896 Spring engagement Blind hole 897 abutment portion 898 Stop hole 900 First special symbol lottery means 902 First special symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 903 First special symbol hold counter 904 First special symbol success / failure determination means 906 First normal special symbol determination table 907 Second normal special symbol Judgment table 908 First probability variation special symbol determination table 909 Second probability variation special symbol determination table 910 Second special symbol lottery means 912 Second special symbol validity determination random number acquisition means 913 Second special symbol hold counter 914 Second special symbol validity determination Means 920 Normal symbol lottery means 922 Normal symbol success / failure determination random number acquisition means 923 Normal symbol hold means 924 Normal symbol success / failure determination means 926 Normal general symbol determination table 927 Open extended normal symbol determination table 928 Movable piece opening / closing control means 930 First special symbol Hold display control means 932 Second special symbol hold display control means 934 Game state control Means 938 Opening / closing operation control means 940 Reservation order storage means 946 Command transmission means 950 Command reception means 960 Production lottery means 962 Production control means 971 Door frame sliding hook 973 Door frame hook 974 Rivet slot 976 Guide protrusion 978 Play hole 979 Lifting engagement hole 980 Spring hook portion 981 Abutting elastic piece 982 Spring 983 Notch portion 984 Body frame sliding rod 985 Upper hook member 986 Lower hook member 987 Connecting wire rod 988 Hook portion 989 Rivet slot 991 Projection One moving hole 993 Spring hook part 994 Connecting hole 995 Connecting hole 996 Rivet long hole 997 Lowering engagement hole 998 Play hole 999 Projecting piece moving hole 1000 First special symbol corresponding pattern 1002 Second special symbol corresponding pattern 1004 Timer 1014 Hook part 1015 Contact portion 1016 Contact 1017 Engagement cutout portion 1150 Hold display area 1151 First hold display area 1151a First hold storage display section 1151b Second hold storage display section 1151c Third hold storage display section 1151d Fourth hold storage display section 1152 2nd hold display area 1152a 5th hold storage display portion 1152b 6th hold storage display portion 1152c 7th hold storage display portion 1152d 8th hold storage display portion 1153 Decorative design 1153a Left design row 1153b Middle design row 1153c Right Design row 1153d Decorative image 1160 Optical vortex image 1404 Discharge port 1412 Passage 1413 Ball leveling member 1414 Ball presser plate 1415 Gear cover 1416 Alignment gear 1417 Shaft pin 1421 Bending passage wall 1422a Ball falling passage 1422a Front and rear bending passage portion 1422b Left and right bending passage portion 1422c Vertical passage Part 1423 Notch part 1424 Detection piece 1425 Ball cut switch 1427 Actuator 1428 Stopper projection 1429 Ball clogging insertion groove 1451 Unit base body 1452 Bent passage wall 1453 Bent passage 1455 Distribution space 1456 Bearing cylinder 1457 Sprocket 1458 Rotating shaft 1459 Passage Compartment wall 1460 Prize ball passage 1461 Ball removal passage 1462 Discharge ball detection sensor 1464 Motor storage space 1465 Discharge motor 1468 Motor shaft 1469 Guide protrusion 1472 Detachable button 1475 Unit sub-plate 1476 Relay substrate area 1480 Relay substrate 1481 Connector 1485 Substrate cover 1488 Button Opening 1489 Connection opening 1490 Gear region 1491 Aluminum heat sink 1493 First gear 1494 Second gear 1495 Shaft 1497 Third gear 1 98 Shaft 1500 Detection disk 1501 Detection notch 1502 Gear part 1504 Sensor board 1505 Sensor 1507 Board mounting part 1510 Gear cover 1521 Box main body 1522 Side guidance path 1523 Side guidance receiving part 1524 Buffer member 1525 Reverse side guidance path 1526 Partition wall 1527 Inclination Side wall 1528 Switch storage space 1529 Support pin 1530 Shaft spring 1531 Full swing plate 1532 Detection piece 1534 Stopper piece 1535 Front guide passage 1536 Ball exit 1537 Foul ball passage 1538 Foul ball entrance 1541 Lid 1542 Prize ball entrance 1543 Switch mounting portion 1547 Wiring drawer recess 1549 Spring locking pin 2000 Main drawer connector 2000a Unit side main drawer connector 2000b Frame side main drawer connector 2001a Termina 2001b Contact 2002 Sub Drawer Connector 2002a Unit Side Sub Drawer Connector 2002b Frame Side Sub Drawer Connector 2003a Terminal 2003b Contact 2010 Connector for Discharge Control Board 2012 Door Frame Connector 2100 Hot Line Failure Prevention Circuit 2100a Hot Line Failure Prevention Circuit 2100b Hot Line Failure Prevention Circuit 2100c Hot-line failure prevention circuit 5131 Random number storage area 5132 for determination of success / failure Processing area

Claims (1)

And game effects unit realm can be placed an effect member at the back side of the game board portion and the recreation plate portion having a playfield is at least provided,
A tank unit capable of storing game balls supplied from an amusement island where gaming machines are installed;
A rear extending portion formed in a shape extending rearward from the tank portion so that the game ball is guided to a position on the rear side of the tank portion;
Transverse channel which flows down the rear extended portion or these game balls to the downstream side at even the rear-side position than the tank, and, with the transverse channel at even the rear-side position than the tank portion A ball passage having a height direction passage which is connected and allows a game ball from the lateral passage to flow down to the downstream side;
A payout device which is provided in the ball passage and pays out a game ball as the game progresses;
A frame having at least a front side wall portion in which the game board portion is accommodated;
With
The frame body further includes a rear side wall portion behind the front side wall portion so that the height direction passage is arranged behind the front side wall portion, and the game board portion is accommodated in the front side wall portion. A second drawer connector that can be fitted to the first drawer connector provided on the rear side of the game board part so that the game board part can be electrically connected to the game board part when it is performed. And
The ball passage further includes a depth-direction passage that rolls the game ball from the height-direction passage to a storage dish on the front side of the frame,
The second drawer connector is disposed on the right side relative to the depth direction passage as viewed from the front,
On the rear side of the frame body, an opening is provided in a shape along each member constituting the lateral passage and the height passage,
A gaming machine, further comprising cover means located in the opening and arranged to cover the back side of the gaming effect unit.